GSK 980TDHi Program & Operation Manual

This manual is used for PLC of GSK980TDHi series bus lathe
CNC system and its installation and connection.
In this user manual we have tried to describe the matters

concerning the operation of this CNC system to the greatest extent.
However, it is impossible to give particular descriptions for all
unnecessary or unallowable operations due to length limitation and
products application conditions；Therefore, the items not presented
herein should be regarded as ―impossible‖ or ―unallowable‖.
Copyright is reserved to GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. It is

illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual.
GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. reserves the right to ascertain their
legal liability.
Programming and Operating Manual of GSK980TDHi Series Bus-Based Tool Machine CNC System
Preface
Your Excellency,
We are honored by your purchase of this GSK 988TD Turning CNC

System made by GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
This manual is used for PLC of GSK980TDHi bus-based lathe CNC

system (version V1.5) and its installation connection and describes how PLC
of the system is programmed, installed and connected in details.
To ensure safe and effective running, please read this manual carefully
before installation and operation.
II
Preface and Safety Warning
Warning
Accident may occur by improper connection and operation！This
system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel.
Note:
The power supply fixed on/in the cabinet is exclusively used for the
CNC system made by GSK.
It can‘t be applied to other purposes, or else it may cause serious
danger!
III
STATEMENT!
 This manual describes various possibilities as much as possible.
However, operations allowable or unallowable cannot be explained one by
one due to so many possibilities that may involve with, so the contents
that are not specially stated in this manual shall be regarded as
unallowable.
WARNING！
 Please read this manual and a manual from machine tool builder carefully
before installation, programming and operation, and strictly observe the
requirements. Otherwise, products and machine may be damaged,
workpiece be scrapped or the user be injured.
CAUTION!
 Functions, technical indexes (such as precision and speed) described in
this user manual are only for this system. Actual function deployment and
technical performance of the machine tool are designed by the machine
tool manufacturer, so function configuration and technical indexes are
subject to the user manual from the machine tool manufacturer.
 It is strongly suggested that PLC should be modified by GSK staff. To
avoid the accident, don’t modify the system on-site.
This manual is subject to change without further notice.
IV
Preface and Safety Warning
Cautions
■ Delivery and storage
● Packing box over 6 layers in pile is unallowed.
● Never climb the packing box, stand on it or place heavy objects on it.
● Do not move or drag the products by the cables connected to it.
● Forbid collision or scratch to the panel and display screen.
● Avoid dampness, insolation and drenching.
■ Open-package inspection
● Confirm that the products are the required ones.
● Check whether the products are damaged in transit.
● Confirm that the parts in packing box are in accordance with the packing list.
● Contact us in time if any inconsistence, shortage or damage is found.
■ Connection
● Only qualified personnel can connect the system or check the connection.
● The system must be earthed, and the earth resistance must be less than 0.1Ω.
The earth wire cannot be replaced by zero wire.
● The connection must be correct and firm to avoid any fault or unexpected
consequence.
● Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid damage to the
system.
● Switch off power supply before plugging out or opening electric cabinet.
■ Troubleshooting
● Switch off power supply before troubleshooting or changing components.
● Check the fault when short circuit or overload occurs. Restart can only be done
after troubleshooting.
● Frequent switching on/off of the power is forbidden, and the interval time should
be at least 1 min.
V
Safety Responsibility
Manufacturer’s Responsibility
——Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated and/or controlled on
design and configuration of the provided CNC systems and accessories.
——Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC systems and accessories.
——Be responsible for the provided information and advice for the users.
User’s Responsibility
——Be responsible for being familiar with and mastering the safety operation
procedures through training with the safety operation of the CNC system.
——Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding, changing or altering the original
CNC systems and the accessories.
——Be responsible for the dangers caused by failing to observe the provisions in the
manual for operation, adjustment, maintenance, installation and storage.
This manual is kept by the end user.
Thank you for supporting us in the use of GSK‘s products!
VI
Contents
Contents
PART I PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION.......................................... 1

Chapter 1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Product Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Model Definition ............................................................................................................................................. 6
Chapter 2 Basic Knowledge of Programming ....................................................................... 7
2.1 Control Axis ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Axis Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3 Axis Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4 Machine zero and Coordinate System...................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Workpiece Coordinate System ................................................................................................................... 9
2.6 Absolute Value Programming and Increment Value Programming .................................................... 9
2. 7 Diameter and Radius Type Programming ............................................................................................. 10
2. 8 Modal, Amodal and Initial State ............................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Program Composition ................................................................................................................................. 13
3.1.1 Program name ................................................................................................................... 13
3.1.2 Sequence number and program segment....................................................................... 14
3.1.3 Code word .......................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Program Structure........................................................................................................................................ 16
3.2.1 Subprogram Writing .......................................................................................................... 17
3.2.2 Subprogram invocation ..................................................................................................... 17
3.2.3 Program End...................................................................................................................... 18
Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code ............................................................................... 19
4.1 Types of Preparation Function G code ................................................................................................... 19
4.2 Simple G Codes ........................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2.1 Rapid positioning G00....................................................................................................... 21
4.2.2 Linear interpolation G01 ................................................................................................... 23
4.2.3 Arc interpolation G02/G03 ................................................................................................ 24
4.2.4 Pause (G04) ...................................................................................................................... 28
4.2.6 Workpiece coordinate system selection G54-G59 ......................................................... 29
4.2.7 Coordinate setting G50 ..................................................................................................... 32
4.2.8 Plane selection G17/G18/G19 ......................................................................................... 34
4.2.9 Skip function (G31) ........................................................................................................... 35
4.2.10 Inch/ metric conversion G20/G21 .................................................................................. 36
4.2.11 Chamfer /corner arc with any angle ............................................................................... 38
4.2.11.1 Drawing dimension direct input function ............................................................................... 39
4.2.12 Equal pitch thread cutting (G32) .................................................................................... 41
4.2.13 Variable pitch thread cutting (G34) ................................................................................ 45
4.2.14 Tapping circulation code (G84 and G88)....................................................................... 46
4.2.14.1 Rigid tapping (M29) ................................................................................................................... 47
4.2.14.2 Ordinary (flexible) tapping ........................................................................................................ 52
4.2.15 Drilling circulation code ................................................................................................... 54
4.2.16 Ellipse instruction code ................................................................................................... 55
4.2.17 Parabola instruction code ............................................................................................... 55
4.2.18 Polar coordinate interpolation ........................................................................................ 57
4.2.19 Cylinder interpolation ...................................................................................................... 60
4.2.20 Polygon cutting ................................................................................................................ 64
4.3 Reference Point G Code ............................................................................................................................ 68
VII
4.3.1 Automatic return to machine zero (G28) ......................................................................... 68

4.4 Single Fixed Circulation Code .................................................................................................................. 69
4.4.1 Axial cutting circulation (G90) ........................................................................................... 70
4.4.2 (G94) Radial cutting circulation (G94) ............................................................................. 72
4.4.3 Thread cutting circulation (G92) ....................................................................................... 74
4.4.4 Precautions for Single Fixed Circulation Code ............................................................... 77
4.5 Compound Fixed Circulation Code ......................................................................................................... 78
4.5.1 Axial rough turning circulation (Type I of G71) ................................................................ 78
4.5.2 Groove circulation processing (Type II of G71) .............................................................. 81
4.5.3 Radial rough turning circulation (Type I of G72) ............................................................. 83
4.5.4 Groove circulation processing (Type II of G72) .............................................................. 86
4.5.5 Closed cutting circulation (G73) ....................................................................................... 88
4.5.6 Fine processing circulation (G70) .................................................................................... 90
4.5.7 Axial grooving circulation (G74) ....................................................................................... 91
4.5.8 Radial grooving circulation (G75)..................................................................................... 93
4.5.9 Multiple thread cycles (G76)............................................................................................. 94
4.5.10 Notice for compound and fixed loop code..................................................................... 97
4.6 Tool Compensation Function .................................................................................................................... 98
4.6.1 Basic concept for tool compensation function C............................................................. 98
4.6.1.1 Concept of assumed tool nose.................................................................................................. 98
4.6.1.2 Direction of assumed tool nose............................................................................................... 100
4.6.1.3 Setting of compensation value ................................................................................................ 103
4.6.1.4 Relative position of tool and workpiece ................................................................................. 104
4.6.1.5 Inner and outer side ................................................................................................................... 105
4.6.1.6 Code format of G41, G42 and G40 ........................................................................................ 106
4.6.2 Details of tool compensation ...........................................................................................106
4.6.2.1 Decomposition to detailed path of tool nose radius compensation ................................ 106
4.6.2.2 Change tool compensation direction in tool compensation implementation ................. 114
4.6.2.3 Temporary cancellation of tool compensation ..................................................................... 116
4.6.2.4 Non movement instruction contained in tool compensation ............................................. 116
4.6.2.5 Check of tool compensation interference ............................................................................. 117
4.6.2.6 Tool nose radius compensation in Code G90/G94 ............................................................. 119
4.6.2.7 Tool nose radius compensation in Code G70 ...................................................................... 120
4.6.3 Notice for tool compensation C .......................................................................................120
4.6.4 Example of tool compensation processing C.................................................................121
4.7 Code G of Macro Function ...................................................................................................................... 123
4.7.1 User's macro program .....................................................................................................123
4.7.2 Macro variables ................................................................................................................124
4.7.3 Non-modal call of G65 .....................................................................................................132
4.7.4 Function A of user‘s macroprogram ................................................................................132
4.7.5 Function B of user‘s macro program ..............................................................................136
Chapter 5 Code M of Auxiliary Function ............................................................................. 142
5.1 Code M Controlled by PLC ..................................................................................................................... 143
5.1.1 Code instruction (M03, M04) for positive/reverse rotation of spindle ..........................143
5.1.2 Spindle rotation stop instruction (M05) ...........................................................................143
5.1.3 Cooling activation/deactivation (M08, M09) ...................................................................143
5.1.4 Chuck control (M12, M13) ...............................................................................................143
5.1.5 Switch of spindle speed and position mode (M14, M15) ..............................................143
5.1.6 Spindle orientation and cancellation (M18, M19) ..........................................................143
5.1.7 Loosen and fasten Spindle C (M20, M21) ......................................................................144
5.1.8 Gear control of spindle (M41, M42, M43 and M44) .......................................................144
5.1.9 Lubricating oil control (M32, M33) ..................................................................................144
5.2 Program control Code M .......................................................................................................................... 144
5.2.1 Program end and return (M30, M02) ..............................................................................144
5.2.2 Program pause (M00) ......................................................................................................144
5.2.3 Program selection pause (M01) ......................................................................................144
VIII
Contents
5.2.4 Call of subprogram code instruction (M98) ....................................................................144

5.2.5 Return from subprogram (M99).......................................................................................145
Chapter 6 S Code of Spindle Function ................................................................................ 146
6.1 Analog Control of Spindle.........................................................................................................................146
6.2 Switching Value Control of Spindle ........................................................................................................146
6.3 Constant Surface Cutting Speed Control G96/G97 ...........................................................................146
Chapter 7 F Code of Feed Function ...................................................................................... 150
7.1 Fast Motion..................................................................................................................................................150
7.2 Cutting Speed .............................................................................................................................................150
7.2.1 Feed per Minute (G98).....................................................................................................150
7.2.2 Feed per revolution (G99) ...............................................................................................151
7.3 Linear Speed Control of Cutting .............................................................................................................151
7.4 Feed Speed Magnification Keys .............................................................................................................151
7.5 Automatic Speed Controlling ...................................................................................................................153
7.6 Speed Controlling at the Corner of Block ............................................................................................. 154
Chapter 8 Tool Functions ......................................................................................................... 155
8.1 Meaning of T Code Format ......................................................................................................................155
8.2 Tool Offset....................................................................................................................................................155
8.3 Programming Examples ...........................................................................................................................156
PART II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .............................................. 158

Chapter 1 Operation Panel....................................................................................................... 159
1.1 Panel Division .............................................................................................................................................159
1.2 Description of Panel Functions ...............................................................................................................160
1.2.1 LCD (liquid crystal display) area .....................................................................................160
1.2.2 Editing keyboard area ......................................................................................................160
1.2.3 Introduction to screen keys .............................................................................................161
1.2.4 Machine control area .......................................................................................................162
Chapter 2 System Power-On, Shutdown, and Safe Operation .................................... 167
2.1 System Power-On......................................................................................................................................167
2.2 Shutdown .....................................................................................................................................................167
2.3 Safe Operations .........................................................................................................................................168
2.3.1 Reset .................................................................................................................................168
2.3.2 Emergency stop................................................................................................................168
2.3.3 Feed hold ..........................................................................................................................169
2.4 Circulation Start-up and Feed Hold .......................................................................................................169
2.5 Over-travel Protection ............................................................................................................................... 169
2.5.1 Hardware over-travel protection ......................................................................................169
2.5.2 Software over-travel protection .......................................................................................169
2.5.3 Release of over-travel alarm ...........................................................................................170
Chapter 3 Modification & Setting of Interface Display and Data ................................ 171
3.1 Position Display..........................................................................................................................................171
3.1.1 Four modes of display on position page.........................................................................171
3.1.2 Display of processing time, number of parts, programming speed, magnification, actual
velocity ........................................................................................................................................173
3.1.3 Relative coordinate clearing and halving .......................................................................174
3.1.4 Bus monitoring page display ...........................................................................................175
3.2 Program Display.........................................................................................................................................176
3.3 System Display...........................................................................................................................................178
3.3.1 CNC setting page .............................................................................................................178
3.3.1.1 Setting and modification of password and permission.......................................................180
3.3.1.2 System setting and modification of date and time .............................................................. 180
3.3.2 Parameter display, modification, and setting .................................................................180
IX
3.3.2.1 Parameter display ...................................................................................................................... 180

3.3.2.2 Modification and setting of parameter value ........................................................................ 182
3.3.3 Display, modification, and setting of pitch compensation .............................................183
3.3.3.1 Display of pitch compensation ................................................................................................ 183
3.3.3.2 Modification and setting of pitch compensation .................................................................. 183
3.3.4 Data backup, recovery, and transmission ......................................................................184
3.3.5 Display, modification, and setting of bus servo parameters .........................................186
3.3.5.1 Display of servo parameters .................................................................................................... 187
3.3.5.1.1 Modification and setting of servo parameters ...................................................................................... 187
3.3.5.1.2 Servo parameter setting matching motor model ................................................................................. 188
3.3.5.1.3 Backup of servo parameters .................................................................................................................... 189
3.3.5.1.4 Recovery of servo parameters ................................................................................................................ 189
3.3.5.1.5 Servo level clearing ...................................................................................................................................189
3.3.5.2 Servo debugging ........................................................................................................................ 190
3.3.5.2.1 Interface composition ................................................................................................................................ 190
3.3.5.2.2 Functions .................................................................................................................................................. 191
3.3.5.2.3 Operating instructions............................................................................................................................ 191
3.3.6 Timed shutdown display ..................................................................................................195
3.3.6.1 Setting of timed shutdown ........................................................................................................ 195
3.4 Offset Display ............................................................................................................................................. 195
3.4.1 Display, modification, and setting of bias .......................................................................196
3.4.1.1 Setting of bias ............................................................................................................................. 196
3.4.1.2 Modification of bias value ......................................................................................................... 197
3.4.2 Workpiece coordinate setting page ................................................................................197
3.4.2.1 Direct input (number) ................................................................................................................. 198
3.4.2.2 Two methods for coordinate input .......................................................................................... 198
3.4.2.3 Modification of workpiece coordinate system ...................................................................... 199
3.4.2.4 Clearing of workpiece coordinate system ............................................................................. 199
3.4.3 Display, modification, and setting of macro-variables ...................................................200
3.4.3.1 Display of macro-variables ....................................................................................................... 200
3.4.3.2 Modification and setting of macro-variables......................................................................... 200
3.5 Graphic Display.......................................................................................................................................... 201
3.6 Diagnosis Display ...................................................................................................................................... 202
3.6.1 Diagnosis data display .....................................................................................................203
3.6.1.1 Display of signal parameters ................................................................................................... 203
3.6.1.2 Display of system parameters ................................................................................................. 205
3.6.1.3 Display of bus parameters ....................................................................................................... 205
3.6.1.4 Display of DSP parameters ...................................................................................................... 206
3.6.1.5 Display of waveform parameters ............................................................................................ 206
3.6.2 Viewing of signal state .....................................................................................................207
3.7 Alarm Display.............................................................................................................................................. 207
3.8 Ladder Graph Display............................................................................................................................... 209
3.9 Help Display................................................................................................................................................ 211
Chapter 4 Manual Operation ................................................................................................... 218
4.1 Motion of Coordinate Axis........................................................................................................................ 218
4.1.1 Manual feed ......................................................................................................................218
4.1.2 Manual fast motion ...........................................................................................................218
4.1.3 Speed selection for manual feed and manual fast motion ............................................218
4.1.4 Manual intervention ..........................................................................................................218
4.2 Spindle Control ........................................................................................................................................... 220
4.2.1 Counter-clockwise rotation of spindle .............................................................................220
4.2.2 Clockwise rotation of spindle ...........................................................................................220
4.2.3 Spindle stop ......................................................................................................................220
4.2.4 Automatic gear shifting of spindle ...................................................................................220
4.3 Other Manual Operations ........................................................................................................................ 221
4.3.1 Coolant control .................................................................................................................221
4.3.2 Lubrication control ............................................................................................................221
4.3.3 Chuck control ....................................................................................................................221
X
Contents
4.3.4 Tailstock control ................................................................................................................221

4.3.5 Manual tool changing control ..........................................................................................221
4.4 Tool Setting Operation .............................................................................................................................. 221
4.4.1 Fixed-point tool setting .....................................................................................................222
4.4.2 Tool setting through trial cutting ......................................................................................222
4.4.3 Tool setting of machine zero return.................................................................................224
4.5 Adjustment of Compensation Values ....................................................................................................226
Chapter 5 Single-Step Operations......................................................................................... 227
5.1 Single-Step Feed .......................................................................................................................................227
5.1.1 Amounts of movement selection .....................................................................................227
5.1.2 Selection of shifting axis and movement direction ........................................................227
5.1.3 Specification for single-step feed ....................................................................................227
5.2 Auxiliary Control during Single-Step Operations ................................................................................227
Chapter 6 Manual Pulse Operations ..................................................................................... 229
6.1 Manual Pulse Feed ...................................................................................................................................229
6.1.1 Selection of shifting axis and movement direction ........................................................229
6.1.2 Specification for manual pulse feed ................................................................................230
6.2 Control during Manual Pulse Interruption............................................................................................. 230
6.2.1 Manual pulse interruption ................................................................................................230
6.2.2 Relationship of manual pulse interruption with other functions ....................................231
6.2.3 Cancellation of manual pulse interruption ......................................................................232
6.3 Auxiliary Control during Manual Pulse Operations ...........................................................232
6.4 Manual Pulse Trial Cutting..................................................................................................232
Chapter 7 Automatic Operations ........................................................................................... 234
7.1 Selection of Automatic Running Program..........................................................................234
7.2 Initiation of Automatic Running...........................................................................................234
7.3 Stop of Automatic Running .................................................................................................234
7.4 Automatic Running from Any Block ....................................................................................235
7.5 Dry Running ................................................................................................................................................236
7.6 Single-Block Running................................................................................................................................ 236
7.7 Locked Running of Machine ....................................................................................................................238
7.8 Locked Running of Miscellaneous Functions ......................................................................................238
7.9 Adjustment of Feed and Fast Motion Speeds in Automatic Running .............................................238
7.10 Adjustment of Spindle Speed in Automatic Running .......................................................................239
7.11 Back-End Editing in Automatic Running ............................................................................................. 239
Chapter 8 MDI Operations ........................................................................................................ 240
8.1 Input of Code Segment in MDI ...............................................................................................................240
8.2 Running and Stop of Code Segment in MDI .......................................................................................240
8.3 Modification and Clearing of Code Segment Field Value in MDI ....................................................240
8.4 Switching of Running Modes...................................................................................................................241
Chapter 9 Zero Return ............................................................................................................... 242
9.1 Machine Zero (Mechanical Zero) ...........................................................................................................242
9.2 Zero Return of Program ...........................................................................................................................242
9.2.1 Procedure for program zero return .................................................................................242
9.3 Zero Return Setting of Bus Servo ..........................................................................................................242
9.3.1 Common zero return ........................................................................................................242
9.3.2 Absolute zero setting and zero return .............................................................................243
Chapter 10 Editing Operations ............................................................................................... 244
10.1 Program Editing .......................................................................................................................................244
10.1.1 Program establishing .....................................................................................................244
10.1.1.1 Automatic generation of sequence number........................................................................244
10.1.1.2 Program content input .............................................................................................................245
10.1.1.3 Retrieving of sequence number, word, and line number.................................................246
XI
10.1.1.4 Cursor positioning method ..................................................................................................... 247

10.1.1.5 Insertion, deletion, and modification of words ................................................................... 248
10.1.1.6 Deletion of one block............................................................................................................... 248
10.1.1.7 Modification of blocks .............................................................................................................. 248
10.1.1.8 Deletion of code words ........................................................................................................... 249
10.1.2 Deletion of one program ................................................................................................249
10.1.3 Deletion of all programs .................................................................................................250
10.1.4 Copying of program .......................................................................................................250
10.1.5 Copying and pasting of blocks ......................................................................................250
10.1.6 Cutting and pasting of blocks ........................................................................................251
10.1.7 Replacement of blocks ..................................................................................................251
10.1.8 Renaming of program ....................................................................................................251
10.2 Program Management ........................................................................................................................... 251
10.2.1 Retrieval of program target ............................................................................................251
10.2.2 Number of programs stored ..........................................................................................252
10.2.3 storage capacity .............................................................................................................252
10.2.4 Viewing the program list ................................................................................................252
10.2.5 Program locking .............................................................................................................252
Chapter 11 System Communication ..................................................................................... 253
11.1 GSKComm Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 253
11.1.1 Function Introduction ......................................................................................................253
11.1.2 Editing operation .............................................................................................................254
11.1.3 File sending (PC—CNC)................................................................................................254
11.1.4 File receiving (CNC—PC) ..............................................................................................256
11.1.5 Software and serial port settings ...................................................................................256
11.2 Serial Communication ............................................................................................................................ 257
11.2.1 Preparation for serial communication ...........................................................................257
11.2.2 Serial data transmission.................................................................................................257
11.3 USB Communication .............................................................................................................................. 260
11.3.1 Overview and attentions ................................................................................................260
11.3.2 Operation procedures of USB Part Program ...............................................................260
11.3.3 Exiting from U disk operation interface .........................................................................262
APPENDIXES ....................................................................................... 263
Appendix I List of GSK980TDHi Series Parameters........................................................ 264
Parameter description ...............................................................................................................264
1. Position Parameters ..............................................................................................................265
2. Data Parameters ....................................................................................................................285
Appendix II Alarm Table ............................................................................................................ 317
XII
Part I Programming Introduction
Part One Programming
1
2
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Product Introduction
GSK980TDHi series bus-based machine tool CNC system (hereinafter referred to as

―the product‖), as the system product newly developed and manufactured, is designed
with GSK-Link industrial Ethernet bus, manual pulse trial cutting, CS axis control and
other functions and has processing speed, accuracy and surface roughness improved
dramatically. The brand-new human-computer interface is attractive, friendly and easy to
use. With more convenient connection and more concise programming, the product can

meet application requirement of universal CNC machine tool.
 Standard configured with GE series bus-based servo unit, it supports bus I/O.
 It is designed with 8.4’’ TrueColor LCD and supports both Chinese and English.
 The maximum control accuracy is 0.1um and the highest movement speed is 60m/min.
 Adapted with servo main axis, it has main axis orientation, CS axis control and other
functions.
 Functions for single/multi metric/inch, taper and end face threads
 Manual pulse trial cutting and manual pulse interruption functions
 Support RS232 communication
 Provide time limit shutdown setting (12 issues)
 Support servo turret, four-work location electric tool carrier and hydraulic tool carrier.
3
1.2 Technical Specifications
Control axis: X-axis, Z-axis, Y-axis and C-axis; C-axis can serve as Cs axis.
Interpolation mode: Positioning (G00), linear (G01) and arc (G02 and G03)
Position instruction scope: Metric system: -999,999.99 mm-999,999.99mm; min. instruction
unit: 0.0001 mm
Inch system: -9,999.9999 inch-9,999.9999 inch; min. instruction unit: 0.00001 inch
Mov Note: X-axis should be shrunk by a half upon diameter programming.
eme
Highest feed speed: 15,000 mm/min, straight line
nt
Feed magnification: 0-200%, 21-level real-time regulation
Cont
rol Highest rapid traverse: 60,000 mm/min
Fun Rapid traverse magnification: F0, 25%, 50% and 100%, four-level regulation
ctio Feed per revolution: 0.01 mm/r-500 mm/r (required to install 1024P/r or 1,200P/r main axis
n encoder)
Acceleration/deceleration mode: Front acceleration/deceleration (linear and S types); rear

acceleration/deceleration (linear and index type)
Electronic gear proportion: Frequency doubling: 1-65,535; frequency division: 1-65,535
Manual pulse feed: 0.001, 0.01 and 0.1 mm (three types); single-step feed: 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
and 1 mm (four types)
Inter
face The system is designed with color 8.4‘‘ LCD display with resolution for 800×600.
Disp * Processing path display
lay
G *The system is designed with systematical A instruction format; there are 39 kinds of G codes
Fun totally, including fixed circulation code and compound circulation code.
ctio *Support statement-type macro program (macro B)
n *Support five-level subprogram invocation and user macro program invocation
* Ordinary thread (along with main axis)
Thre * Single/multi metric/inch straight thread, taper and end face threads; equal pitch thread and
ad variable pitch threads
Fun * Length, angle and speed characteristics for thread vanishing can be set by program and
ctio parameter.
n * Thread pitch: 0.001 mm~500 mm (metric system) 0.06- thread/inch-25,400 threads/inch
(inch system)
Com
* Pitch error compensation: Compensation interval and origin point can be set; there is
pens
single-direction or bidirectional thread compensation for choice.
atio
* Reverse clearance compensation: Fixed frequency or acceleration/deceleration
n
compensation can be set; support G0 and G1 are designed with different reverse clearance
Fun
compensations.
ctio
* Tool compensation: 99 groups of tool length compensations and tool tip radius compensation
n
* Adaptive tool carrier: Max. setting tool carrier is 16-work station tool carrier; Liuxin tool carrier
T (12 work stations) and Damon tool carrier (encoding or counting type)
Tool * Tool change mode: MDI/automatic absolute tool change or manual relative tool change; tool
Fun selection for positive rotation and locking for reverse rotation and mechanical zero point
ctio * Tool setting mode: Fixed-point tool setting, trial cutting tool setting and mechanical zero point
n return tool setting
* Tool position signal input mode: Direct input
S
* S2 bits (I/O gear position control)/ S5 bits (analog output)
Main
* Main axis encoder: Line number of encoder can be set (100-5,000 p/r)
Axis
* Transmission ratio of encoder and main axis: (1-255): (1-255)
Fun
* Main axis magnification: 50%~120% eight-level real-time regulation
ctio
* Two-way 0V~10V analog voltage output; support dual- main axis control
n
4
Chapter 1 Overview
M
* Designated with the address M and two-digit number; M function can be customized
Auxi
* M instruction in system (redefinition is not allowed): Program end: M02 and M30; program
liary
stop: M00; option stop: M01; subprogram invocation: M98; subprogram end: M99
Fun
* Cooling liquid start/stop * lubrication start/stop * MDI/automatic control chuck
ctio
clamping/loosening; control tailstock entrance/exit
n
Prog * Program capacity: 57MB, 400 programs
ram * Format: Relative/absolute hybrid programming
min * Subprogram: Editable; support five subprograms nesting
g * Program review * background editing
Oper
atin * Mode selection: Edit, automatic, MDI, back to zero, manual, single step, manual pulse
g * Operation control: Single block, skip, dry run, auxiliary lock, program restart, manual pulse
Fun interruption, single step interruption, manual intervention, machine tool lock, interlock, feed
ctio hold, circulation startup, emergency stop, external reset signal, external power ON/OFF

n
PLC *PLC processing speed: 1us/step; 8,000 steps at most; 10 basic instructions; 35 functional
Fun instructions;
ctio * I/O unit input/output: 32/32, scalable
n * 1~4 PMC-axis (axes) can be selected
Safe
ty  Emergency stop
Fun  Hardware stroke limit
ctio  Data backup and recovery
n
Com  RS232: Bidirectional transmission for component program, parameter and other files;
mun support PLC program.
icati  USB: U disc file operating and U disc file direct processing; support PLC program and
on system software U disc upgrading
* Switch power supply: RS-PB2 (supporting; having been installed and connected)
Ada
* Drive unit: GSK GE series (including increment type and absolute type)
pter
* Tool carrier controller: GSK TB tool carrier controller
5
1.3 Model Definition
S/N Code Description
① Main attribute part of product model:GSK980TDHi series
Functional (processing object) configuration: Signify with capital English letters

②
T-machine tool
③ Series continuation: Signify with capital letters. ―None‖ means it is initial version.
Subseries continuation (or improvement No.): Signify with small English letters a, b, c …… or
④
signified with number. ―None‖ means it is initial version.
Structural type Structural type: Respectively signified with capital letters U, H, V and B.
or U-United, H- horizontal, V-vertical and B-box type.
⑤
special machine Special machine type: Signified with capital letter P.
type
LCD size LCD size: Signified with one-digit Arabic Numbers 1-9.
(structure) or 1 means 8.4‘‘, 2 means 10.4‘‘, 3-6 means…
⑥
special machine
code LCD Special machine code: Signified with two-digit Arabic Numbers 01~99.
For example,
◆ GSK980TDHi-U1 means 980TDHi series, united structure, 8.4‘‘ LCD.

GSK980TDHi-P01: means 980TDHi series, No. 01 special machine.
6
Chapter 4 Code G of Preparation Function
Chapter 2 Basic Knowledge of Programming
2.1 Control Axis
Item GSK980TDHi
Number of Basic Control Axes 3 axis (X, Z and C), three axes at
most (including Cs-axis)
2.2 Axis Name

Default names for three basic axes are X, Z and C.
Set number of control axes with the data parameter P005; set name of each additional axis with
P175-P179, e.g. axis names A, B and C.
Fig. 2-2-1 Axis Diagram of Machine tool
When the system is relied on rectangular coordinate system composed of X-axis and Z-axis for
positioning and interpolation movement, X-axis is front-rear direction of horizontal plane and Z-axis is
left-right direction of horizontal plane. Direction approaching workpiece is negative direction and
direction going away from workpiece is positive direction, as shown in Fig. 2-2-1.
The system supports front/rear tool carrier function and there is the provision: From the view of front
face of machine tool, tool carrier will be called as front tool carrier if in the front of workpiece and it will
be called as rear tool carrier if behind workpiece. Fig. 2-2-2 is coordinate system of front tool carrier
and Fig. 2-2-3 is coordinate system of rear tool carrier. It thus can be seen from Fig. 2-2-2 and Fig.
2-2-3 that X-axis directions in coordinate systems if front and rear tool carriers are adverse, but Z-axis
directions are the same. The following diagrams and examples in this Manual are about rear tool
carrier; as for coordinate system of front tool carrier, you can get by analogy.
7
Fig. 2-2-2 Coordinate System of Front Tool Carrier Fig. 2-2-3 Coordinate System of Rear Tool Carrier
2.3 Axis Display

For GSK980TDHi, user can set axes as linear or rotary axis through position parameter
No.8#0~No.8#4; set display or hide of axes through position parameter No.58#0-No.58#4.
After setting additional axis as rotary axis, unit of rotary axis will be displayed into deg. If additional
axis is set as linear axis, the display will be the same with those of the basic three axes (X, Z and Y),
with unit for mm. The following is axis display when X-axis and Z-axis are linear axes and C-axis is
rotary axis.
Fig. 2-3-1
2.4 Machine zero and Coordinate System

The specific point on machine tool used as processing datum is called as machine zero. Machine tool
manufacturer has zero point setting for every machine tool; the zero point is usually at the part of the
maximum stroke in X-axis and Z-axis directions and will not be transferred or changed after setting.
Coordinate system for machine zero serving as origin point is called as machine tool coordinate
system.
Since position of machine zero cannot be determined upon CNC power-on, it is generally required to
return to machine zero automatically or manually, so as to establish machine tool coordinate system.
CNC will be able to establish machine tool coordinate system after machine tool returns to machine
zero.
8
Note: Do not use relevant functions of machine zero provided by the system if there is no zero return stopper on
machine tool (e.g. G28).
2.5 Workpiece Coordinate System

Coordinate system used during workpiece processing is called as workpiece coordinate system, also
known as component coordinate system. Workpiece coordinate system will be preset by operator
according to installation position of workpiece (workpiece coordinate system setting).
In generally, all processing procedures of one competent share a workpiece coordinate system
(workpiece coordinate system selection).
Workpiece coordinate system can be changed by moving its origin point (change of workpiece
coordinate system position)
Reference position point of workpiece coordinate system should meet conditions for simple
programming, few size conversions and low risk for processing error. Generally, reference point is on

benchmark or positioning benchmark with size mark. In terms of machine tool programming,
reference point is usually at intersection of workpiece axis and chuck end face (Fig. 2-5-1) or
workpiece end face (Fig. 2-5-2).
Fig. 2-5-1 Reference Point on Chuck End Face
Fig. 2-5-2 Reference Point on Workpiece End Face

Workpiece coordinate system can be set with three methods below:
1. Set with G50; for details, please see 4.2.8.
2. Set with G54- G59; for details, please see II 3.4.2.1.
2.6 Absolute Value Programming and Increment Value Programming

Amount of movement for code axis can be signified with two methods: Absolute value code and
relative value code. Absolute value code is programmed through coordinate value of end point
position for axis movement, which is called as absolute coordinate programming. Increment value is
9
directly programmed through axis amount of movement, which is called as increment value
programming. In the system, absolute coordinate programming is implement thorough directives X
and Z and increment programming is implemented through directives U and W.
Table 2-6-1
Cod of Absolute Code of Relative

Remarks
Value Value
X U X-axis movement code
Z W Z-axis movement code
For example, A→B program in Fig 2-6-1 is programmed respectively through absolute value,
increment value and absolute value and increment value-mixed programming modes.
Fig. 2-6-1 Programming Method

Table 2-6-2
Absolute
Relative
Programming Coordinate Mixed Coordinate
Coordinate
Mode Programmi Programming
Programming
ng
Program G1 X200 Z-50 G1 U100 W-50 G1 X200 W-50
Suppose tool is at A point in current workpiece coordinate
Remakes
system, linear interpolation should be adopted for movement.
Note: There will be alarm in case of X/Z and U/W shared segment execution in a program segment.
e.g. G50 X10 Z20；
G1 X20 W30 U20 Z30；
2. 7 Diameter and Radius Type Programming

Workpiece that CNC machine tool processes is usually rotating body; of which, X-axis size can be
10
specified with two types: diameter and radius types, and be set through position parameter NO: 39#2.
It is diameter specifying programming when position parameter NO:39#2 is 0.
It is radius specifying programming when position parameter NO:39#2 is 1.
Table 2-7-1 Diameter and Radius Specifying Introductions
Item Specified by Diameter Specified by Radius
Z-axis Code Irrelevant to diameter and radius specifying
Specified by diameter
X-axis Code Specified by radius value
value
Specified by diameter
Increment Code of Address U Specified by radius value
value
Coordinate System Setting
Set by diameter value Specified by radius value
(G50)
Consistent with X-axis size; set through position

X-axis Value for Tool Offset
parameter NO:39#2
Radius Directive for Arc
Specified by radius value Specified by radius value
Interpolation (R, I and K)
Feed Speed in X-axis Direction Radius variation (mm/min/mm/r)
Position Display of X-axis Diameter value display Radius value display
Note: 1. The following description in this Manual is based on diameter programming, unless
otherwise stated.
2. Diameter/radius application significance for tool offset refers to diameter/radius value
change for workpiece outer diameter. To be specific, upon diameter specifying, diameter value for outer
diameter of cutting workpiece is changed by 10 mm if compensation amo unt is changed by 10mm; upon
radius specifying, diameter value for outer diameter of cutting workpiece is changed by 20 mm if
compensation amount is changed by 10mm.
2. 8 Modal, Amodal and Initial State

Modal means that the function and state of the corresponding field, once executed, remains enabled,
till the execution of its function and state is resumed. That is to say, if the same function and state are
applied in subsequent program segments, it is not required to input this field.
For example,
G0 X100 Z100; (rapid positioning to X100 Z100 part)

X120 Z30; (rapid positioning to X120 Z30 part; G0, which is modal code, can be omitted and
is not required to be input)
G1 X50 Z50 F300; (Linear interpolation to X120 Z30 part; feed speed: 300mm/min G0→G1)
X100; (Linear interpolation to X100 Z50 part, with feed speed for 300 mm/min; G1, Z50 and
F300, which are modal codes, can be omitted and are not required to be input)
G0 X0 Z0; (rapid positioning to X0 Z0 G1→G0)
Amodal means that the function and state of the corresponding field, once executed, is enabled only
once; once henceforth it is required to apply the same function and state, its execution must be
resumed. That is to say, if the same function and state are applied in subsequent program segments,
it is required to input this field.
Initial state means the default function and state once the system is energized. That is to say, once
energized, the system executes according to the function and state in the case of initial state,
provided that the corresponding function and state are not designated. The initial state of this system
11
is G00, G18, G21, G40, G54, G97 and G98.
For example,
O0001;
G0 X100 Z100; (rapid positioning to X100 Z100 part; G0 is initial state, and the system will
moves in the form of the initial state G00 in case of having no
directive for other modals)
G1 X0 Z0 F100; (linear interpolation to X0 Z0 part, with system feed speed for 100 mm/min. Since
G98 is minute feed mode, it is power-on initial state of the system)
12
Chapter 3 Part Program Composition
3.1 Program Composition

Program is composed of multiple program segments and program segment consists of characters.
Various program segments are separated by program segment end code (LF for ISO and CR for EIA).
In this Manual, program segment end code is signified by the character ―;‖.

Fig. 3-1-1 Program Structure
The set of code series for CNC machine tool‘s part processing is called as program. After the
completed program is input into CNC system, the system will control tool in moving along line or arc
or make main axis rotate or stop according to codes. In program, these codes should be edited in
accordance with actual movement sequence of machine tool. Program structure is shown in Fig.
3-1-1.
3.1.1 Program name
Memorizer of the system can store multiple programs. In order to distinguish these programs,
program name composed of the address O and subsequent five-digit number is placed in the front of
program, as show in Fig. 3-1-1-1.
Fig. 3-1-1-1 Program Name Composition
13
3.1.2 Sequence number and program segment
Program is composed of multiple codes and a code unit is called as program segment, as shown in
Fig. 3-1-1). Program segments are separated by program end code, as shown in Fig. 3-1-1; in this
Manual, program end code is signified with the symbol ―;‖.
There is sequence number composed of the address N and sequent four-digit number at the
beginning of program segment, as shown in Fig. 3-1-1; front leading character ―0‖ can be omitted.
Sequence number can be in random order (position parameter NO: 0 # 5 decides whether to insert
sequence number automatically; for details, please see 3.3.1 in operating part); the interval can be
unequal and the interval size will be set through the parameter P210. Sequence number can be
arranged in all program segments or in those principal program segments; but general processing
sequence should be followed and sequence number should be from the small to the big.
Note: The code N will not be treated as row number when in the same segment with G10.
3.1.3 Code word
As shown in Fig. 3-1-3-1, code word is the element for constituting program segment and composed
of address and subsequent number; sometimes, there will be symbols ―+‖ and ―-‖ before the number.
Fig. 3-1-3-1 Code Word Composition

Address is one of English letters (A-Z) and specifies meaning of the subsequent number. Address
which can be used in the system and its meaning and value scale are shown in Table 3-1-3-1:
Sometimes, one address has different meanings according to different preparation functions.
Alarm decision will be set by the parameter N0：32#6 if there are more than two identical addresses in
the same code.
Table 3-1-3-1
Address Value Scale Functional Meaning
Set by data parameters P175-179 Address in axis name
A、B、C
-999,999.99-999,999.99 (mm) A, B and C direction coordinate address
0.001-99,999.999 (mm/min) Feed speed per minute
F
0.001-500 (mm/r) Feed speed per revolution
G 00-99 Preparation function
H 01-99 Operational symbol in G65
Vector of relative starting point of arc center in
-99,999.999-99,999.999 (mm)
I X-axis
0.06-25400 (teeth/inch) Number of inch threads
Vector of relative starting point of arc center in
K -99,999.999-99,999.999 (mm)
Z-axis
L 1-9999 Times of repeated invocation for subprogram
14

,L -999,999.99-999,999.99 (mm) Chamfer
Auxiliary function output, program execution flow
M Set by data parameter P204
and subprogram invocation
N 0-999999 Sequence number
O 0-99999 Program name
0-99,999.999(ms) Pause time
1-99,999 Subprogram invocation number
X-axis circulation movement amount in G74 and
P 0-999,999.99(mm)
G75
Sequence number of starting program segment
0-99,999,999
for compound circulation code fine processing
Sequence number of end program segment for
0-99,999,999

compound circulation code fine processing
Q
Z direction circulation movement amount in G74
0-999,999.99(mm)
and G75
-999,999.999-999,999.999(mm) Corner value
-999,999.999-999,999.999(mm) Arc radius/angle displacement amount
0-99,999.9999(mm) Circulation retract amount of G71 and G72
1-9,999 time (s) Rough turning times in G73
R -9,999.9999-9,999.9999(mm) Cutting-post retract amount in G74 and G75
Retract amount upon cutting to end point in G74
-9,999.9999-9,999.9999(mm)
and G75
0-99,999.999(mm) Fine processing allowance in G76
-999,999.999-999,999.999(mm) Taper in G90, G92 and G94
Set by data parameter P205 Main axis speed designation
S
00-04 Multi-grade main axis output
T Set by data parameter P206 Tool function
-999,999.99-999,999.99(mm) X-axis increment
X-axis fine processing allowance in codes G71,
U -999,999.99-999,999.99(mm)
G72 and G73
0.0001-99,999.999 (mm) Depth of cut in G71
-9,999-9,999.9999(mm) X-axis retract distance in G73
V
-999,999.99-999,999.99(mm) Y-axis increment
-999,999.99-999,999.99(mm) Z direction relative coordinate address
0.0001-99,999.999(mm) Depth of cut in G72
W
Z-axis fine processing allowance in G71, G72
-999,999.99-999,999.99(mm)
and G73
-9,999-9,999.9999(mm) Z-axis retract distance in G73
X -999,999.99-999,999.99(mm) X direction coordinate address
0-9,999.999(S) Pause time designation
15

Y
-999,999.99-999,999.99(mm) Y direction coordinate address
Z
-999,999.99-999,999.99(mm) Z direction coordinate address
Table 3-1-3-1 is only for limit values for CNC device and limitation for machine tool is excluded.
Please pay particular attention to it. Therefore, upon programming, it is required to consult operation
instruction of tool machine manufacturer, besides referring to this Manual, and program based on
understanding on program limits.
Note: 1. Length of each code does not exceed 79 characters.
2. Set Unit: Where ISC=0, the maximum and minimum are +999,999.99 mm upon manual data input;
where ISC=1, the maximum and minimum values are +99,999.999 mm.
Set unit (metric): +999999.99mm +99999.999mm
Set unit (inch): +99999.999inch +9999.9999inch
Note: X-axis should be shrunk by a half upon diameter programming.
3.2 Program Structure

Program is divided into main program and subprogram. In general, CNC operates as per instructions
of main program. Where there is code for subprogram invocation in main program, CNC will operate
as per subprogram; when it comes to code for returning to main program in subprogram, CNC will
return to the next program of the main program invoking subprogram for continuing execution.
Program operation sequence is shown as Fig. 3-2-1.
Fig. 3-2-1
Main program and subprogram are consistent in composition.

The program which has a certain fixed sequence and occurs repeatedly can be regarded as
subprogram and stored in memorizer in advance, so as to avoid repeated edition and simplify
program. Subprogram can be invoked under automatic mode; generally, it is invoked from main
program through M98 and subprogram invoked can invoke other subprograms. Subprogram invoked
from main program is called as primary subprogram; four levels of subprograms can be invoked
totally, as shown in Fig. 3-2-2. The last segment of subprogram can return to main program through
the code M99 to continue to invoke next segment of the program segment. Where the last segment
16
ends with the code M02 or M30 in subprogram, the function will return to main program, just as M99,
to continue to invoke next segment of subprogram.
When main program ends with M99, the program will be repeatedly executed.

Fig. 3-2-2 Four Levels of Subprogram Nesting
One subprogram invocation code can be used to invoke the identical subprogram on a continuous
and repeated basis; repeated invocation times are 9,999 at most.
3.2.1 Subprogram Writing
Subprogram writing format
Fig. 3-2-1-1
At the beginning of subprogram, the address O is followed by subprogram number; subprogram ends
with the code M99.
3.2.2 Subprogram invocation
Subprogram is invoked through main program or subprogram invocation code. Format for invoking
subprogram is as follows:
M98 P L
Repeated invocation times
重复调用次数
被调用的子程序号
Invocated subprogram number
17
Fig. 3-2-2-1
●Repeated times should be regarded as 1 if omitted.

For example, M98 P1002L5 means subprogram with number for 1002 is invoked for 5 times in
a row)
●Sequence for invoking subprogram from main program
Fig. 3-2-2-2
Invoking subprogram in subprogram is the same with invoking subprogram in main program.
Note: 1. There will be alarm in case of failure in retrieving subprogram number specified by the address P.
2. Subprogram with number for 90000-99999 is reserved program of the system; when user invokes this
king of subprogram, the system can execute subprogram content but cannot display the content.
3. For subprogram invocation, there are four levels of nesting at most.
3.2.3 Program End
Program starts with program name and ends with M02, M30 or M99, as shown in Fig. 3-2-2-2.
During program execution, the program under execution will end if having end code for M02 or M30,
and the system will be in reset state (for M30, the position parameter N0：33#4 can decide whether to
return to program heading; for M02, the position parameter N0：33#2 can decide whether to return to
program heading). Where end code is M99, program heading will be returned to and the program will
be executed on a circulatory basis. Where M99, M02 or M30 is at the end of subprogram, it is
required to return to the program invoking subprogram and continue executing the subsequent
program segments
18
Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code
4.1 Types of Preparation Function G code

Preparation function, which is signified with G code and subsequent number, specifies meaning of
program segment which it is in. G code is divided into two types below:
Table 4-1-1
Type Meaning
Amodal G code Only valid for program segment instructed

Always valid before other G codes in the same
Modal G code
group instructed
For example, G01 and G00 are modal G codes in the same group.
G01 X ＿
Z ＿＿＿; G01 valid
X ＿＿＿; G01 valid
G00 Z＿＿; G00 valid
19
Table 4-1-2 Table for G code and Functions

G code G code
Function
Group (System Group (System Function Description
Description
A) A)
G04 Pause and accurate G96 Constant surface
stop 02 speed control
G28 Returning to G97* Constant line speed
machine zero control cancellation
automatically
G31 Skip function G98* Feed speed per
00 05 minute
G50 Coordinate system G99 Feed speed per
setting revolution
G65 Macro instruction G20 Inch unit selection

amodal invocation 06
G70 Fine processing G21* Metric unit selection
circulation
G71 Axialrough rough G40* Tool tip radius
turning circulation 07 compensation
cancellation
G72 Radial rough turning G41 Tool tip radius left
circulation compensation
G73 Closed ring cutting G42 Tool tip diameter
circulation compensation
G74 Axial grooving G54* Workpiece Coordinate
circulation System 1
G75 Radial grooving G55 Workpiece Coordinate
circulation 14 System 2
G76 Multi-thread cutting G56 Workpiece Coordinate
circulation System 3
G00* Rapid positioning G57 Workpiece Coordinate
System 4
G01 Linear interpolation G58 Workpiece Coordinate
System 5
01 G02 Clockwise arc G59 Workpiece Coordinate
interpolation System 6
G03 Anticlockwise arc G17 XY plane selection
interpolation 16
G32 Uniform pitch thread G18* ZX plane selection
cutting
G34 Variable pitch thread G19 YZ plane selection
cutting
G90 Axial cutting
circulation
G92 Thread cutting
circulation
G94 Rapid cutting
circulation
Note: 1. Where modal and amodal codes are in the same segment, amodal code should be preferred;
meanwhile, it is required to change corresponding modals according to other modal codes in the same
segment but not execute them.
2. For G code with ―*‖ mark, the system will be in state of this G code in case of powering on. (Parts of G
codes are decided by the position parameter NO: 31#0~7).
3. G code in Group 00 is amodal code.
20
4. There will be alarm in case of using G code not listed in List of G Codes or instructing G code without
selection function.
5. It is allowed to instruct G codes in different groups in the same program segment; in principle, more than
two codes in the same group cannot be instructed in identical program segment. It is required to be subject
to subsequent G code if there is setting that there will not be alarm in case that codes in the same group
are the identical segment.
6. G codes are respectively signified with their own group numbers according to different types. The
position parameters NO: 35#0~7 and NO: 36#0~7 will be used to set whether to remove G codes in
various groups upon reset or emergency stop.
4.2 Simple G Codes

4.2.1 Rapid positioning G00
Format: G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_

Function: Various axes move to positions designated by X (U) and Z (W) at their own rapid feed
speeds.
X(U): Absolute coordinate value of X direction positioning end point (U means programming
instruction of increment value and is the distance for tool movement);
Z(W): Absolute coordinate value of Z direction end point (W means programming instruction
of increment value and is the distance for tool movement);
The code G00 means tool moves to the position in workpiece coordinate system designated
by absolute code or increment value code at rapid feed speed. It will be set by the position
parameter N0: 12#1, with tool path for any one of two types below, as shown in Fig. 4-2-1-1.
1. Linear interpolation positioning: Tool path is the same with linear interpolation (G01) and tool
is positioned in the shortest time at the speed not more than rapid movement speed of each
axis.
2. Non-linear interpolation positioning: Tool is positioned at the speed of rapid movement speed
of each axis and tool path is not straight line.
Fig. 4-2-1-1
21
Introductions:
1. After executing G00, the system will change modal for current tool movement mode into G00 mode.
It is relied on modifying system position parameter N0: 31#0 to set system default modal upon
powering on as G00 (parameter value is 0) or G01 (parameter is 1).
2. Whether positional parameter tool moves or not will not be specified; the system only change
modal for current tool movement mode into G00.
3. G00 and G0 are equivalent in format.
4. G0 speed of X, Y, Z and C-axes is set by the parameter P88~P92.
Limits:
Repaid movement speed is set by parameter; to specific, speed of the instruction F in G0 code
program is cutting feed speed for subsequent program segment.
For example,
G0 X0 Z10 F800; Feeding rapidly with speed set by system parameter

G1 X20 Z50; Feed speed of F800
Rapid positioning speed is regulated through keys on operating panel F0, 25%, 50% and 100%, as
shown in Fig. 4-2-1-2. Corresponding speed of F0 is set by the parameter P93 and suitable to various
axes.
Fig. 4-2-1-2 Keys of Rapid Feed Magnification

Note: Pay attention to position of workbench and workpiece, for fear of tool collision.
For example, as shown in Fig. 4-2-1- 3, tool is rapidly positioned from A point to B point; relevant
dimensions are shown in the figure.
Fig. 4-2-1-3
Programming is as follows:
G0 X20 Z0; (absolute value programming, diameter programming)
G0 U-22 W-18; (increment value programming, diameter programming)
G0 U-22 Z0; (hybrid programming, diameter programming)
22
4.2.2 Linear interpolation G01
Format: G01 X (U)_ Z(W)_ F_

Function: Tool moves to the designated position along straight line with feed speed (mm/min)
specified by the parameter F.
Introductions: X (U): Absolute coordinate value of X direction interpolation end point (U means
increment value programming instruction and the distance for tool movement);
Z (W): Absolute coordinate value of Z direction interpolation end point (W means
1. X_ Z_ is coordinate value of end point. Since it is related to coordinate system concept,
please see 2.4.
2. Feed speed specified by F is always valid until being specified by the new F value. Feed

speed instructed by the code F is calculated through interpolating along linear path;
where the code F has no instruction in program, feed speed will be determined
according to default F value upon system powering on. For setting, please see the data
parameter P87.
Code path:
Fig. 4-2-2-1
23
For program example, please see Fig. 4-2-2-2.

Fig. 4-2-2-2
Note:
1. All code parameters other than F are positioning parameters. The parameter P96 is used to set upper lim it of
cutting feed speed F. Actual cutting speed will be limited to the upper limit value if exceeding this value, with
unit for mm/min. The parameter P97 is used to set lower limit of cutting feed speed F. Actual cutting speed will
be limited at the lower limit value in case of exceeding this value, with unit for mm/min.
2. Tool will not move when there is no specified positional parameter behind G01, and the system only changes
modal of current tool movement mode into G01. It is relied on modifying system position parameter N0: 31#0
to set system default modal upon powering on as G00 (parameter value is 0) or G01 (parameter is 1).
4.2.3 Arc interpolation G02/G03
Regulations about G02 and G03:
Arc interpolation in plane means finishing arc path moving from starting point to end point along
designated rotation direction and radius (or circle center). Items below are required to be given, as
arc path cannot be determined according to the known starting point and end point:
 Rotation direction of arc (G02 and G03)
 Arc interpolation plane (G17, G18 and G19)
 Circle center coordinate or radius and two code formats from that (circle center
coordinate I, J and K or radius R programming)
Interpolation operation cannot be started until three items above are determined.
Arc interpolation can be implemented with codes below and tool can moves along arc, as shown
24
below‖
G02 R_
G17 X(U)_Y(V)_ F_;
G03 I_J_
Arc on XY plane
G02 R_
G18 X(U)_Z(W)_ F_;
G03 I_K_
Arc on XZ plane
G02 R_
G19 Y(V)_Z(W)_ F_;
G03 J_K_
Arc on YZ plane

Code path
A
r
c
s
t
a Ar
r c
t en
i d
n po
g int
p
o
i
n
t
Fig. 4-2-3-1 G02 Path Fig. 4-2-3-2 G03 Path
25
Table 4-2-3-1
Item Content Specified Instruction Meaning

G17 Specifying arc in XY plane
1 Pane specifying G18 Specifying arc in ZV plane
G19 Specifying arc in YZ plane
G02 Clockwise rotation CW
2 Rotation direction
G03 Anticlockwise rotation CCW
Two among X-axis, Coordinate of end point in
End point of absolute
Y-axis and Z-axis workpiece coordinate system
3 value
Two among U-axis, Movement distance from
V-axis and W-axis starting point to end point
Vector from starting point Two among I-axis, Coordinate of relative starting
4 to circle center J-axis and K-axis point for circle center

Arc radius R Arc radius
5 Feed speed F Cutting speed of arc
Whether it is clockwise or anticlockwise rotation is related to coordinate system of front/rear tool

carrier. In this system, coordinate system of rear tool carrier is adopted and following legends are
programmed according to that. Details from position direction of Z-axis (Y-axis or X-axis) to negative
direction in XY plane (ZX plane or YZ plane) are shown in Fig. 4-2-3-3.
Fig. 4-2-3-3
Plane modal information defaulted upon startup can be specified by setting the position parameter N0:
31#1 and #2.
Arc end point can be specified through the parameter characters X, Y or Z. The corresponding X and
Z instructions are signified with absolute value and corresponding U and W instructions are signified
26
with increment value. Increment value is coordinate for end point being relative to starting point. Arc
center is specified by parameter characters I, J and K and they respectively correspond to X, Y and Z.
I, J and K parameter values are coordinates for circle center corresponding to arc starting point;
simply, it is coordinate of circle center by taking starting point as coordinate origin point temporarily
and is increment value with symbol. For details, please see Fig. 4-2-3-4.
Note: The system can support X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis, but the system default is G18 plane, X-axis and Y-axis
after system powering on. Instruction description is implemented according to mode the system supports
and user is required to operate by combining structure of machine tool.

Fig. 4-2-3-4
Startingaccoridng
I, J and K are attached with symbols point to direction for circle
Starting cenetr corresponding to starting
point
point. Besides I, J and K, arc center is specified by the radius R. The details are as follows:
Center
G02
Center
X_ Z_ R_; Center
G03 X_ Z_ R_;
1. Draw two arcs below: Circle more than 180°and circle less than 180°. For arc more than 180°, the
radius is specified by negative value.
For example, as shown in Fig. 4-2-3-5, when Arc of ① is less than 180°, it will be G02 U60 W20 R50
F300; when arc of ② is more than 180°, it will be G02 U60 W20 R-50 F300.
Fig. 4-2-3-5
2. Arc equal to 180°can be programmed through I, J and K and R.
For example, G0 X0 Z0; G2 X40 I10 F100;
Equal to G0 X0 Z0; G2 X40 R10 F100
or G0 X0 Z0; G2 X40 R-10 F100
Note: For 180°arc, positive/negative value of R has no influence on arc path.
3. Arc equal to 360°can be programmed only through I, J and K.
27
For example, program in Fig. 4-2-3-6 is written through G02 code.
X
3.554
圆心
Circle center
18.929
End point 终点
起点
Starting point
F 45.25
Z
F 63.06
30.0 R 19.26
50.0
Fig. 4-2-3-6
Program (current point of tool is at starting point):

G02 X63.06 Z-20 R19.26 F300;
or G02 U17.81 W-20.0 R19.26 F300;
or G02 X63.06 Z-20 I18.929 K-3.554 F300
or G02 U17.81 W-20.0 I18.929 K-3.554 F300;
Limits:
1. If program specifies addresses I, J, K and R simultaneously, arc specified by the address R
should be preferred and others should be ignored.
2. The system will give alarm if arc radius parameter and parameter from starting point to arc
center.
3. Full circle interpolation should be implemented only by specifying parameters I, J and K from
starting point to arc center; specifying R is unfeasible.
4. Attention should be paid to selection setting for coordinate plane upon arc interpolation.
5. Tool will not move if both X and Z are omitted, namely, positions of starting point and end point
are the same, and R (G02R50) is specified.
4.2.4 Pause (G04)
Format: G04 X(U) _ or P_
Function: G04 executing pause operating means executing next program segment according to
designated time delay. Specified pause per revolution for feed mode G99 per revolution can
be set by the position parameter No.34#0.
Table 4-2-4-1 Instruction Value Scope of Pause Time (X or U Instruction)

Minimum Scope of Unit of Pause Time
Movement Instruction Value
Unit
No.5#1=0 0.001-9,999.999
s or rev
No.5#1=1 0.0001-9,999.999
28
Table 4-2-4-2 Instruction Value Scope of Pause Time (P Instruction)

Minimum Scope of Unit of Pause
Movement Unit Instruction Value Time
No.5#1=0 1-99999.999 0.001s or rev
No.5#1=1 1-99999.999 0.0001s or rev
Instructions:
1. G04 is amodal code and only valid in current row.
2. X (U) value is valid when X (U) and P parameters appear simultaneously.
3. There will be alarm when X (U) and P are negative values.

4. The system will not execute pause operating when both X (U) and P are not specified.
4.2.6 Workpiece coordinate system selection G54-G59
Function: Specifying current workpiece system by specifying G code of workpiece coordinate

system in program and selecting workpiece coordinate system
Format: G54-G59
Instructions:
1. Parameter without code

2. The system can set six workpiece coordinate systems, and any one of these coordinate
systems can be selected through codes G54-G59.
G54 ---------------- Workpiece Coordinate System 1
3. The system will display the workpiece coordinate systems G54-G59, G50 or additional
workpiece coordinate system having been executed upon power failure.
4. When different workpiece coordinate systems are invoked from program segment, instruction
movement axis will be positioned to coordinate point under the new workpiece coordinate
system; where there is no instruction movement axis, coordinate will skip into corresponding
coordinate value under the new workpiece coordinate system and actual machine position will
not be changed.
For example, Corresponding machine tool coordinate for origin point of G54 coordinate system is
(10, 10).
Corresponding machine tool coordinate for origin point of G55 coordinate system is (30, 30) .
Upon executing program in order, absolute coordinate of end point and machine tool coordinate will
be displayed as follows:
29
Table 4-2-6-1
Machine Tool
Program Absolute Coordinate
Coordinate
G0 G54 X50 Z50 50, 50 60, 60
G55 X100 100, 30 130, 60
X120 Z80 120, 80 150, 110
Fig. 4-2-6-1
As shown in Fig. 4-2-6-1, it is required to return to machine zero manually after machine tool startup
and enable machine zero to build machine tool coordinate system, so as to generate machine
reference point and determine workpiece coordinate system. Origin points of six workpiece
coordinate systems can be specified by inputting coordinate offset or setting data parameters
P15-P44 under type-in mode; the six coordinate systems are set by distance from machine zero to
zero points of various coordinate systems.
Fig. 4-2-6-2
30
For example, N10 G55 G00 X100 Z20;

N20 G56 X80.5 Z25.5;
In examples above, position of G55 workpiece coordinate system (X=100, Z=20) will be rapidly
positioned when it is started to execute N10 program segment. Position of G56 workpiece coordinate
system will be rapidly positioned and absolute value will change into coordinate value under G56
workpiece coordinate system (X=80.5, Z=25.5) when it is started to execute N20 program segment.
31
4.2.7 Coordinate setting G50
1) Workpiece coordinate system setting

Format:G50 X(U) _ Z(W) _;
Function: Workpiece coordinate system setting. Two code characters are used to specify
absolute coordinate value of tool tip position on current tool carrier under the new
workpiece coordinate system. The code will not make movable axis move.
Instructions: X: Absolute coordinate value of X-axis for current tool tip point in workpiece
coordinate system;
Z: Absolute coordinate value of Z-axis for current tool tip point in workpiece coordinate
system;
1. Once coordinate system is established, all absolute value code positions in

subsequent codes will signify position of this coordinate system, until the new
coordinate system set by G50 code is used.
2. When parameter is set as diameter, X direction will specify diameter; when
parameter is set as radius programming, X direction will specify radius.
X
Cutting
Point
100
50
（X0 , Z0）
Z
Fig. 4-2-7-1
As shown in Fig. 4-2-7-1, workpiece coordinate system in the figure is established and position of
tool tip in current workpiece coordinate system is determined after executing the code G50 X100
Z100. For specific coordinate setting method, please see 4.1.5 tool setting in operating part.
Note: 1. G50-based coordinate system setting should be completed under the premise that tool offset has been
cancelled. After setting, the absolute coordinate is setting value of G50; tool offset cancellation can be
executed under MDI mode: ―T0100 G00 U0 W0‖, suppose current tool offset state is T0101.
2. Set coordinate system through G50 under tool offset state and absolute coordinate will display
circumstances below:
A. Tool offset has been executed, i.e. there is movement instruction after tool offset; the absolute coordinate after
setting is setting value of G5, as shown in table below:
32
Table 4-2-7-1
Program (Executing
Tool Compensation Display Value of Compensation Value
in the Form of Absolute Coordinate of No. 01 Tool
Coordinate Offset)
G0 X0 Z0 X:0 Z:0 X:-12
T0101 X:12 Z:23 Z:-23
G0 X0 Z0 X: 0 Z:0
G50 X20 Z20 X:20 Z:20
B. Tool offset has not been executed yet, i.e. there is no movement instruction after tool offset, including
tool offset cancellation and setting. After setting, absolute coordinate after setting reflects tool offset value.

The details as shown in table below:
Table 4-2-7-2
Program (Executing
Tool Compensation Display Value of Compensation Value of
in the Form of Absolute Coordinate No. 01 Tool
Coordinate Offset)
G0 X0 Z0 X:0 Z:0 X:-12
T0101 X:12 Z:23 Z:-23
G0 X50 Z50 X:50 Z:50
T0100 X:38 Z:27
G50 X20 Z20 X:8 Z:-3
Table 4-2-7-3
Program (Executing
Tool Compensation Display Value of Compensation Value of
in the Form of Absolute Coordinate No. 01 Tool
Coordinate Offset)
G0 X0 Z0 X:0 Z:0 X:-12
T0101 X:12 Z:23 Z:-23
G50 X20 Z20 X:32 Z:43
2) Horizontal movement of coordinate system

Format: G50 U_ W_;
Function: Horizontally moving tool tip on tool carrier by one distance designated by parameter in original
coordinate system, i.e. corresponding relation for tool tip new coordinate to position in original
coordinate system is: X+U, Z+W.
Instruction: When parameter is set as diameter programming, X direction will specify diameter;
when parameter is set as radius programming, X direction will specify radius.
33
4.2.8 Plane selection G17/G18/G19
Format: G17/G18/G19
Function: Plane selection is required upon arc interpolation, tool radius compensation or drilling and
boring. It can be implemented through G17/G18/G19.
Instructions: Where there is no instruction parameter, system default is G18 plane upon startup.
System default plane after startup can also be determined by setting the position parameters
N0:31#1, #2 and #3.
G17-------------XY plane
G18-------------ZX plane
G19-------------YZ plane
Plane will not change if G17, G18 and G19 are in program segment without instruction.
For example, G18 X_ Z_; ZX plane

Note: Currently, the system only supports fixed circulation under G18 plane. Upon programming, in consideration
of conforming and strictness, it had better specify plane clearly in corresponding program segment,
especially for circumstance where the system is shared by several people, for fear of accident or
abnormality due to programming error.
34
4.2.9 Skip function (G31)
Format: G31 X(U) _ Z(W) _ F_

Function: The code, which is behind the code G31, can instruct linear interpolation, just as G01.
Code execution will be interrupted and the next program will be executed in case of inputting
an external skip signal during execution for this code. It is required to use skip function when
processing end point is not programmed and is specified by signal from machine tool, e.g.
cutting. Skip function is also used in workpiece size measurement.
Instructions:
1. G31 is amodal G code and only valid in specified program segment.
2. During tool radius compensation, alarm will be displayed in case of sending G31 code; it is
required to cancel tool radius compensation before G31 code.
For example,

As shown in Fig. 4-2-9-1, next program segment of G31 is single axis movement instructed by
increment value:
Fig. 4-2-9-1 Next Program Segment Is Single Axis Movement Instructed by Increment Value
As shown in Fig. 4-2-9-2, next program segment of G31 is single axis movement instructed by
absolute value:
35
Fig. 4-2-9-2 Next Program Segment Is Single Axis Movement Instructed by Absolute Value
As shown in Fig. 4-2-9-3, next program segment of G31 is dual-axis movement instructed by absolute
value:
Fig. 4-2-9-3 Next Program Segment Is Dual-axis Movement Instructed by Absolute Value
Note: Setting can be implemented through the position parameter NO: 04#7 (skip signal SKIP, which will serve as
signal input when 0 is 1 and 1 is 0).
4.2.10 Inch/ metric conversion G20/G21
Format: G20: Inch input

G21: Metric input
Function: Inch/metric conversion for program input
Instructions:
Change units of following values after inc/metric conversion:
Feed speed instructed by the code F, position code, workpiece zero offset, tool compensation
value, scale unit of manual pulse generator and movement distance in increment feed.
Sate between G code and power failure is the same upon powering on.
Note: 1. Tool compensation value must be preset according to the minimum input increment
unit when inch system is switched to metric system or metric system is switched to inch
system.
36
2. Reference points for operation of the first G28 code from middle center and manual return
are the same when inch system is switched to metric system or metric system is switched
to inch system.
3. The maximum error will be a half of the minimum order unit and this error will not
accumulate when the minimum input increment unit and minimum order increment unit are
different.
4. Program can be set to input inch/metric system through the position parameter N0:00#2.
5. Program can be set to output inch/metric system through the position parameter N0:00#1.
6. It is necessary to specify G20 or G21 in the independent program segment.
7. When inch input is used, parameters of system axes regarding distance and speed will be
displayed in an inch basis and set by the position parameter NO:41#3.
37
4.2.11 Chamfer /corner arc with any angle
Format: L_: Chamfer

R_: Corner arc transition
Function: When the code above is at the end of linear interpolation (G01) or arc interpolation
(G02 and G03) program segments, chamfer or transition arc should be automatically
added out of corner during processing. Program segment for chamfer or corner arc
transition can be continuously specified.
Instructions:
1. Chamfer refers to distance from virtual inflection point to starting point and end point of
corner behind L; the virtual inflection point refers to the really existing corner point
suppose chamfer is not executed. The details are shown in the figure below:
Fig. 4-2-11-1
2. As shown in figure below, corner arc radius is specified when corner arc transition is
behind R:
Fig. 4-2-11-2
Limitation:
1. Chamfer and corner arcs should be executed only in designated plane; parallel axis is not
available for these functions.
2. There will be alarm if the inserted chamfer or arc transition program segment makes tool
beyond interpolation movement scope.
3. Corner arc transition cannot be specified in thread processing program segment.
38
4. When values for instructing chamfer and corner are negative, the system will select
absolute value of these two values.
4.2.11.1 Drawing dimension direct input function
There are parts of straight lines marked with angle whose endpoints are not accurate in position in
processing drawing. With the drawing dimension direct input function, user can directly use angle and
chamfer values of straight line in processing drawing to program.
Instruction format: Drawing dimension direct input function is only used in linear interpolation (G01)
and can be specified in G17 plane (YX plane), G18 plane (XZ plane) and G19 plane (ZY pane). The
instruction format below is about G18 plane (XZ plane). Format change is as follows in case of using
G17 and G19 planes: G17 plane: ―Z‖→―X‖ and ―X‖→―Y‖; G19 plane :―Z‖→―Y‖ and ―X‖→―Z‖.
39
Precautions:
● Both G00 and G01 instructions can be used in drawing dimension direct input function; but G00 only
has positioning effect in case of using G00 direct drawing dimension input function.
● In Instruction Format 1, angle tolerance for intersection calculation should be ±1°, for fear that
calculated movement distance is too long. (Q value is converted into 0°-360°)
X_ Q_ (there will be alarm if the angle Q is within (0°or 180°) ±1°.
Z_ Q_( there will be alarm if the angle Q is within (0°or 270°) ±1°.
●Upon intersection calculation, there will be alarm if angle difference for the two straight lines is within ±1°.
●It is required to specify coordinate value (absolute instruction) and angle instruction value in movement
program segment behind the program segment only specifying angle instruction.
For example, N1 X_ Q_
N2 Q_
N3 X_ Z_ Q_
(It is necessary to specify absolute instruction value and angle instruction Q of X-axis and Z-axis in N3
program segment; if not, there will be alarm.)
40
●G04 and M, S and T program segments can be inserted in continuous drawing dimension direct input
instruction; but there will be alarm if there are two or more inserting program segments.
●In compound fixed circulation, drawing dimension direct input program can be used in program
segments among sequence numbers specified by P or Q; but program segment specified by Q sequence
number is not allowed to be in the middle of continuous drawing dimension direct input instruction.
4.2.12 Equal pitch thread cutting (G32)
Format: G32 X(U) __Z(W) __ F(I) __ J__K__Q__;
Function: Simultaneous thread cutting of two axes from starting point (position before G32 code
operation) to end point specified by X(U), Z(W) and Y(V); the path is shown in Fig.

4-2-12-1. The code can realize cutting for equal pitch straight, taper and end face threads.
Introductions: X(U): Absolute coordinate value of X direction thread cutting end point (U is
Z(W): Absolute coordinate value of Z direction thread cutting end point (W is increment
value programming instruction and the distance for tool movement);
F: Metric thread pitch, i.e. movement amount for tool corresponding to workpiece each time
main axis rotates once, with value scope for 0.001 mm-500 mm; it is a modal parameter;
I: Threads per inch for inch thread, with value scope for 0.06 thread/inch-25,400 thread/inch;
it is a modal parameter;
J: Movement amount in short axis direction upon thread vanishing (vanishing amount), with
value scope for -99,999,999-99,999,999; x is the minimum input increment, with unit for
mm/inch, designed with positive/negative direction; this value will specify radius if short axis
is X-axis; J value is a modal parameter.
K: Length in long axis direction upon thread vanishing, with value scope for 0-99,999,999; x
is the minimum input increment, with unit for mm/inch, without direction; this value will
specify radius if long axis is X-axis; K value is a modal parameter.
Starting angle refers to offset angle of single-transfer signal of main axis and thread cutting
starting point, with value scope for 0-360°. Q value is an amodal parameter and must be
specified when used; if not, the system will regard starting angle as 0°.
Q using rules:
1. Default value of starting angle is 0°, if Q is not specified.
2. For continuous thread cutting, except for Q in the first segment, Q specified by
subsequent thread cutting segments will be invalid; it will be ignored even though
defined.
3. Unit of Q is 1°. It is required to input Q180 in program if Q has 180° offset with
single-transfer signal of main axis. It can be used in multi-thread cutting. Thread starting
angle should be calculated according to number of threads.
41
Fig. 4-2-12-1
As shown in Fig. 4-2-12-2, the system is designed with long and short axes; calculation
method is as follows:
End point
X 终点
Taper thread
锥螺纹
Z-axis is long axis when LZ≥LX(a≤45°)
LX ≥isLX(a≤45°)时，Z轴为长轴；
X-axis
LZ long axis when LX＞LZ(a＞45°)
LX ＞ LZ(a＞45°)时，X轴为长轴。
Starting point
LZ 起点
Fig. 4-2-12-2
42
Precautions for thread cutting:

1. In thread cutting starting and end parts, in general, there is pitch error due to
acceleration/deceleration. In consideration of that, instructed thread length should be
longer than required value, as shown in Fig. 4-2-12-3.
2. During thread cutting, feed speed magnification is invalid and always 100%.
3. During thread cutting, main axis magnification is invalid, because thread cannot be cut
correctly due to acceleration/deceleration influence once main axis magnification is
changed.
4. The system will display ―feed hold‖ after executing feed hold operating. Thread cutting
will not be stopped until current program segment is executed; where it is continuous
thread processing, movement will not be stopped and program operation will not be
paused until thread cutting program segment is executed.
5. During single-segment operation, movement will be stopped after executing current

program segment; if it is continuous thread processing, movement will be stopped after
executing thread cutting program segment.
6. The current program will also be thread cutting segment if the last program segment is
thread cutting program segment; upon cutting starting, it is not required to test transfer
signal of encoder in the part of main axis.
7. Main axis speed must be constant; thread will have offset to some degree in case that
main axis speed is changed.
8. The system will give alarm when F and I occur in the same program segment
simultaneously.
9. J and K are modal codes. Upon thread cutting, J and K are not allowed to be specified;
they are required to be specified in the last segment of thread code. It is required to
cancel J and K modal in case of executing non-thread cutting code.
10. There will be no vanishing when J or J and K is omitted; there will be vanishing as per
K=J when K is omitted.
11. There will be no vanishing when J=0 or J=0 and K=0.
12. There will be vanishing as per K=J when K=0 or K is omitted.
Example 1: Write program in Fig. 4-2-12-3 with G32 code, with thread pitch for 4mm.
d1
d2
50 Z
70
Fig. 4-2-12-3
43
Program: d1 = 3mm, d2 = 1.5mm, total cutting depth: 1mm (single edge), cutting by two times.
G0 X100 Z50; (rapid positioning)
M03 S200; (start main axis; set speed as 200)
T0101; (invoke thread chaser)
G0 X49 Z3; (rapid positioning; cut by 1mm for the first time)
G32 W-74.5 F4.0;
G00 X55;
W74.5;
X48; (rapid positioning, cut by 1mm for the second time)
G32 W-74.5 F4.0;
G00 X55
W74.5;
G0 X100 Z50 M05;
M30;
Example 2: Write program in Fig. 4-2-12-4 with G32 code; long axis is Z-axis and thread pitch is
3mm.
X
41
d2 当前点
Current
point
d1
50
20
Fig. 4-2-12-4
Program: d1 = 2mm, d2 = 1mm, total cutting depth: 1mm (single edge), cutting by two times.
M03 S200; (starting main axis; setting speed as 200)
T0101; (invoking thread chaser))
G00 X19 Z2; (rapid positioning; cut by 1mm for the first time)
G32 X49 Z-41 F3;
G00 X55;
Z2;
G0 X18; (rapid positioning, cut by 1mm for the second time)
G32 X48 Z-41 F3;
G0 X55;
Z2;
G0 X100 Z50 M05;
M30;
44
4.2.13 Variable pitch thread cutting (G34)
Format: G34 X(U) __Z(W) __ F(I) __J__ K__R___Q__;

Function: Simultaneous thread cutting of two axes from starting point (position before G32 code
operation) to end point specified by X(U), Z(W) and Y(V). The code can realize cutting for
variable pitch straight, taper and end face threads.
Instructions: X(U): Absolute coordinate value of X direction thread cutting end point (U is increment
Z(W): Absolute coordinate value of Z direction thread cutting end point (W is increment
F: Metric thread pitch, i.e. pitch of thread starting point with value scope for 0.001 mm-50m; it is a
modal parameter;
I: Threads per inch for inch thread, i.e. pitch of thread starting point with value scope for
0.06 thread/inch-25,400 thread/inch; it is a modal parameter;

J: Movement amount in short axis direction upon thread vanishing (vanishing amount),
with positive/negative direction; this value will specify radius if short axis is X-axis; J
value is a modal parameter.
K: Length in long axis direction upon thread vanishing, with value scope for
0-99,999,999; x is the minimum input increment, with unit for mm/inch, without direction;
this value will specify radius if long axis is X-axis; K value is a modal parameter.
R: Increment or decrement of threads per revolution on main axis. Value scope of R is
±0.000001mm-±500mm and ±0.000001 inch-±19.685 inch. The system will give alarm
when increment or decrement of R value is beyond allowable value or pitch decreases
to 0 or negative value. Meanwhile, there may be thread inaccuracy resulted from slow
deceleration during thread processing.
Q: Starting angle refers to offset angle of single-transfer signal of main axis and thread
cutting starting point, with value scope for 0-360°. Q value is an amodal parameter and
must be specified when used; if not, the system will regard starting angle as 0°.
Q using rules:
1. Default value of starting angle is 0°, if Q is not specified.
2. For continuous thread cutting, except for Q in the first segment, Q specified by
subsequent thread cutting segments will be invalid; it will be ignored even thought
defined.
3. It is required to input Q180 in program if Q has 180°offset with single-transfer signal of
main axis. It can be used in multi-thread cutting. Thread starting angle should be
calculated according to number of threads.
45
4.2.14 Tapping circulation code (G84 and G88)
980TDHi machine tool system is relied on end face tapping circulation (G84) and side face tapping
circulation to realize tapping function. Tapping is divided into ordinary (flexible) tapping and rigid
tapping. For ordinary (flexile) tapping mode, main axis rotation and tapping axis feed mount are
independently controlled and have synchronization relationship not met well. With respect to rigid
tapping mode, main axis motor has the same control mode with servo motor; main axis revolution has
corresponding relation with feed amount along the direction of main axis direction and main axis
acceleration/deceleration also maintains this relation. Rigid tapping main axis, in which floating clip or
variable screw tap is not required (they are required in ordinary tapping mode), has more rapid and
accurate tapping operating.
In terms of rigid tapping mode, machine tool must enjoy corresponding condition: Using position of
main axis is controlled and used as Cs-axis; if not, the system will not support it.
With respect to ordinary tapping mode, auxiliary function should be used to control startup and
shutdown of main axis: M03 (main axis positive rotation), M04 (main axis reverse rotation) and M05
(main axis stop); CNC tests main axis rotation through main axis encoder and tapping axis follows
rotation of main axis. Ordinary tapping mode will be a relatively economical tapping mode when
machine tool cannot use rigid tapping function.
Function of rigid tapping code: Rigid tapping circulation can be enabled when main axis motor is
controlled and under rigid mode.
Function of ordinary tapping code: During movement, when main axis rotates once, Z-axis will
move by one pitch and be always consistent with screw tap pitch; with one spiral
notch formed in workpiece, one time of cutting is enough to realize thread
processing in inner hole.
46
4.2.14.1 Rigid tapping (M29)
Format:
M29 S****; M29 decides rigid tapping; S** is main axis speed.
G84 X (U)_ C (H)_ Z (W)_ R_ P_ Q_F_ K_ M_; end face tapping circulation
G88 Z (W)_ C (H)_ X (U)_ R_ P_ Q_F_ K_ M_; side face tapping circulation
G80; Fixed circulation cancellation
Instructions:
M29 Sxxxx : Rigid tapping mode; Sxxxx is main axis speed.
X_ C_ or Z_ C_: Hole position data, only valid in designated program segment; hole
position data can also specify effective axis of non-X, Z and C axes.
Z(W)_or X(U)_: Specifying coordinate value of hole bottom with absolute value or
specifying distance form R plane to hole bottom with increment value,
only valid in designated program segment.

R_ : Distance from initial plane to R point; it is the radius value, with direction.
P_ : Pause time at hole bottom, with unit for 1ms.
Q_ : Cutting amount for each time; it is the radius value.
F_ : Cutting feed speed
K_ : Program executing times
M_ : M code for C-axis clamping (if required)
G80 : Fixed circulation cancellation
It is required to cancel fixed circulation before executing M29 instruction; if not, the system will
give alarm.
M29 instruction is M code for rigid tapping and used to specify alarm specified by S or resulted
from axis movement between M29 and G84/G88 program segments. There will be alarm in
case of specifying M29 repeatedly, as M29 is an unrepeatable instruction.
M29 Sxxxx instructs rigid tapping mode. After receiving M29, PLC will make corresponding
switching and main axis will stops rotation. Main axis output in M29 segment is equivalent to S0
output.
Main axis rotation can be firstly specified before G84/G88 instruction; operator should
determine whether main axis rotates positively or reversely according to screw tap used. CNC
will determine M code for reverse rotation of main axis according to rotation direction of main
axis before G84/G88; in G84/G88 ordinary tapping circulation, main axis default, unless
specified, is output main axis positive rotation M03 upon tapping.
Whether tapping feed axis specifies X-axis or Z-axis is relied on G84/G88. Tapping axis
specified by G84 is Z-axis and tapping axis specified by G88 is X-axis. Relevant G signal will
determine which main axis is used (related to PLC program of system operation).
Determine thread pitch through cutting feed speed F (i.e. feed speed of tapping axis) and main axis
speed S.
Under feed per minute mode, cutting feed speed F = thread pitch formula * main axis speed S;
Under feed per revolution mode, cutting feed speed F = thread pitch formula.
Standard rigid tapping circulation (Q value is not specified or Q value is 0) is as follows:
47
Standard Rigid Tapping Cycle
Motion
Example P Pause
Rapid
movement
Z (X) axis
Tool
Feed
Principal
Hole
axis
position
Start point Initial Plane
point
Action1
Action 2 Action 6
Principal Principal axis
axis rotation R pause
R plane
Action 3 Action 5
Imaginary workpiece
Hole bottom
Principal plane
P
axis pause
Hole bottom Principal axis
Action 4 pause contrarotation
Format:
G84 X (U)_ C (H)_ Z (W)_ R_ P_ F_ K_ M_;
G88 Z (W)_ C (H)_ X (U)_ R_ P_ F_ K_ M_;
Code execution process:
1. Tool is rapidly positioned to hole position from starting point, a point determined by hole
position data in initial plane; Reserve rotation
2. Rapid positioning to R point;

3. Main axis starts rotation and tapping axis has cutting feed to hole bottom plane at the speed
designed by F; when tapping axis arrives at hole bottom, main axis will stop rotation;
4. Pause the pause time designated by P;
5. Main axis starts reverse rotation and tapping axis retracts to R point plane at the speed
specified by F;
6. Main axis stops rotation and returns to initial plane rapidly;
7. Standard rigid tapping circulation ends.
Repeat from Step 1 under the premise of instructing K_ repetition times.
Note: 1. R instruction, which is about distance from initial plane to R point, is always radius value and can be
omitted; after omitted, initial plane is should be regarded as R plane.
2. G84/G88 can realize no-load operation; feed speed F is feed speed for system no-load operation.
3. It is required to cancel tool tip radius compensation upon tapping circulation pause; recover tool tip radius
compensation upon fixed circulation cancellation.
4: S value used in rigid tapping will also be eliminated upon fixed circulation cancellation of rigid tapping,
which is the same with the condition where S0 state is specified. That is to say, it is not allowed to used S
specified by rigid tapping in program after cancelling fixed circulation of rigid tapping.
5. It is required to specify S again after cancelling fixed circulation of rigid tapping.
6. In tapping program segment, there will be alarm when R plane is out of initial plane and hole bottom
plane.
7. Tapping cutting deceleration will stop upon system reset, emergency stop or drive alarm. In this process,
main axis has the definite course for stopping rotation but Z-axis has stopped feed, so workpiece and
screw tap may have scrap risk. Therefore, during processing, do not interrupt G84/G88 compulsorily as
much as possible.
8. In case of single-pass operation or feed execution and operating maintaining, the system will display
―pause‖ and tapping circulation will not stop until it returns to starting point after finishing tapping.
9. Upon tapping cutting, movement speed of tapping axis will be decided by main axis speed and thread
pitch; it is not related to cutting feed speed magnification.
48
Example 1: Rigid tapping of Main Axis 1 is used in center hole end face.
For example,
Thread M10×2 in the figure

G98; Feed per minute mode
G0 X0 Z10; Position X-axis and Z-axis to starting point.
M29 S500; Specify rigid tapping, with main axis speed for 500 RPM
G84Z-30R-4P1000F1000; G84 is end face rigid tapping circulation; starting point is
X0 Z10, R plane position is Z6, hole bottom position is
Z-30 and hole bottom pause time is 1 s; through F value
and S value instructed, thread pitch is 2.
M30; Program ends
G99; Feed per revolution mode

G0 X0 Z10; Position X-axis and Z-axis to starting point
M29 S500; Specify rigid tapping, with main axis speed for 500 RPM
M30; Program ends
Example 2: Main Axis 2 is applied in non-center hold end face and side end tapping.
Parameter setting:
Position parameter
NO.0#4=1 Use dual-main axis control or not(0: No 1: Yes)
NO.1#6=1 Speed output selection of Main Axis 2 (0: analog voltage 1: pulse train position)
NO.36#2=1 Eliminate G code in Group 10 or not upon reset or emergency stop (0: No 1: Yes)
Number parameter
NO.424 0 Servo axis number upon position output of speed instruction pulse training for Main
Axis 2 (0: Invalid 1-5: Axis 1-5)
Set corresponding axis according to actual tapping axis; N0.424 is required to be set as 4, if B axis of
Axis 4 serves as tapping axis.
49
PLC K parameter:
K7.0=1 Use main axis contour control or not (0: No 1: Yes)
K7.4=1 Switch detection switch or not in main axis position (0: No 1: Yes)
K7.7=1 Use main axis position mode or not (0: No 1: Yes)
PLC T parameter:
T11 4000 Switching time for main axis position mode (M code is completion time if there is no
detection switch)
PMC-axis parameter setting:

For example, B axis of Axis 4 serves as PMC-axis or tapping axis control
Gear ratio setting

Minimum movement unit of the system: 0.0001
Gear ratio=131072/3600000=2048/56250
1. Set gear ratio to system side:
System parameter NO.163=2048
2. Set gear ratio respectively to system side and drive side:
GE2000 drive unit PA12=2048
GE2000 drive unit PA13=5625
Note: It is required to set gear ratio 2048/56250 to drive side separately; speed controlled by PMC-axis should
not exceed 500 revolutions (too large for pulse number for system sending); it is suggested to set gear ratio of
PMC-axis to system side.
System position parameter:

NO.38#1 is set as 0 In multi-axis control, main axis selection through process instruction P
code or not (0: No 1: Yes)
NO.60#2 is set as 1 PMC-axis selection is specified by G signal or not (0: No 1: Yes)
System parameter:
NO.422 M63 M code for positive rotation of Main Axis 2
NO.423 M64 M code for reverse rotation of Main Axis 2
NO.540 0 System axis number controlled by PMC-axis (0: None 1-5: Axis 1-5)
NO.541 0.0010 Minimum unit of data controlled by PMC-axis (0.0001-360.0)
NO.542 500 Acceleration/deceleration time in speed instruction controlled by PMC-axis
Note: It is not required to set NO.540 when system position parameter NO.60#2=1 (PMC-axis selection is
specified by G signal). NO.540 is required to set corresponding PMC-axis when system position parameter
NO.60#2=0 (PMC-axis selection is not specified by G signal).
PLC D data table:

D0251 Attribute selection of Main Axis 2 (0: analog 1: Axis 1 2: Axis 2 3: Axis 3…)
Set corresponding axis according to actual tapping axis; D251 is required to be set as 4, if B axis
of Axis 4 serves as tapping axis.
Example about PMC-axis control:
50
B axis serves as PMC-axis control

M63 S600 600 RPM for B axis positive rotation
M64 S800 600 RPM for B axis reverse rotation
M65 B axis stops
M code control for main axis clamping/release:

K008.0 =1 Use main locking device (0: No 1: Yes)
M20 Main axis locking output
M21 Main axis release output
Y002.6 Main axis locking output
Y006.7 Main axis servo excitation lowering signal
Example 1: Tap 6 threads on outer circle with diameter for 100 through Main Axis 2; the 6
threads will be uniformly distributed on outer circle.

G98;
M14
G0 X105 Z-20 C0; Position various axes to starting point
M65; Specifying sign of Main Axis 2 (it is suggested to write M65;
writing M63 or M64 is also allowed)
M29 S500; Rigid tapping specifying, with speed of Main Axis 2 for 500
RPM
G88 X80 H60 R-2P1000 K6 F1000; G88 is side face rigid tapping circulation; starting point is
X105 Z-20 C0, R plane position is X103, hole bottom
position is X80, H60 is the position of hole on C-axis, K6 is
times and hole bottom pause time is 1 s; through F value
M30;
51
Example 2
Feed per minute mode
G0 X10 Z-20; Position X-axis and Z-axis to starting point
M65 Specifying sign for Main Axis 2 (it is suggested to write
M65; writing M63 or M64 is also allowed)
RPM; system number parameter N0.424 sets servo axis
controlled by Main Axis 2.
G88X-30R-4P1000F1000; G88 is side face rigid tapping circulation; starting point is
X10 Z-20, R plane position is X6, hole bottom position is
X-30 and hole bottom pause time is 1 s; through F value

M30; Program ends
Feed per revolution mode

G0 X10 Z-20; Position X-axis and Z-axis to starting point
M65 Specifying sign for Main Axis 2 (it is suggested to write
M65; writing M63 or M64 is also allowed)
RPM; system parameter N0.424 sets servo axis controlled
by Main Axis 2.
G88X-30R-4P1000F2; G88 is side face rigid tapping circulation; starting point is
X10 Z-20, R plane position is X6, hole bottom position is
X-30 and hole bottom pause time is 1 s; through F value
M30; Program ends
4.2.14.2 Ordinary (flexible) tapping
Format:
G84 X (U)_ C (H)_ Z (W)_ R_ P_ Q_F_ K_ M_; end face tapping circulation
G88 Z (W)_ C (H)_ X (U)_ R_ P_ Q_F_ K_ M_; side face tapping circulation
Instructions:
Z(W)_or X(U)_: Specifying coordinate value of hole bottom with absolute value or
only valid in designated program segment..
52
M_ : M CODE FOR C-AXIS CLAMPING (IF REQUIRED)

Note: 1. In general, ordinary tapping mode is only used in tapping on center hold.
2. In case of selecting ordinary tapping, this code is flexible tapping and tapping axis feed follows rotation of
main axis. After hole bottom main axis stop signal M05 is valid, the definite deceleration time is still
required before main axis stops rotation. At this time, Z-axis still feeds by following rotation of main axis
until main axis stops completely. As a result, in actual processing, hole bottom position of thread should be
slightly deeper or shallower than actual programming position. The specific error length is decided by main
axis speed upon tapping and main axis brake device.
Therefore, for safety sake, operator, before G84/G88 tapping, can move trailing plate to safety position and
implement G84/G8 dry running (not no-load operation), so as to observe position distance upon hole
bottom main axis stop in G84/G88 processing - G84/G88 starting point coordinate difference. Based on
that, it is required to modify the program and reserve enough hole depth before G84/G88 processing, for
convenience of G84/G88 processing.

3. In case of ordinary tapping, main axis must be designed with elastic clamp or tool must be designed with
variable screw tap.
For example,
Thread M10×2 in the figure

G0 X0 Z10; Position X-axis and Z-axis to starting point.
M3 S500; Specify flexible tapping, with main axis speed for 500 RPM
M30; Program ends
G0 X0 Z10; Position X-axis and Z-axis to starting point
M3 S500; Specify flexible tapping, with main axis speed for 500 RPM
M30; Program ends
53
4.2.15 Drilling circulation code
Format:
G83 X (U)_ C
G87 Z (W)_ C (H)_ X (U)_ R_ P_Q_ F_ K_ M_; side face drilling circulation
Instructions:
Z(W)_ or X(U)_: Specifying coordinate value of hole bottom with absolute value or
only valid in designated program segment..

M_ : M CODE FOR C-AXIS CLAMPING (IF REQUIRED)。
 Parameters concerned
0044 RTR
RTR: Drilling mode of G83 G87
0: Deep hole drilling, returning to starting point for each time
1: High speed drilling, retreating by distance designated by the number parameter P271
for each time
0271 Retract amount for drilling circulation G83 G87

［Data scope］: 0-999
For example,
O00002
G0 X0 Z10; Positioning X-axis and Z-axis to starting point
M03 S500; Main axis speed is 500 RPM
G83 Z-60 P1000 F100; G83 is end face drilling circulation; starting point is X0 Z10,
hole bottom position is X0 Z-60, hole bottom pause time is 1 s
and cutting feed speed is F100.
M30; Program ends
54
4.2.16 Ellipse instruction code
Format:
G162 X (U)_ Z (W)_ K_I_Q_ F_; clockwise processing
G163 X (U)_ Z (W)_ K_I_Q_ F_; Anticlockwise processing
Instructions:
X(U) Absolute coordinate of ellipse end point X (relative coordinate for U)
Z(W) Absolute coordinate of ellipse end point Z (relative coordinate for W)
K Long axis of ellipse (signified by absolute coordinate value) (value K>I)
I Short axis of ellipse (signified by absolute coordinate value) (value K>I)
Q Anticlockwise included angle between long axis of ellipse and Z-axis (value scope
-360°≤Q≤360°)
The angle will be 0°if not input.

I k should not be 0; there will be alarm of it is 0.
There will be alarm if starting point and end point are not on ellipse (ellipse is not constituted and
starting point and end point are more than 2 I(A)).
For example,
60 Long axis K144

长轴 K44
35
LongI20
短轴 axis I20
Z-axis
Ø32.916
Ø24.241
Z轴
Ø40
80
X-axis
X轴
M03 S500
G0 X24.241 Z0 Rapidly positioning to starting point
G163 X32.916 W-60 K44 I20 F500 Processing along ellipse
G1 Z-80
G0 X100 Z50 Error! Hyperlink reference invalid
M30
4.2.17 Parabola instruction code
Note: V1.5 test2.0 and above are valid.

Format:
G172 X (U)_ Z (W)_ P_Q_ F_; Clockwise processing
G173 X (U)_ Z (W)_ P_Q_ F_; Anticlockwise processing
Function: Two axes simultaneously execute parabolic interpolation specified by P along from
starting point (position before current program segment operation) to end point designated by X(U)
55
and Z(W).
G172 Code movement path is clockwise (rear tool carrier coordinate system)/anticlockwise (front
tool carrier coordinate system) parabola from starting point to end point, as shown in Fig. 1.
G173 Code movement path is anticlockwise (rear tool carrier coordinate system)/clockwise (front
tool carrier coordinate system) parabola from starting point to end point, as shown in Fig. 2.
Instructions: X(U) Absolute coordinate of parabola end point X (relative coordinate for U)
Z(W) Absolute coordinate of parabola end point Z (relative coordinate for W)
P Absolute value for coefficient of parabola (y^2 = 2*p*x)
Q Anticlockwise included angle long axis of parabola and Z-axis (value scope
-360°≤Q≤360°)
The angle will be 0°if not input.
F Feed speed; speed variation
Code path:
Z-axis Z-axis
Parabola starting point

Parabola end point
Parabola end point Parabola

starting point
X-axis
X-axis
Fig. 1 G172 Path Diagram Fig. 2 G173 Path Diagram
Whether it is clockwise or anticlockwise path depends on front/rear tool carrier coordinate system.
The system is designed with front tool carrier coordinate system, and subsequent diagrams are
hereby programmed. For details, please see Fig. 3.
Fig. 3
For example, Write program in Fig. 4 with G173 code, suppose ―distance from focus to directrix‖ P is
2;
56
Starting
point
End point
Fig. 4

Program (current point of tool is at starting point):
G0 X45.25 Z0
G173 X63.06 Z-20 P2 F300;
4.2.18 Polar coordinate interpolation
Function: Polar coordinate interpolation function means converting contour control from
programming instruction in rectangular coordinate system into one straight line axis
movement (tool movement) and one revolving axis movement (workpiece rotation). The
method is used in end face cutting and axial cam grinding of machine tool.
Format: Specifying G12 and G13 in different program segments
G12; Start polar coordinate interpolation mode (make polar coordinate

interpolation valid)
----------;
Under polar coordinate interpolation mode, G codes which can be
----------; instructed include:
----------; G01: Linear interpolation
G02 and G03: Arc interpolation
----------;
G04: pause;
----------; G40, G41, G42: tool tip radius compensation
----------; G65: User macro code
----------; G98, G99: Feed per revolution and feed per minute;
----------;
G13; Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancellation
Instructions:
 Polar coordinate interpolation plane
G12 starts polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar coordinate interpolation
plane. Polar coordinate interpolation is finished in this plane. The details are shown in the
figure below:
57
Rotation axis (imaginary axis)

(Unit: mm or inch)
Straight line axis (real axis)

(Unit: mm or inch)
Origin point of work coordinate system

Polar Coordinate Interpolation Plane

Polar coordinate interpolation will be cancelled upon powering on or system reset.
Note: The plane will be cancelled if before G12 instruction; will be recovered if after G13 instruction.
 Movement distance and feed speed of polar coordinate interpolation
Under polar coordinate interpolation mode, program instruction is rectangular coordinate
instruction used in polar coordinate plane. Revolving axis address is the address of Axis 2 in the
plane. In the plane, Axis 1 is instructed by diameter value or radius value; all revolving axes are
the same, i.e. revolving axis is not related to specifications of Axis 1. After instructing G12, virtual
axis will be at the position of the coordinate 0. Upon instructing G12, tool position for polar
coordinate interpolation will moves from the angle 0.
Feed speed instructed by F is the speed intersecting with polar coordinate interpolation plane
(rectangular coordinate system), i.e. relative speed between workpiece and tool.
 Axis movement along non-polar coordinate interpolation plane under polar coordinate
interpolation mode
Tool is able to move along these axes, which is not related to polar coordinate interpolation.
 Current position display under polar coordinate interpolation mode
Actual coordinate value display. However, remaining distance in program segment is in
accordance with coordinate display in polar coordinate interpolation plane (rectangular
coordinate).
Note:
 The first row entering coordinate interpolation mode must specify G01/G02/G03 or current
modal is G01/G02/G03; if not, there will be alarm.
 Coordinate system used in polar coordinate interpolation
Before instructing G12, it is required to set a workpiece coordinate system and center of
revolving axis is the origin point of this coordinate system. Under G12 mode, coordinate
system should not be changed absolutely. (G50, G54- G59, etc.)
 Tool tip radius compensation instruction
Under tool tip radius compensation mode, it is not allowed to start or cancel polar coordinate
interpolation mode (G12 or G13). Instructing G12 or G13 is required under tool tip radius
compensation cancellation mode.
 Program restart
For program segment under G12 mode, program restart is not allowed.
 When the code G12 has been instructed, tool position of polar coordinate interpolation mode
58
will move from the angle 0. Therefore, it is necessary to position main axis before polar
coordinate interpolation;
 During polar coordinate interpolation, it is not allowed to switch main axis gear. When it is
required to switch gear, the system should be under main axis control mode firstly.
 Cutting feed speed of revolving axis
Polar coordinate interpolation means converting tool movement in rectangular coordinate system
into tool movement of revolving axis (C-axis) and straight line axis (X-axis). When tool
approaches workpiece center, C-axis component for feed speed will get larger; there will be
alarm in case of exceeding the maximum cutting feed speed of C-axis (in setting parameter
NO96), as shown in the figure below. It is required to lower feed speed in F address instruction or
program to make tool (tool center upon using tool tip radius compensation) keep away from
workpiece center, for fear that C-axis component exceeds the maximum cutting feed speed of
C-axis.
 Radius and radius programming

Revolving axis (C-axis) should be programmed through radius still, even though straight line axis
(X-axis) is programmed through diameter.
 Relevant parameters
0009 A4TP
A4TP: Four-axis linkage or not (this parameter is also described in the previous V1.5.
0: No
1: Yes
0039 DIA
DIA: Diameter programming or not
0: Radius programming
1: Diameter programming
0043 PLS PDI

PLS: Polar coordinate interpolation offset function used or not
0: No
1: Yes
PDI: Axis 2 in the plane under polar coordinate interpolation mode used upon radius specifying
0: radius specifying
1: Diameter specifying
0530 Straight line axis in polar coordinate interpolation

［Number meaning］: The corresponding system axis number for straight line axis in polar
coordinate interpolation
［Number scope］: 0-5
0531 Revolving axis in polar coordinate interpolation

［ Number meaning ］ : The corresponding system axis number for revolving axis in polar
For example, X-axis (straight line axis) and C-axis (revolving axis)-based polar coordinate
59
interpolation program (see Fig. 2-12)

X-axis is programmed through diameter programming and C-axis is programmed through
radius programming, with programming unit for mm and display unit for ―°‖.
O0001;
N10 T0202
……..;
N100 G00 X150. C0 Z0;
N110 G12;
N120 G42 G01 X80. C0 F200;
N130 C20.0;
N140 G03 X40.0 C40.0 R20.0;
N150 G01 X-40.0;
N160 G03 X-80.0 C20.0 R20.0;

N170 G01 C-20.0;
N180 G03 X-40.0 C-40.0 R20.0;
N190 G01 X40.0;
N200 G03 X80.0 C-20.0 R20.0;
N210 G01 C0;
N220 G40 X150.0;
N230 G13;
N240 Z100.0;
N250 M30;
Fig. 2-12
4.2.19 Cylinder interpolation
It is required to covert movement amount of revolving axis specified by angle into distance of straight
line axis along external surface inside, so as to finish linear or arc interpolation together with other
axes. After interpolation, the distance will be converted to movement amount of revolving axis again.
60
Cylinder interpolation can be programmed through unfolded plane of cylinder. Therefore, it is very
easy to make programming for cylinder cam slot, etc.
Format: Specify G07 in different program segments
G07 IP r; Start cylinder interpolation mode
………
G07 IP 0; Cancel cylinder interpolation mode
IP: Revolving axis address

r: Cylinder radius
Note: Starting cylinder interpolation is required to be performed under G01 modal; if not, there will be alarm.
Instructions:
 Plane selection
Revolving specified by the parameter 535 or 539 is X, Y or Z-axis or one axis parallel to these
axes. For plane selected by specifying G code, revolving axis is the designated straight line axis.

To be specific, when revolving axis is one axis parallel to X-axis, G17 must specify a Xp-Yp plane,
a plane defined by revolving axis and Y-axis or one axis parallel to Y-axis.
For cylinder interpolation, it is required to set one revolving at most.
 Feed speed
Designated speed under cylinder interpolation is the speed for unfolded cylinder surface.
 Arc interpolation
Under arc cylinder interpolation mode, it is possible to finish arc interpolation with revolving
axis and another straight line axis. Arc radius can be instructed by R, with unit not ―°‖ but mm
(for metric input) or inch (inch input).
 Tool compensation
In order to execute tool compensation under cylinder interpolation mode, it is necessary to
log off the current tool compensation mode before entering cylinder interpolation mode, and
then start and stop tool compensation under cylinder interpolation mode. There should be
sufficient tool advancement space upon tool compensation establishment and cancellation.
 Cylinder interpolation accuracy
Under cylinder interpolation mode, movement amount of revolving axis instructed by angle is
converted into distance of straight line axis on external surface inside on a one-off basis, so as to
implement linear interpolation or arc interpolation. After interpolation, the distance will be
converted into angle again. For the conversion, movement amount will be rounded to the
minimum input increment unit.
Actual movement amount will be unequal to designated movement amount when cylinder radius
is small. But the error will not accumulate.
For the reason above, there will be error if manual operating is implemented by engaging switch
through absolute value under cylinder interpolation mode.
Actual movement amount Instruction

value
REV: Movement amount of revolving axis per revolution (setting value of No. 1260
parameter)
R: Workpiece radius
61
[]: Rounded to the minimum input increment unit

Limits:
 Arc radius specifying under cylinder interpolation mode
Arc radius cannot be specified by letter address I, J or K under cylinder interpolation mode.
 Arc interpolation and tool tip radius compensation
Arc interpolation cannot be correctly completed under cylinder interpolation mode if cylinder
interpolation mode begins upon tool tip radius compensation which has been applied.
 Positioning
Under cylinder interpolation mode, it is not allowed to specify positioning operating
(including positioning operating for rapid movement circulation, such as G28 and G80-G89).
Cylinder interpolation mode must be cancelled before designated position. Cylinder
interpolation (G07) cannot be executed under positioning mode (G00).
 坐 Coordinate system setting
Under cylinder interpolation mode, it is not allowed to specify workpiece coordinate system
G50.
 Cylinder interpolation mode setting
Under cylinder interpolation mode, it is not allowed to reset cylinder interpolation mode.
Cylinder interpolation mode must be eliminated before resetting cylinder interpolation mode.
 Fixed drilling circulation during cylinder interpolation
It is not allowed to specify fixed drilling circulation G81- G89 during cylinder interpolation.
Relevant parameters
0009 DTO A4TP
0: No
1: Yes
DTO: Rotation axis input type in cylinder interpolation
0: angle
1: unfolded plane distance
0535 Set Axis 1 as axis in basic coordinate system

［Number meaning］: The corresponding system axis number for straight line axis in cylinder
interpolation
interpolation
［Number scope］: 0~5

interpolation
［Number scope］: 0~5

［Number meaning］: The corresponding system axis number for straight line axis balanced to
revolving axis in cylinder interpolation
62
5: Balanced to Axis 1; 6: Balanced to Axis 2; 7: Balanced to Axis 3


［Number meaning］: The corresponding system axis number for straight line axis balanced to
revolving axis in cylinder interpolation
5: Balanced to Axis 1; 6: Balanced to Axis 2; 7: Balanced to Axis 3
Note: Parameters PA0535, PA 0536 and PA 0537 are corresponding axis numbers for basic coordinate system;
default value is 1, 2 and 3.
Parameters PA538 and PA539 are corresponding rotation axes of basic coordinate system and
corresponding system axis for straight line axis balanced to revolving axis in cylinder interpolation. Setting
value is decided according to coordinate plane; G17 plane is set as 5 or 6, G18 plane is set as 5 or 7 and
G19 plane is set as 5 or 7. Default plane of ordinary machine tool is G18 pane, where Axis 5 is rotation axis

and PA539 is set as 5.
For example,
000001;
N0001 G0 Z100;
N0002 G0 X100
N0003 M14; (Switching main axis to position
control mode)
N0004 G01 C0; (C-axis returns to zero; cylinder
interpolation cannot be started
unless under G01 modal.)
N0005 G07 C50; (R50Starting cylinder interpolation;
cylinder radius)
N0006 G01 G42 Z120.0 F300;
N0007 C30.0;
N0008 G03 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0;
N0009 G01 Z70.0;
N0010 G02 Z60.0 C70.0 R10.0;
N0011 G01 C150.0;
N0012 G02 Z70.0 C190.0 R75.0;
N0013 G01 Z110.0 C230.0;
N0014 G03 Z120.0 C270.0 R75.0;
N0015 G01 C360.0;
N0016 G40 Z100.0;
N0017 G07 C0; (Canceling cylinder interpolation)
N0018 M15; (Switching main axis to speed control mode)
N0019 M30;
63
The figure above is side face folded diagram in the program example. According to the diagram, after
movement amount of revolving axis (C-axis) specified by angle is converted into straight line axis
distance of cylinder along surface, interpolation formed through revolving axis and another straight
line axis (Z-axis) can be regarded as interpolation under Z-X plane coordinate system in G18 plane.
4.2.20 Polygon cutting
Polygon cutting means polygon processing by using workpiece and tool to determine ratio rotation.
Workpiece
Work- Tool
piece
Fig. 4-2-20-1
Square or hexagon workpiece can be processed by changing gyration ratio of workpiece and tool or
number of tool tips. It can reduce processing time, compared with method for processing polygon by
using C-axis and X-axis in polar coordinate. But the shape processed is not accurate polygon.
Polygon cutting is used in processing square or hexagon screw or bolt.
Control axis composition:
Axis 1: X-axis
Axis 2: Z-axis
Axis 3: Y-axis (Tool axis, secondary control axis)
Axis 4: C-axis (Tool axis, main control axis)
Instruction format: Specifying G251 and G250 in different program segments
G251 P_Q_; Polygon turning start

………
G250; Polygon side cutting cancellation
Instructions:
P, Q: Rotation rate of main axis and Y-axis
Value scope: 1-1, 000 for P and Q, without decimal point
64
Y-axis will have positive rotation when Q is positive value; Y-axis will have reverse
rotation when Q is negative value.
For polygon turning, tool rotation will be controlled by axis controlled by CNC. The rotation axis will be
called as Y-axis in following description.
Controlled by G251 instruction, Y-axis enables rotation speed of workpiece and tool mounted on main
axis (instructed by S) in accordance with designated ratio.
For example, rotation rate of workpiece (main axis) and Y-axis is 1:2 and Y-axis has positive rotation.
G251 P1 Q2
The system will start to detect transfer signal sent by position encoder installed on main axis when
G251 specifies simultaneous startup. After detecting single-transfer signal, Y-axis gyration ratio will
be controlled according to designated gyration ratio (P: Q), i.e. controlling Y-axis rotation to make
main axis and Y-axis gyration have the relationship of P: Q. The relationship will be kept until polygon
cutting cancellation instruction (G250 or reset operating) has been executed. Y-axis rotation direction
depends on code Q and is not affected by rotation direction of position encoder.

In case of specifying G250, synchronization of main axis and Y-axis will be cancelled and Y-axis will
stop. Under the circumstances below, the synchronization will be cancelled:
1) Power interruption
2) Emergency stop
3) Servo alarm
4) Reset
5) Alarm
Principle of polygon turning:

Details on polygon turning are as follows. In the figure below, tool radius and workpiece radius is
respectively A and B and angle speeds of tool and workpiece are respectively α and β; origin point of
XY coordinate system is assumed as workpiece center. For simplifying description, it is supposed that
tool center is located in the part of Po(A,0) at workpiece edge and tool tip moves from the position
Pto(A¨B, 0).
A: Workpiece radius
B: Turning tool radius
α: Angle speed of workpiece
β: Angle speed of tool
Angle
speedα
Tool
Angle
speedβ
Work-
piece
Fig. 4-2-20-2
Under this circumstance, the time t and rear tool tip position Pt(Xt, Yt) are signified by Formulate 1
below:
65
Starting point
Fig. 4-2-20-3
Xt=Acosαt-Bcos(β-α)t (Formula 1)
Yt=Asinαt+Bsin(β-α)t
Formula 1 should be modified as follows suppose rotation ratio of workpiece and tool is 1: 2, i.e.
β=2α:
Xt=Acosαt-Bcosαt=(A-B)cosαt (Formula 2)
Yt=Asinαt+Bsinαt=(A+B)sinαt
Formula 2 means drawing an ellipse with long axis as A+B and short axis as A-B. It is thus can be
seen that square can be processed by using tool shown below, suppose tool is mounted
180°symmetric position.
Fig. 4-2-20-4
Hexagon shown below will be processed if three knifes are installed with 120°spacing.
66
Fig. 4-2-20-4

Note 1:
1) After executing G251, Y-axis, which is different from control axes, cannot specify movement instructions
such as Y_. It is because that Y-axis has no need for axis movement instruction; to be specific, when G251
(polygon turning mode) is specified, it is only required to control synchronous rotation of Y-axis and main
axis and the speed has fixed ratio with main axis speed. However, in case of instructing G250 (polygon
turning mode cancellation instruction), it is necessary to use reference position to return to instruction
(G28Y0), with the reason that position for Y-axis rotation stop is changeable. It will go wrong if starting
position for tool rotation is changeable, such as the condition for the same graphics having fine processing
after rough machining. Definition of Y-axis G28Y0 is the same with orientation instruction of main axis. For
other axes which are different from manual reference point return, deceleration switch is not required to be
detected when G28 returns to reference point; but for Y-axis which is the same with manual reference point
return, it is required to detect deceleration switch upon executing reference point return. In order to make
processing shape the same with that of the last one, tool and workpiece must be in the position the same
with that of the last processing when tool starts rotation; tool will start rotation after detecting single-transfer
signal of position encoder on main axis.
2) Upon polygon turning, Y-axis controlling tool rotation should be Axis 4; but Axis can also be used by setting
the parameter 384, and under this time, the axis must be called as C-axis.
3) Upon Y-axis movement, display of machine tool coordinate value (MECHINE) varies within 0-parameter
setting value (movement amount per revolution) in axis position display. Absolute value or machine tool
indicated number will not be updated.
4) It is not allowed to install absolute position detector on Y-axis.
5) The maximum speed of tool rotation axis should not exceed value set by No. 0385.
6) Gear ratio of tool rotation axis should be set in the system.
7) After starting synchronization, cutting processing should not be started until speeds of main axis and Y-axis
are steady.
Note 2: Gear ratio on tool rotation axis (i.e. Y-axis) should be set in the system.
 Relevant parameters
0009 A4TP
0: No
1: Yes
0384 Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon processing
［Number meaning］: Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon processing
67
0385 peed upper limit of tool rotation axis for polygon processing
［Data meaning］: Speed upper limit of tool rotation axis for polygon processing
［Value scope］: 1-2000
For example,
O00010
T0101
M3 S100 Workpiece rotation speed: 100 revolutions
G0 X50 Z0 Rapid positioning
G0 Y0 Tool rotation axis returns to zero
G251 P1 Q2 Tool rotation axis synchronization starts (rotation speed: 200 revolutions)
G01 Z-10 F100 Z-axis feed
X80 X-axis retreat

G250 Tool rotation axis synchronization cancellation and tool operation stop
G0 Z100 Z-axis retreats to safety position
M30
4.3 Reference Point G Code

Reference point is a fixed point on machine tool; with reference point return function, tool can move to
the position very easily.
For reference point, there are three code operating types, as shown in Fig. 4-3-1. With G28, tool can
pass through middle point and automatically move to reference point along designated axis in code.
Fig. 4-3-1
4.3.1 Automatic return to machine zero (G28)
Format: G28 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Function: With the code, axis instructed can return to machine zero trough middle point specified by
X (U) and Z (W). In the code, one or two axes can be specified.
68
Table 4-3-1-1
Instruction Function
G28 X(U) X-axis returns to machine zero and Z-axis
keeps at original position.
G28 Z(W) Z-axis returns to machine zero and X-axis
keeps at original position..
G28 Keeping at original position (the system
will give 166 alarm)
G28 X(U) Z(W) X-axis and Z-axis return to machine zero
simultaneously.
Instructions: Instruction process (for action process, please see Fig. 4-3-1-1):

(1) Rapidly move from current position to middle point in the instruction (A point →B point)
(2) Rapidly move from middle point to machine zero (B point→ R point)
(3) If the system is not in non-machine tool locking state, return to machine zero will end,
zero indicator will be on and machine tool coordinate will zero out.
Fig. 4-3-1-1
Note: 1. Upon instructing G28, movement from middle point to machine zero is the same with manual return to
machine zero, if manual return to machine zero has not been performed yet after powering on.
2. During the process from A point→ B point, two axes are positioned respectively at the independent
speed. Therefore, the path is not straight line.
3. This function is unavailable if machine tool is not designed with machine zero.
4.4 Single Fixed Circulation Code

In some special rough turning processing processes, repeated cutting is required in the same
processing route due to huge cutting workload. At this time, fixed circulation function can be used,
with which, processing required to be completed through multiple program segments originally can be
completed with one program segment only. Besides, during repeated cutting, it is only required to
change corresponding value, which goes a good way with program simplification. Single-type fixed
circulation code includes axial cutting circulation G90, thread cutting circulation G92 and radial cutting
circulation G94.
Descriptions in diagrams below are specified by diameter; where specified by radius, it is required to
replace U with U/2 and replace X with X/2.
69
4.4.1 Axial cutting circulation (G90)
Format: G90 X(U)__ Z(W)__ R__ F__;

Function: Cylindrical and conical surface single circulation processing will be implemented when this
code is executed. After circulation, tool will return to starting point. The imaginary line (R)
in Fig. 4-4-1-1 and Fig. 4-4-1-2 signifies rapid movement and real line (F) means cutting
feed. Numeric symbol behind the address U in increment program depends on X direction
of Path 1 and numeric symbol behind the address W depends on Z direction of Path 2.
Instructions: Absolute coordinate value of circulation end point, with unit for mm;
U, W: Movement amount from circulation end point to circulation starting point, with unit
for mm;
R: Radius difference at conical surface cutting starting point and cutting end point, with
unit for mm;
F: Resultant feed speed of X-axis and Z-axis during circulation; it is a modal code.
Fig. 4-4-1-1
70

Fig. 4-4-1-2
G90 code has four paths according to different tool start points, as shown in Fig. 4-4-1-3.
Fig. 4-4-1-3 G90 Code Operation Path
For example, write program in Fig. 4-4-1-4 through the code G90.
71
Fig. 4-4-1-4
Program:
O0001;
M3 S300;
G0 X130 Z5;
G90 X120 Z-110 F200; (C→D)
X60 Z-30; (A→B)
G0 X130 Z-30;
G90 X120 Z-80 R-30 F150; (B→C)
M5 S0;
M30;
4.4.2 (G94) Radial cutting circulation (G94)
Format: G94 X(U)__ Z(W)__ R__ F__;

Function: End face single circulation processing will be implemented when this code is executed.
After circulation, tool will return to starting point. R in Fig. 4-4-2-1 and Fig. 4-4-2-2 signifies rapid
movement and F means cutting feed. Numeric symbol behind the address U in increment program
depends on X direction of Path 2 and numeric symbol behind the address W depends on Z direction
of Path 1.
Instructions: Absolute coordinate value of circulation end point, with unit for mm;
U and W: Movement mount from circulation end point to circulation starting point, with unit
for mm.
R: Coordinate component in Z-axis direction for end face cutting starting point to end point,
with unit for mm;
F: Resultant feed speed of X-axis and Z-axis during circulation; it is a modal code.
72

Fig. 4-4-2-1
Fig. 4-4-2-2
G94 code has four paths according to different tool start points, as shown in Fig. 4-4-2-3.
73
1)U<0,W<0,R<0 2)U<0，W<0，R>0(|R|≤|W|）
X X
W
R W
R
B A B A
U/2 U/2
C D C D
Z Z
4)U>0,W<0,R<0
3)U>0，W<0，R>0（|R|≤|W|）
X X
W R W
R
C D C D
U/2 U/2
B A B A
Z Z
Fig. 4-4-2-3
For example, write program in Fig. 4-4-1-4 through the code G904.
Program:
O0002;
M3 S1;
G0 X130 Z5;
G94 X120 Z-110 F100; (D→C)
G0 X120 Z0;
G94 X60 Z-30 R-50; (C→B→A)
M5 S0;
M30;
4.4.3 Thread cutting circulation (G92)
Format:
G92X(U)__ Z(W)__ J__K__ F__ L__; (metric thread)
Designated thread pitch (F)

G92X(U)__ Z(W)__ J__K__ I __ L__; (Inch thread)
Designated thread pitch (threads/inch)
Function: Equal pitch straight thread and taper thread single circulation thread processing will be
implemented when this code is executed. After circulation, tool will return to starting point.
74
Retracting groove is not required upon thread cutting. J and k are vanishing length of
X-axis and Z-axis respectively. The imaginary line (R) in Fig. 4-4-3-1 and 4-4-3-2 signifies
rapid movement and real line (F) means cutting feed. The setting values J and K (if have)
will execute vanishing of X-axis and Z-axis; when user is not required for thread vanishing
length set by J and K, the system will execute vanishing length = pitch of setting value X
0.1 X for the parameter P473. When J is omitted, vanishing in long axis direction will be
performed as per K and vanishing in short axis direction will be performed as per setting
value of the parameter NO.473. In case of omitting K, vanishing will be performed as per
K=J. When J=0 or J=0 and K=0, there will not be vanishing; when J≠0 and K=0, vanishing
will be performed as per K=J; when J=0 and K≠0, there will not be vanishing.
Instructions: Coordinate value of circulation end point, with unit for mm;
U, W: Movement mount from circulation end point to circulation starting point, with unit for
mm;

J: Vanishing length in X direction, without symbolic number; value scope: 0-9,999 mm.
K: Vanishing length in Z direction, without symbolic number; value scope: 0-9,999,999
mm.
R: Difference of X-axis absolute coordinates for cutting starting point and cutting end point
(radius value); in case of inconformity for symbols of R and U, the requirement ∣
R│≤│U/2│ should be met;
F: Metric thread pitch, with value scope for 0.001-500 mm; it is a modal code;
I: Threads per inch of inch thread, with value scope for 0.06-25,400 thread/inch; it is
modal code;
L: Number of threads, with value scope 1-99 pcs; it is a modal code; if not specified, it will
have default value as 1`;
Fig. 4-4-3-1
75
Fig. 4-4-3-2
Note:
1. Precautions of thread cutting are the same with G32 thread cutting; please see 4.2.13 in this
Manual.
2. During thread cutting, circulation should not be stopped until Action 3 ends if there is feed hold
signal input.
3. Within thread pitch scope, main axis speed limit and other factors should be the same with
thread cutting of holding signal;
4. While G92 is executing straight thread, there will be alarm if tool starting point of G92 is the
same with thread end point in X direction, because it is unable to recognize whether thread
belongs to inner thread or outer thread.
5. For R value scope in G92, please see Fig. 4-4-1-3.
6. The system will have 45°vanishing when any one of J and K is set as 0 or not specified.
For example, write component program in Fig. 4-4-3-3 through the code G90 firstly and then
process thread with the code G92.
Fig. 4-4-3-3
76
Program:
O0001;
M3 S300;
G0 X150 Z50;
T0101; (Turning tool of outer circle)
G0 X130 Z5;
G90 X120 Z-110 F200; (C→D)
X60 Z-30; (A→B)
G0 X130 Z-30;
G90 X120 Z-80 R-30 F150; (B→C)

G0 X150 Z150;
T0202; (chaser)
G0 X65 Z5;
G92 X58.5 Z-25 F3; (Thread processing; four-tool cutting)
X57.5 Z-25;
X56.5 Z-25;
X56 Z-25;
M5 S0;
M30;
4.4.4 Precautions for Single Fixed Circulation Code
1) In single fixed circulation, the data X(U), Z(W) and R are modal values. Where the new X(U),
Z(W) and R are not specified, all data specified before are valid;
2) In single fixed circulation, X(U), Z(W) and R data will be eliminated when non-modal G codes
other than G04 or codes in Group 01 other than G90, G92 or G94 are specified.
3) The fixed circulation will not be repeated when there is only non-moving code program
segment behind G90, G92 or G94 program segment.
(Example) N003 M3;
…
…
N010 G90 X20.0 Z10.0 F2000;
N011 M8; (no repeated G90 execution)
…
…
4) Under fixed circulation state, fixed circulation can be simultaneously performed with M, S and
T functions if M, S and T are specified; please instruct fixed circulation again if fixed
circulation is cancelled after instructing M, S and T resulted from the instructions G00 and
G01.
(Example) N003 T0101;
…
N010 G90 X20.0 Z10.0 F2000;
77
N011 G00 T0202;

N012 G90 X20.5 Z10.0;
4.5 Compound Fixed Circulation Code

In order to simplify fixed programming, the system provides six compound fixed circulation codes:
axial rough turning circulation G71, radial rough turning circulation G72; closed cutting circulation
G73; fine processing circulation G70; axial grooving circulation G74; radial grooving circulation G75
and multi-thread cutting circulation G76. With this kind of compound circulation codes, the system will
calculate processing route and tool feed times automatically only by specifying find processing route
and depth of cut of rough machining.
4.5.1 Axial rough turning circulation (Type I of G71)

Format: G71u(Δd)R(e);
G71 P(NS) Q(NF) U(Δu) W(Δw)F S T ;
N(NS)G0/G1 X(U) . . . . . ;
........;
. . . . F;
. . . . S; Program segment of fine processing
. . . . T;
·
N(NF). . . . . ;
Function: The system will calculate rough machining route automatically according to workpiece fine
processing route, depth of cut and tool advancement mount and retreat mount given by
NS-NF program segment, as shown in Fig. 4-5-1-1, so as to realize cutting with action
parallel to Z-axis. Non-molded bars can be shaped at a time.
Instructions: Δd: Depth of cut for each time, without symbol. Cutting direction depends on AA'
direction (radius specifying), with value scope for 0.001 mm – 99,999.999mm. It is a modal
mode and will be valid until next specifying. In addition, it can also be specified by the data
parameter P462 and parameter value can be changed according to program instruction.
e: Retreat amount (radius specifying), with unit for mm and value for 0 mm-99,999.999 mm.
It is a modal code and will be valid until next specifying. It can also be set by the data
parameter P463 and parameter value can be changed in case of using program
instruction.
NS: Sequence number of the first program segment for fine processing route program
segment cluster.
NF: Sequence number of the first program segment for fine processing route program
segment cluster.
Δu: Distance and direction of fine processing allowance in X-axis direction, with value
scope for -999,999.99-999,999.99mm.
Δw: Distance and direction of fine processing allowance in Z-axis direction, with value
scope for -999,999.99-999,999.99mm.
F: Cutting feed speed, with value scope for 1mm/min-6,000mm/min for feed per minute and
78
0.001mm/r-500mm/r for feed per revolution.

S: Speed of main axis;
T: Tool and tool offset number
C
B A
ΔD
45o
Rapid快速进给
feed
切削进给
Cutting feed
程序指定的轨迹
Path designated by
program

Δ U/2
A’
ΔW
1. Both △d and △u are specified by the same address U; the difference is whether to specified P
or Q according to program segment.
2. Circulation action is implemented through G71 code specified by P and Q.
3. In G71 circulation, F, S and T functions in program segment of the sequence numbers NS-NF are invalid
and should be ignored. G71 program segment or F, S and T specified previously are valid. In program
segments of sequence numbers NS-NF, F, S and T are only open to G70 code circulation.
4. Where there is constant line speed control selection function, G96 or G97 in program segment
of the sequence numbers NS-NF is invalid and those specified by G71 or previous program segment
are valid.
5. G71 code path has four types according to different cutting directions, as shown in Fig. 4-5-1-2.
But cutting is performed according to tool movement parallel to Z-axis no matter which kind of
type it is. Δu and Δw symbols are as follows:
B A A B
U(+)..W(+) U(+)..W(-)
Z A' A'
直线，圆弧插补
Linear and acr interpolations
A' A' 都可以
are allowed
U(-)..W(+) U(-)..W(-)
B A A B
Fig. 4-5-1-2
6. In NS program segment of the sequence number A-A‘, it is only allowed to use G00 or G01 for
specifying and Z-axes of A point and A‘ point should be consistent.
7. In A‘-B, X and Z address values must be of monotonic increasing or decreasing and the path
must be monotonic;
79
8. In program segment of the sequence numbers NS-NF, it is not allowed to invoke subprogram.
9. In the sequence numbers NS-NF, 100 program segments can be entered at most; the system
will give alarm ERR137 when number of program segments is beyond 100.
For example, write component program in Fig. 4-5-1-3 through compound fixed circulation G71.
2
(200, 10)
Starting point
0.5
e
d
c
b a
Z
40
60
100
80 10 20 30 30
Fig. 4-5-1-3
Program:
O0001;
N010 G0 X220.0 Z50; (Positioning to safety position)
N020 M3 S300; (Anticlockwise rotation of main axis, with speed for 300r/min)
N030 M8; (Enable cooling mode)
N040 T0101; (Invoke rough turning tool)
N050 G00 X200.0 Z10.0; (Rapid positioning; approaching workpiece)
N060 G71 U0.5 R0.5; (Depth of cut for each time 1mm [diameter]; retract by 1mm
([diameter])
N070 G71 P080 Q120 U1 W2.0 F100 S200; (For a---d rough turning, allowance in X direction is
1mm and allowance in Z direction is 2mm)
N080 G00 X40.0; (Position to X40)
N090 G01 Z-30.0 F100 S200; (a→b)
N100 X60.0 W-30.0; (b→c) Fine processing route a→b→c→d→program segment
N110 W-20.0; (c→d)
N120 X100.0 W-10.0; (d→e)
N130 G00 X220.0 Z50.0; (Rapidly retreat to safety position)
N140 T0202; (Import No. 2 fine processing tool and execute No. 2 tool offset)
N150 G00 X200.0 Z10.0; (Position to circulation starting point instructed by G70)
N160 G70 P80 Q120; (Fine turning for a--- e)
N170 M05 S0; (Close main axis and stop speed)
N180 M09; (Close cooling)
80
N190 G00 X220.0 Z50.0 T0100; (Return to safety position rapidly; change back into
benchmark tool and eliminate tool offset)
N200 M30; (Program ends)
4.5.2 Groove circulation processing (Type II of G71)
Type II of G71: Differen from Type I,appearance outline along X-axis has not need for monotonic
increasing or decreasing. Processing can be started only under the premise that Z-axis
is monotonic; besides, there can be 20 grooves at most.
As shown in Fig. 4-5-2-1, the first cutting needn‘t be perpendicular and processing can be started
only under the premise that Z-axis is monotonic.

Fig. 4-5-2-1
As shown in Fig. 4-5-2-2, the system will give alarm, because it is monotonic in Z-axis direction.
Not monotonic in
Z-axis direction
Fig. 4-5-2-2
Format: G71 U(Δd)R(e);

G71 P(NS) Q(NF) U(Δu) W(Δw)F S T ;
N(NS) G0/G1 X(U) Z(W). ;
........;
. . . . F;
. . . . S; Program segment of find processing route
. . . . T;
·
N(NF). . . . . ;
81
Fig. 4-5-2-3(Processing Path of Type II of G71)

As shown in Fig. 4-5-2-4, it is required to retract tool after cutting; retreat amount should be specified by
the parameter R(e) or by the data parameter No. 464. Diagram concerned is as follows:
Set by parameter
Fig. 4-5-2-4
Precautions:
1. ns program segment is G00 and G01 codes. For Type II, it is required to specify the two axes X(U) and Z(W);
W0 must be specified when Z-axis has no movement.
2. Retract point should be high or low as much as possible, for fear that treat tool has impact on workpice.
3. For Type II, fine turning allowance can only specify X direction. The whole processing path will have offset if fine
turning allowance in Z direction is specified; 0 had better be set as if so.
4. Other precautions are the same with those of Type I of G71.
5. In P0461 compound turning circulation, there will be alarm if non-monotonic allowable values of G71 and G72
(Axis 1 in the plane) and rough turning direction of Type I and Type II are not monotonic. Under automatic
program building and other circumstances, there may form a tiny non-monotonic shape sometimes. The
parameter should be set without negative sign and serve as allowable value, so that G71 and G72 instructions
can be executed even though non-monotonic shape is included.
6. In P0460 compound turning circulation, there will be alarm if non-monotonic allowable values of G71 and G72
(Axis Z in the plane) and rough turning direction of Type I and Type II are not monotonic. Under automatic
program building and other circumstances, there may form a tiny non-monotonic shape sometimes. The
parameter should be set without negative sign and serve as allowable value, so that G71 and G72 instructions
can be executed even though non-monotonic shape is included.
7. Idle stroke amount of starting position for G71 and G72 cutting feed in P0477 compound turning fixed circulation
rapidly moves to cutting feed distance among tool advancement points.
82
4.5.3 Radial rough turning circulation (Type I of G72)
Format: G72 W(Δd)R (e)F_ S_ T_;
G72 P (NS) Q (NF) U (Δu) W (Δw) ;

U U U U U U U U
N(NS)G0/G1 Z(W) . . ;
.......;
. . . . F;
. . . . S; Program segment for fine processing
. . . . T;
N(NF). . . . . ;
Function: The system will calculate rough machining route automatically according to workpiece fine
processing route, depth of cut and tool advancement mount and retreat mount given by

NS-NF program segment. Non-molded bars can be shaped at a time.
Instructions:
Δd: Depth of cut for each time, without symbol. Cutting direction depends on AB direction,
with value scope for 0.001 mm-99,999.999mm. It is a modal mode and will be valid until
next specifying. In addition, it can also be specified by the data parameter P463, and
parameter value can be changed according to program instruction.
e: Retreat amount (radius specifying), with unit for mm and value for 0 mm-99,999.999 mm.
It is a modal code and will be valid until next specifying. It can also be set by the data
parameter P464, and parameter value can be changed in case of using program
instruction.
NS: Sequence number of the first program segment for fine processing route program
segment cluster.
NF: Sequence number of the last program segment for fine processing route program
segment cluster.
Δu: Distance and direction of fine processing allowance in X-axis direction, with value scope
for -999,999.99-999,999.99mm.
Δw: Distance and direction of fine processing allowance in Z-axis direction, with value scope
for -999,999.99-999,999.99mm.
F: Cutting feed speed, with value scope for 1mm/min-6,000mm/min for feed per minute and
T: Tool and tool offset number;
83
△D
B´
B A´
A
45
º
E
Rapid feed
快速进给
程序指定的轨迹
Path designated by program Cutting
切削进给feed
C´
C △U/2
△W
Fig. 4-5-3-1
Instructions:
1. Both △d and △u are specified by the same address U; the distinguishing method is whether to
specified P or Q according to program segment.
2. Circulation action is specified by G72 code specified by P and Q.
3. In G72 circulation, F, S and T functions in program segment of the sequence numbers NS-NF
are invalid and should be ignored. G72 program segment or F, S and T specified previously are
valid. In program segments of sequence numbers NS-NF, F, S and T are only open to G70 code
circulation.
4. Where there is constant line speed control selection function, G96 or G97 in program segment
of the sequence numbers NS-NF is invalid and those specified by G71 or previous program
segment are valid.
5. G72 code path has four types according to different cutting directions, as shown in Fig. 4-5-3-2.
But cutting is performed according to tool movement parallel to Z-axis no matter which kind of
type it is. Δu and Δw symbols are shown in Fig. 4-5-3-2.
6. In NS program segment of the sequence number A-B, it is only allowed to use G00 or G01 for
specifying and Z-axes of A point and B point should be consistent.
7. In B-C, X and Z address values must be of monotonic increasing or decreasing.
8. In program segment of the sequence numbers NS-NF, it is not allowed to invoke subprogram.
9. In the sequence numbers NS-NF, 128 program segments can be entered at most; the system
will give alarm ERR137 when number of program segments is beyond 100.
84
C C
X
U(+)..W(+).. U(+)..W(-).. Z
B B X
B A A B 直线和圆弧插补都可以
Both straight line and arc
A interpolations are allowed.
A
U(-)..W(+).. U(-)..W(-)..
C C
Fig. 4-5-3-2 Four Types of G72 Code

For example, write component program in Fig. 4-5-3-3 through compound fixed circulation G72.
(176, 10)
a
起点
b Starting point
c
d
40
80
160
20 15 20
Fig. 4-5-3-3
Program:
PO0002;
N010 G0 X220.0 Z50.0; (position to safety position)
N015 T0202; (Change No. 2 tool and execute tool offset)
N017 M03 S200; (anticlockwise rotation of main axis, with speed for 200)
N020 G00 X176.0 Z10.0; (rapid positioning and approaching workpiece)
N030 G72 W2.0 R1.0; (feed amount: 2mm; retract amount: 1mm)
N040 G72 P050 Q090 U1.0 W1.0 F100 S200; (for a—d rough turning, there should be 1mm
margin respectively on X-axis and Z-axis)
N050 G00 Z-55.0 S200; (rapid positioning)
N060 G01 X160.0 F120; (feed to a point)
N070 X80.0 W20.0; (a—b processing) Program segment for fine processing route
N080 W15.0; (b—c processing)
N090 X40.0 W20.0; (c—d processing)
N100 G0 X220.0 Z50.0; (retract tool to safety position)
85
N105 T0303; (change No. 3 tool and execute No. 3 tool offset)
N108 G00 X176.0 Z10.0; (return to G70 location rapidly)
N110 G70 P050 Q090; (a—d fine processing)
N115 G0 X220.0 Z50.0; (move to safety position, for convenience of tool replacement)
N120 M5 S0 T0200; (stop main axis, change No. 2 tool and cancel tool offset)
N130 G0 X220.0 Z50.0; (return to starting point rapidly)
N140 M30; (program ends)
4.5.4 Groove circulation processing (Type II of G72)
Type II is different from Type I, and the details are as follows:

1) Related definition: For Type II, number of parameters is 1 more than that of Type I.
2) Monotonic increasing or decreasing is unnecessary for appearance outline along X-axis;
besides there should be 10 grooves at most. Diagram concerned is as follows:
Fg. 4-5-4-1
However, surface outline along X-axis must be of monotonic increasing ro decreasing; outline below
cannot be processed:
E-axis direction is
not monotonic
Fig. 4-5-4-2
1) The first cutting needn‘t be perpendicular and processing can be started only under the
premise that Z-axis is monotonic; diagram concerned is as follows:
86

Fig. 4-5-4-3
2) It is required to retract tool after cutting and retract amount is specified by the parameter R (e) or by
setting value of data parameter No. 464; diagram concerned is as follows:
E (specified by
parameter)
Fig. 4-5-4-4
3) Fine turning allowance can only specify Z direction. The whole processing path will have offset if
fine turning allowance in X direction is specified; 0 had better be set as if so.
Format: G72 W(Δd) R (e) F_ S_ T_;
G72 P (NS) Q (NF) U (Δu) W (Δw) ;

U U U U U U U U
N(NS) G0/G1 X(U) Z(W) . . ;

.......;
. . . . F;
. . . . S; Program segment for fine processing
. . . . T;
N(NF) . . . . . ;
87
Fig. 4-5-4-5(G72 Processing Path)
4.5.5 Closed cutting circulation (G73)
Format: G73u (Δi) W(Δk) R (d);

G73 P(NS) Q(NF) U(Δu) W(Δw) F S T ;
Function: With this circulation code, repeated cutting can be implemented as per path given by
NS-NF program segment; for every cutting, tool will move forward once. Workblank
preliminarily formed through forging, casting and other rough machining methods can be
processed efficiently.
Instructions: Retract distance and direction in X-axis direction (radius value), with unit for mm; it is a
modal code and will be valid until next specifying. In addition, it can also be specified by
the data parameter P465 and parameter value can be changed according to program
instruction.
Δk: Retract distance and direction in Z-axis direction, with unit for mm; it is a modal
code and will be valid until next specifying. In addition, it can also be specified by the
data parameter P466 and parameter value can be changed according to program
instruction.
D: Times of closed cutting, with unit for time; it is a modal code and will be valid until
next specifying. In addition, it can be set by the parameter P467 and parameter value
can be changed according to program instruction.
NS: Sequence number of the first program segment for fine processing shape program
segment cluster;
NF: Sequence number of the last program segment for fine processing shape program
segment cluster;
Δu: Fine processing allowance in X-axis direction, with value scope for
88
-999,999.99-999,999.99mm;
Δw: Fine processing allowance in Z-axis direction, with value scope for
-999,999.99-999,999.99mm;
F: Cutting feed speed, with value scope form 1 mm/min-6,000mm/min.
T: Tool and tool offset number;
K W
W D
i U/2
C U/2
A
B
(d-1) pieces from C to D
C到D段分为（d-1）份
segments

A’
1. In NS-NF, F and S functions in any program segment are invalid; F and S functions specified in G73
are valid.
2.Δi, Δk, Δu and Δw are specified by the addresses U and W; the difference method is whether to
specified P or Q.
3. In A-B, it is only allowed to use G00 or G01 for specifying in program segment of the sequence
number NS.
4. In G73, NS-NF program segment cannot invoke subprogram.
5. Circulation processing is implemented according to NS-NF program segment; upon programming,
please pay attention to symbols of Δu, Δw, Δi and Δk. After circulation, tool will return to A point.
6. If any one of Δi and Δk in the program is 0, it is required to write down U0 or W0 in the program or set
the data parameters as P466 and P467. If not, it may be affected by setting value of the last G73
program.
7. There should be 100 program segment s at most in the sequence numbers NS-NF; the system will
give alarm ERR0460 when number of program segments is beyond 100.
For example, write component processing program in the Fig. 4-5-5-2 through the cutting circulation
code G73
89
X
(200, 10)
起点
Starting point 2.5
2.5
1
Z
Ø100 Ø80
Ø120
Ø140
Ø160
R10
10 40 10 20
Fig. 4-5-5-2 Diagram of G73Code Example
Program: (diameter specified; metric input; the minimum workblank is Ø86)

N008 G0 X260.0 Z50.0; (rapidly position to safety position)
N010 G98 M03 S300; (positive rotation of main axis, with speed for 300)
N011 G00 X200.0 Z10.0; (rapidly position to starting point)
N012 G73 U2.0 W2.0 R3; (retract tool by 4 mm towards X direction; retract tool by 2 mm
towards Z direction)
N013 G73 P014 Q020 U0.5 W0.5 F100;( reserve fine turning allowance respectively on
X-axis and Z-axis)
N014 G00 X80.0 W-10.0 S500;
N015 G01 W-20.0 F120;
N016 X100.0 W-10.0;
N017 W-30.0; Program segment for fine processing shape
N018 G02 X120 W-10.0 R10.0 F100;
N019 G01 X140.0;
N020 G01 X160.0 W-10.0;
N021 G0 X260.0 Z50.0; (move to safety position, for convenience of tool replacement)
N023 G00 X200.0 Z10.0; (return to G70 location rapidly)
N024 G70 P014 Q020; (fine processing)
N025 M5 S0 T0200; (stop main axis, change No. 2 tool and cancel tool offset)
N026 G0 X260.0 Z50.0; (return to starting point rapidly)
N027 M30; (program ends)
4.5.6 Fine processing circulation (G70)
Format: G70 P(NS) Q(NF);

Function: Upon executing this instruction, tool will be provided with fine processing along workpiece
fine processing path given by NS-NF program segment from starting position.
G70 code can be used for fine turning after rough machining for G71, G72 and G73.
Instructions: NS: Sequence number of the first program segment for fine processing shape program
segment cluster.
NF: Sequence number of the last program segment for fine processing shape program
segment cluster.
G70 code path depends on programming path of NS~NF program segment. Relative
90
position relationship of NS and NF in G70-G73 program segment is as follows:

........
........
G71/G72/G73 P(NS) Q(NF) U(Δu) W(Δw) F S T;
N(NS) . . . . . .
........
·F
·S
·T
·
·
·
N(NF) . . . . . .
·
G70 P(NS) Q(NF);

·
1. In G71, G72 and G73, F, S and T functions specified by NS-NF program segment are invalid;
but upon executing G70, F, S and T specified by the sequence numbers NS-NF are valid.
2. Tool will return to starting point and the next program will be read when G70 circulation
processing ends.
3. NS-NF program segment in G70 cannot invoke subprogram.
For details, please see examples of the codes G71 and G72.
4.5.7 Axial grooving circulation (G74)
Format: G74 R(e);

G74 X(U) Z(W) P(Δi) Q(Δk) R(Δd) F;
Function: Upon executing this code, the system will decide tool movement path according to cutting end
point determined by the program segment (point determined by X-axis and Z-axis coordinate
values in program segment) and e, Δi, Δk and Δd values. In this circulation, appearance cutting
breaking can be treated; additionally, it will be deep hold drilling circulation if X(U) and P are omitted
and only Z-axis acts. The path is shown in Fig. 4-5-7-1.
Instructions: e: Retract amount after Δk cutting along Z direction for each time, with value scope for
0-99,999.999 mm; it is a modal code and will be valid until next specifying. In addition, the data
parameter P468 can also be set and parameter value can be changed according to instruction.
X: Absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B2 in X direction, with unit for mm;
U: Total movement amount of cutting end point B2 and cutting starting point A in X
direction, with unit for mm;
Z: Total movement amount of cutting end point B2 in Z direction of, with unit for mm;
W: Total movement amount of cutting end point B2 and starting A in Z direction, with unit
for mm;
Δi: Movement amount for every circulation in X direction (without symbol and radius
value), with unit for mm;
Δk: Movement amount for every cutting in Z direction (without symbol), with unit for mm;
Δd: Retract amount for cutting arriving at end point in X direction (radius value), with unit
for mm;
F: Cutting feed speed, with value scope 1mm/min-8000mm/min for feed per minute and
91
X A:轴向切削循环起点 C:径向退刀终点
A: Axial cutting circulation starting point C: R adial retract end point
B: Axial feed starting point
B:轴向进给终点 D: Axial cutting circulation end point
D:轴向切削循环终点
0＜Δ i’≤Δ i 快速移动
Rapid movement
Z W 0＜Δ K’≤Δ K Cutting feed
切削进给
B2 A2
Δ i' C2 D2
B1 A1
C1 D1 U/2 X/2
Δi
Δ K+e
Δ K’ ΔK
B A
Δd
e
C D
Fig. 4-5-7-1
1. Both e and Δd are specified by the address R; the difference is whether to specify Z(W) or not.
That is to say, it will be Δd if X(U) is specified; it will be e if X(U) is specified;
2. Circulation is performed in G74 program segment including Z(W) and Q( △k). Circulation will
not be implemented if only G74 R(e) program segment is executed.
For example, write component program in Fig. 4-5-7-2 through G74 code.
X
80
20
Ø60
Ø40
Ø20 Z
Fig. 4-5-7-2
Program:
O0001; (program name)
T0101; (tool width: 2mm)
M3 S500 G97; (start main axis and set speed as 500)
G0 X36 Z5; (position to processing starting point; X-axis has been added to tool
width)
G74 R1; (instruct retract amount of Z direction)
G74 X20 Z-20 P2 Q3.5 F50;( movement amount of X-axis for every circulation: 4mm;
movement amount of Z-axis for every circulation: 3.5mm)
92
G0 Z50; (Z direction retract)

X100; (X direction retract)
M5 S0; (stop main axis)
M30; (program ends)
4.5.8 Radial grooving circulation (G75)
Format: G75 R(e);

G75 X(U) Z(W) P(Δi) Q(Δk) R(Δd) F ;
Function: Upon executing this code, the system will decide tool movement path according to cutting end
point determined by the program segment (point determined by X-axis and Z-axis coordinate
values in program segment) and e, Δi, Δk and Δd values. It is similar to exchange X and Z in G74.
In this circulation, end face cutting breaking can be treated and outer diameter can be grooved and
cut (Z, W and Q omission). Path is shown in Fig. 4-5-8-1.

Instructions: e: Retract amount after Δk cutting along Z direction for each time, with value scope for
0-99,999.999 mm; it is a modal code and will be valid until next specifying. In addition, the data
parameter P468 can also be set and parameter value can be changed according to instruction.
X: Absolute coordinate value of cutting end point B2 in X direction, with unit for mm;
U: Total movement amount of cutting end point B2 and cutting starting point A in X direction,
with unit for mm;
Z: Total movement amount of cutting end point B2 in Z direction of, with unit for mm;
W: Total movement amount of cutting end point B2 and starting A in Z direction, with unit
for mm;
Δi: Movement amount for every circulation in X direction (without symbol and radius value),
with unit for mm;
Δk: Movement amount for every cutting in Z direction (without symbol), with unit for mm;
Δd: Retract amount for cutting arriving at end point in Z direction, with unit for mm;
F: Cutting feed speed
Both G7 and G75 can be used in cutting, grooving or hole processing; tool can be sued for automatic
retract.
X
Z W
Δ k' Δk Δd
A2 D2 A1 D1 A D
Δi
快速移动
Rapid movement
Cutting feed
切削进给
e
A:轴向切削循环起点
A: Axial cutting circulation starting point
Δ i+e
B: Axial feed end point

B:轴向进给终点
C: Radial retract end point
U/2 C:径向退刀终点
0＜Δ i’≤Δ i
0＜Δ K’≤Δ K
Δ i'
B2 C2 B1 C1 B C
X/2
Z
Fig. 4-5-8-1
93
1. Both e and Δd are specified by the address R; the difference is whether to specify X(U).
That is to say, it will be Δd if X(U) is specified; it will be e if X(U) is specified;
2. Circulation is performed in specified G75 code including X(U).
For example, write component program in Fig. 4-5-8-2 through G75 code.
20
X
Ø40
Z
Ø120 Ø120
50
80
Fig. 4-5-8-2 Diagram of G75Code Cutting Example

Program:
O0001; (program name)
T0101; (tool width: 4 mm)
M3 S500 G97; (start main axis and set speed as 500)
G0 X125 Z-24; (position to processing starting point; Z-axis has been added to tool
width)
G75 R1; (instruct retract amount of Z direction)
G75 X40 Z-50 P2 Q3.5 F50;( movement amount of X-axis for every circulation: 4mm;
movement amount of Z-axis for every circulation: 3.5mm)
G0 X150; (X direction retract)
Z50; (Z direction retract)
M5 S0; (stop main axis)
M30; (program ends)
4.5.9 Multiple thread cycles (G76)
Code format: G76 P (m) (r) (a) Q (△dmin) R (d);

G76 X (U) Z (W) R (i) P (k) Q (△d) F (I);
G76 X (U) Z (W) R (i) P (k) Q (△d) F (I);
Function: the system can have automatic calculation and implement multiple thread cutting
circulations and thread processing according to the data of instruction address. Code path
is as shown in Fig. 4-5-9-1.
Note: X, Z: Absolute value for thread end point (thread bottom); unit: mm;
U, W: Total travel of processing start point relative to thread end point; unit: mm;
m: Repeat time of final fine processing 1~99; this code is modal and effective before the
next setting. Besides, data parameter P471 is also settable; parameter can be
changed according to program instruction. The range for repeat times of final fine
processing is 1~99;
r: Chamfering amount of thread. If L is used as lead, it should use 0.1L as one gear within
94
scope of 0.1L~9.9L and it can be assigned by 2-digit figure of 00~99. This code is
modal and effective before the next setting. Besides, data parameter P473 is also
settable; parameter can be changed according to program instruction. The
chamfering amount of thread set in Program G76 is also effective in thread cutting
circulation of G92.
a: Angle of tool nose (optional angle of thread tooth includes 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°and
0°)
The original value of this angle can be assigned by 2-digit figure. This code is modal
and effective before the next setting. Besides, data parameter P472 is also settable;
parameter can be changed according to program instruction. Optional angle of tool
nose includes 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°and 0°
△dmin: Min. approach; unit: mm. If primary approach (△D× N -△D× N - 1 ) is lower
than △dmin, choose △dmin as primary approach. This code is modal and effective

before the next setting. Besides, data parameter P469 is also settable; parameter can
be changed according to program instruction. Setting range for the min. approach is
0~9999.9999; unit: 0.001mm;
d: Margin of fine processing; unit: mm. This code is modal and effective before the next
setting. Besides, data parameter P471 is also settable; parameter can be changed
according to program instruction. Setting range for margin of fine processing is
0~9999.999; unit: 0.001mm;
i: Radius difference of thread; unit: mm; i=0 means cutting of straight thread;
k: Height of thread (Radius should be used as distance at X-axis direction); unit: mm;
△d: The 1st cutting depth, radius; unit: mm.
F: Thread lead; unit: mm.
I: Threads per inch.
X-axisX轴
Z W
E
D
A
U/2
X/2
C
B
Z-axis Z轴
Fig. 4-5-9-1
For details about approach, please see Fig. 4-5-9-2 below:
95
Tool nose
The 1st nose
The 2st nose

The 3st nose
The Nst nose
Fig. 4-5-9-2
1. Distinction should be made using data assigned by P, Q and R and whether there‘s address X
(U) and Z (W).
2. Circulation action should be implemented by Code G76 assigned by Address X (U), Z (W).
3. Load on tool nose should be reduced if single-side blade is used for processing in circular
processing.
4. The approach should be △d in the first time or △D× N in the time N; the amount of each
cutting is fixed.
5. Four processing graphics are available, or internal threads can be processed giving
consideration to the symbol of each address. Feed speed of Instruction F is used only
between B and C in thread cutting shown in Fig. 4-5-8-1; while rapid feed is used by others.
In circulation, the increment symbol should be determined by the following methods:
U: determined by Path A to the Direction C;
W: determined by Path C to the Direction D;
R (I): determined by Path A to the Direction C;
P (K): positive;
Q (△D): positive
6. Notice for thread cutting is the same with G32 thread cutting.
7. Assigned chamfering amount of thread is also effective to G92 thread cutting cycle.
8. Address p should be used for designating m, r and a.
For example, thread cutting compound cycle Code G76 is used for programming the program shown
in Fig. 4-5-9-3; processing thread is M68×6.
96
Enlarged drawing of cutting point
Fig. 4-5-9-3

Program is as follows:
G00 X100 Z50; (Positioned to safe position)
M03 S300; (Start spindle, designate revolving speed)

G00 X80 Z10; (Quickly positioned to processing start point)
G76 P011060 Q0.1 R0.2; (Implement thread cutting)

G76 X60.64 Z-62 P3.68 Q1.8 F6.0;
G00 X100 Z50; (Returning to program start point)
M5 S0; (Stop spindle)
M30; (Program completed)
4.5.10 Notice for compound and fixed loop code
1. Necessary parameters, such as P, Q, X, Z, U, W and R, should be assigned in the program

segment of compound and fixed circulation. Instructions in each program segment must be
correct.
2. If sequence number is assigned by P in program segment of Code G71, G72 and G73, G00 or G01
in Code G of Group 01 must be assigned by program segment which corresponds to this
sequence number; otherwise, the system will give out P/S alarm.
3. It is not allowed to execute Code G70, G71, G72, G73, G74, G75 and G76 in MDI mode, even if
they are assigned.
4. Program segment G70, G71, G72 and G73, of which sequence number is assigned by P and Q,
should be free from the following instructions:
★ Codes of Group 01 except for Code G00, G01, G02 and G03;
★ M98/M99;
★ Code G04, which is effective in the final forming cutting in rough processing and in fine
processing
5. The executed compound fixed circulation (G70~G76) can be stopped to insert manual operation.
97
6. While Code G70, G71, G72 and G73 is being executed, the sequence number assigned P and Q
should have no coincidence in this program.
7. Notice for assigned G76 thread cutting is the same with G32 thread cutting and G92 thread cutting
circulation; the assigned chamfering amount of thread is also effective to G92 thread cutting
circulation.
4.6 Tool Compensation Function

The actual tool nose should be regarded as an arc instead of point. The error between actual result
and workpiece program, which is caused by tool nose arc, can be eliminated by tool radius
compensation of tool compensation function.
Tool path of tool-free compensation

Workpiece
Tool path of tool compensation
Tool nose
Error
Tool path of radius compensation without tool nose
Fig. 4-6-1
4.6.1 Basic concept for tool compensation function C
4.6.1.1 Concept of assumed tool nose
Tool nose Point A in Fig. 4-6-1-1-1 below doesn‘t exist and so it is called assumed tool nose (or ideal
tool nose). The tool nose is assumed since it is difficult to set radius center of tool nose at start
position, but easy to set assumed tool nose at start position, as shown in figure below. The same with
tool nose center, it is not needed to consider radius of tool nose if implementing programming using
assumed tool nose.
起点
Start point
起点
Start point
用刀尖中心编程时
Programming via tool nose center 用假想刀尖编程时
Programming via assumed tool nose center
Fig. 4-6-1-1-1 Tool Nose Radius Center and Assumed Tool Nose
Note: A standard point, such as tool rest center, can be used as start point for machine tool which has zero point. The distance
from this standard point to tool nose radius center or assumed tool nose should be set as tool offset value.
The distance from standard point to tool nose radius center should be set as offset value, as if
98
setting tool radius center as start point; the distance from standard point to tool nose should be set
as offset value, as if setting assumed tool nose as start point. To set offset value of tool, it can be
easier to measure the distance from standard point to assumed tool nose than distance from
standard point to tool nose radius center; therefore, the distance from standard point to assumed
tool nose is generally used for setting tool offset value.
If tool nose center is used as start point, tool offset value is as shown in Fig. 4-6-1-1-2:
O FX O FX
X 轴的刀具补偿 X 轴的刀具 at
Tool compensation 补偿X
Tool axis
compensation at
X axis

O FZ O FZ
Z 轴compensation
Tool 的刀具补偿 at Z axis Z 轴的刀具补at偿Z axis
Tool compensation
Setting distance from standard point to tool Setting
设定从标准点至刀尖中心的距离为补偿量设定从distance
标准点至 from
假想standard
刀尖的point
距离to为assumed
补偿量
nose center as compensation amount tool nose as compensation amount
Set start 起点放on

point 在tool
刀尖nose
中心上 center 起point
Set start 点放在 on假assumed
想刀尖中tool
心上nose center
Fig. 4-6-1-1-2 Setting of Tool Offset Value if Taking Tool Center as Standard Point
Tool path programmed using tool nose center and assumed tool nose is respectively shown in Fig.
4-6-1-1-3 and 4-6-1-1- 4. The left and right figure respectively shows the offset value with and without
tool nose radius compensation.
If tool nose radius compensation is used, the tool nose center path will realize precise cutting and be
the same with programming path.
Compensation
Tool nose center path starts
Tool nose center path
Program
Program path path
Fig. 4-6-1-1-3 Tool Path if Programming via Tool Nose Center

If tool head radius compensation is used, tool nose path will realize precise cutting and be the same
with programming path.
Assumed tool nose path
Assumed
Compensation
tool nose starts
path
Program path Program path
Fig. 4-6-1-1-4 Tool Path if Programming via Assumed Tool Nose
99
4.6.1.2 Direction of assumed tool nose
The tool and workpiece may stay at different positions in actual processing as needed by the
processing of workpiece. The direction of assumed tool nose observed from tool nose center should
be determined by the direction of cutting tool.
Position relationship between assumed tool nose and tool nose arc center is defined by assumed tool
nose number. The assumed tool nose number contains a total of 10 (0~9) settings to represent the
position relationship of 9 directions. Assumed tool nose number must be, before implementation of
tool nose radius compensation, inputted to tool nose radius compensation together with
compensation amount. The direction of assumed tool nose can be selected according to number of
eight specifications shown in figures below. In these figures, relationship between tool and start point
is introduced, and assumed tool nose is taken as arrow end point.
100
X轴
X axis
Z axis
Z轴
后刀
Rear tool 座坐coordinates
apron 标系

Assumed
假tool
想刀 nose
尖号number
码为 1is 1 Assumed
假想刀tool
尖 nose
号码 number
为 2 is 2
Assumed tool nose number is 3

假想刀尖号码为3 Assumed tool nose number is 4
假想刀尖号码为4
Assumed tool nose number is 5 假想刀尖号码为6
Assumed tool nose number is 7 假想刀尖号码为8
Fig. 4-6-1-2-1 Assumed Tool Nose Number in Rear Tool Apron Coordinates
101
Z axis
Z轴
前刀座坐标系
Front tool apron coordinates X axis
X轴
Fig. 4-6-1-2-2 Assumed Tool Nose Number in Front Tool Apron Coordinates
102
If tool nose center is consistent with start point, tool nose number should be set as 0 or 9. It is needed
to set assumed tool nose number of all tools using Address T according to corresponding tool
compensation number.
Fig. 4-6-1-2-3 Tool Nose is Consistent with Start Point
4.6.1.3 Setting of compensation value

Tool 刀尖半径补偿值
nose radius compensation value
Fig. 4-6-1-3-1 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Value

It is needed to, before setting tool nose radius compensation, set the following compensation values:
X, Z, R and T; in which, X and Z refer to the tool offset value from tool rest center to tool center at
direction of Axis X and Z respectively; R refers to the radius compensation value of assumed tool
nose; T refers to assumed tool nose number. Each group of values corresponds to one tool
compensation value and they should be set in tool compensation interface. For details, please refer
to Revision and Setting of Tool Compensation Value.
Details are shown in Table 4-6-1-3-1 below:
Table 4-6-1-3-1 Display Page for Tool Nose Radius Compensation Value of System
S/N X Z R T
001 0.020 0.030 0.020 2
002 0.060 0.060 0.016 3
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. ..
015 0.030 0.026 0.18 9
064 0.050 0.038 0.20 1
103
4.6.1.4 Relative position of tool and workpiece
Relative position between tool and workpiece must be assigned before implementing tool nose radius
compensation. In rear tool apron coordinate system, it is called right tool compensation if tool center
path stays at the right side of programming path (part path) and it should be realized by Code G42; or
it is called left compensation if tool center path stays at the left side of programming path (part path)
and it should be realized by Code G41; it is contrary to the front door apron. If Code G40, G41 and
G42 are assigned, the detailed introduction to relative position of tool and workpiece is shown in
Table 4-6-1-4-1:
Table 4-6-1-4-1
Instru Remarks
Introduction
ction
G40 Cancel tool nose radius compensation
Left compensation to tool nose radius in rear tool apron

G41 coordination system; right compensation of tool nose For details, please
radius in front tool apron coordination system; see Fig. 4-6-1-4-1
Right compensation to tool nose radius in rear tool and Fig. 4-6-1-4-2
G42 apron coordination system; left compensation of tool
nose radius in front tool apron coordination system;
Z
刀具
Tool
G42:沿着刀具运
G42: tool stays at G41:G41:沿着刀具运
tool stays at
right side of left side of
动方向看，刀具
workpiece if 动方向看，刀具
workpiece if
在工件的右侧
observed from tool 在工件的左侧
observed from tool
movement direction movement direction
工件
Workpiece
轴axis
XX X轴
X axis
G 42 G 41
G42
G 42 G41 G 41
ZZ轴
axis
ZZ轴axis
G 42 G42 G41
G41
G42 G 41
Fig. 4-6-1-4-1 Tool Nose Radius Compensation in Rear Tool Apron Coordination System
104
Z
X
刀具
Tool
G42: tool stays at left
G41: tool stays at side of workpiece if
G41:沿着刀具运
right side of G42:沿着刀具运
observed from tool
workpiece if
动方向看，刀具动方向看，刀具
movement direction
observed from tool
在工件的右侧
movement direction 在工件的左侧
工件
Workpiece
G41 G42
G41
G41 G42 G42

Z轴 Z轴
Z axis Z axis
G41 G41 G42
G42
G41 G42
XX
轴axis
X axis
X轴
Fig. 4-6-1-4-2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation in Front Tool Apron Coordination System
4.6.1.5 Inner and outer side
If front and rear programming paths have different turning corners in tool nose radius compensation,
the tool nose compensation path will become different. Therefore, it is called ―Inner side‖ if included
angle of intersection point between two moving program segments stays at workpiece is equal to or
larger than 180°, or called ―Outer side‖ if angle is 0~180°.
Workpiece side
Inner α
side
Program path
α ≥180°
Program path
Outer
side
α
Workpiece side
0°≤α ＜180°
Fig. 4-6-1-5-1 Inner Side and Outer Side
105
4.6.1.6 Code format of G41, G42 and G40
Code format:
Note 1: G40, G41 and G42 are modal Code G.

Note 2: if tool compensation is established normally, G41/G42 can be followed by Code G02 or G03.
4.6.2 Details of tool compensation
4.6.2.1 Decomposition to detailed path of tool nose radius compensation

Generally, tool radius compensation is realized by 3 steps: tool compensation establishment, tool
compensation implementation and tool compensation cancellation.
1. Tool compensation establishment
It is called tool compensation establishment if offset cancelation mode is switched to offset
mode.
Detailed tool compensation establishment is shown in Fig. 4-6-2-1-1 below:
(a) Move along with inner side of corner (α≥180°)
（(i) 直线—
i）Straight 直–线straight line (ii) Straight line – arc
line （ ii）直线—圆弧
α
α
程序路path
Program 径
r r::补偿量
compensation amount
r
G 42
S L G 42
C
L Meaning
在以下图 of S.L and
中 S.L及 C 意C思in如the
下： S
following figures is as follows:
S:单段停止点
S: stop point of single segment L
:直线 line
L: Lstraight 刀具center
Tool 中心path
路径程序路path
Program 径
:圆弧
C:Carc
b) Move along with outer side of corner (obtuse angle) (180°>α≥90°)
Start (i) Straight line – straight line （ii）直线—圆弧

(ii) Straight line – arc
position
G42
α
L
Program path
r
L
S C
Intersection point Tool center path
Note: intersection point refers to the crossing 刀具中心路径

Tool center path 程序路径
Program
path
position of two continuous program segments
106
(c) Move along with outer side of corner (acute angle) (α<90°)
(i) Straight line – straight line (ii) Straight line – arc

（ii）直线-圆弧
（i）直线-直线
G42 G42
L r L r
α α
程序路径
Program path
S L Tool刀尖中心路径
nose center path L S C
Program path
Tool刀尖中心路径
nose center path 程序路径

(d) Move along with outer side of corner (acute angle less than 1°); straight line →
straight line. (α<1°)
S L
刀尖中心路径
Tool nose center path
L
r
Program path
G41 程序路径
Less than 1°
Fig. 4-6-2-1-1 Tool Compensation Establishment

Note 1: If no tool compensation number is assigned, or tool compensation number is zero when tool
compensation is establishment, program will give out alarm #036.
Note 2: It is needed to have execution through movement instruction G0 or G1 when tool compensation is
established; if instruction is arc, program will give out alarm #034.
2. Tool compensation implementation
The offset path from tool establishment to tool compensation cancellation is called tool compensation
implementation.
Detailed tool compensation is shown in Fig. 4-6-2-1-2 and 4-6-2-1-3 below:
107
(i) Straight
直线 line
直线 → straight line 直线 line →
Straight 圆弧arc
α
α
编程路 path
Program 径
G 42 G42
S L 刀具center
中心path
路径 S C
Tool Intersection
交点
Intersection point point
L Tool center path
Program path
L
圆弧
Arc 直线
→ straight line Arc
圆弧 → arc 圆弧
α
α
G42 G42
Program path
S
C
S L Tool center path C Intersection
Intersection point point Program path
C Tool center path
（Ⅴ）小于1度内侧加工及补偿向量放大
(V) Inner side processing and enlarged compensation amount for
angle < 1°
（i）直线
(i) Straight line →直线
straight line
Tool nose center

刀尖中心路径
path
r G42
Compensation
补偿向量
vector
程序路径
Program
r
path
The following cases should be considered

以同一方法考虑下列情况
using the same method:
（ii）圆弧
(ii) Arc → Straight直线line
(iii) Straight line →圆弧
（iii）直线 Arc
(iv) Arc → Arc
（iv）圆弧圆弧
(b) Move along with exterior side of corner (obtuse angle) (180°>α≥90°)
108
Straight line → straight line

（(i)i）直线 -- 直线 (ii) Straight line → arc
（ ii）直线 -- 圆弧
G 42 G 42
a a
Program path
程序路径
L L r
r
S 刀尖nose
中心路center
径 L S
L Tool
path C
程序路path
Program 径
Tool刀 nose
尖中心路径
center
path
–弧

（(iii)
iii）Arc圆 straight
-- line
直线 (iv) Arc -- arc
G42
G 42
a
a C r
Program path
C 程序路径
r
r L
Program path
r L S C
L 刀Tool
尖中center
心路 path
径 Tool nose center path
S L
(c) Move along with outer side of corner (obtuse angle) (α<90°)
(ii) Straight line → arc

（ii）直线-圆弧
（ (i) 直线 -直
i）Straight line线→ straight line
L
L
S G42
S G 42
L
a
L
a Program path
程序路径
L r
(iv) Arc -- arc

r L S C
L Tool nose center Program path
程序路径
刀尖中心路径
刀尖 nose
Tool 中心路center
径 path
path
S L
109
(iii) Arc – straight line

（ iii）圆弧 -- 直线（ iv）圆弧center
Tool nose 圆弧
-- path
C C
G 42 G 42
r Program path r
a 程序路径 a
L L
s L L s
Tool刀 nose
尖中 center
心路径 C
path 程Program
序路径
path
刀尖中
Tool 心路center
nose 径
path
Fig. 4-6-2-1-2 Tool Compensation Implementation
(d) Special case
1）没有交叉点时
1) No intersection point
Alarm报警且停止
and stop
在左图，当刀具半径值小
As shown in the left figure, arc
compensation path may have
G41 时，圆弧的补偿路径有交
intersection point if tool radius is low, but
Center
圆弧 B 的中心of Arc B have no intersection point if radius is
当补偿量大时
If compensation amount is too high
点，但是当半径变大，可能
enlarged and it may give out alarm
(P/S33).
If compensation 圆弧
CenterAof的中心
Arc A 交点不存在。系统产生报警
当补偿量小时
amount is too low
（P/S33）。
程序路径
Program path
ｒｒ
P
A B
Arc圆
2)2) 弧中is心
center 与起点with
consistent 或 start
终点or一致point
end
刀具path
Tool 路径
If tool radius is too high, it may lead to coincidence
between arc当start/stop
刀具半point径过and大时，导
circle 致圆and
center, 弧 the
起
点或out终alarm
system will give 点位(P/S38)
置与圆心重合。系统
G 41 Program is as follows:
G01 W20; 产生报警（ P/S38）
G02 U30 W15 程序如下：
R15;
程序路径
Program path G01 W20;
G 01 W 20;
G 02 U 30 W 15 R 15;
G 01 W 20;
Fig. 4-6-2-1-3 Tool Compensation Implementation ②
3. Tool Compensation Cancellation
If any of the following condition is satisfied by program in compensation mode, the system will enter
110
compensation cancellation mode, and the action in this program segment is called tool compensation
cancellation.
(a) Tool compensation is cancelled using Code G40; it is not allowed to use arc code (G02 and
G03) while executing tool compensation cancellation. If arc is assigned, it will give out
alarm (N0.34) and stop tool.
(b) Tool radius compensation number is assigned as 0.
Details about tool compensation cancellation are as shown in figures below:
111
(i) （i）直线—直线
Straight line → straight line （i）圆弧—直线
(i) Arc → straight line
α
α
G42
程序路径
Program path r G40
G42
r
r: :补偿量compensation
C S
vector G40
刀具中心路径
Tool center path
L
S Program
程序路径path Tool center path
刀具中心路径
L
L
(b) Move along with outer side of corner (obtuse angle) (180°>α≥90°)
(i)（i）直线—直线
Straight line → straight line (i)（i）圆弧—直线
Arc → straight line
G40
G40 α
L
α
G42 r
G42
程序路径
Program path L S
C
r
L
Program path 刀具中心路径
Tool center path
S 程序路径
刀具中心路径
Tool center path
(c) Move along with outer side of corner (acute angle) (α<90°)
(i)（i）直线—直线
Straight line → straight line (i)（i）圆弧—直线
Arc → straight line
L
L
G40 S S
r L G40
α r
G42
程序路径
Program path α
L
L
刀具中心路径
Tool center path L G42
C
L
程序路径
Tool nose center
path
112
(d) Move along with outer side of corner (acute angle less than 1°); straight line →
straight line (α<1°)
L
S 刀具中心路径
Tool center path
L
程序路径
Program path
r
G42
αα less
小于度
1 1°
than
G40
Fig. 4-6-2-1-4 Tool Compensation Cancellation
113
4.6.2.2 Change tool compensation direction in tool compensation implementation
Compensation direction is determined by tool radius compensation Code G (G41and G42). The
symbol of compensation amount is as follows:
Table 4-6-2-2-1
Compensati
on Amount Symbol
+ -
Code G
G41 Left compensation Right compensation
G42 Right compensation Left compensation
Compensation direction is changeable in compensation mode of special cases, but unchangeable at

initial program segment. There‘s no distinction for inner and outer side in all conditions while
compensation direction is changed. The following compensation amounts are assumed to be
positive.
（i）直线→直线
(i) Straight line → straight line （ii）直线→圆弧
(ii) Straight line → arc
S
L C
G42
ｒ
ｒ程序路径
Program path ｒ G41
G41
Program path
程序路径 L ｒ G42
L 刀具中心路径
Tool center path S
刀具中心路径
Tool center path
（iii）圆弧→直线 (iv) Arc → arc

（iv）圆弧→圆弧
(iii) Arc → straight line 刀具中心路径
Tool center path
G42 Tool center path
刀具中心路径
G42
ｒ L C
G41 ｒ
ｒ
C ｒ
C 程序路径
Program path
程序路径
Program path G41
S
S
Fig. 4-6-2-2-1 Compensation Direction Change in Tool Compensation Implementation
If there‘s no intersection point and offset direction from Program Segment A to B is changed by Code
G41 and G42 during normal implementation of compensation, the start point in Program Segment B
should be prepared into vector which is vertical to Program Segment B if there‘s no need for offset of
path intersection.
114
i) Straight line ----- straight line
S L
Single单节
segment
A (A) Single单节
segment
B (B)
（G42）（G42）（G41）
程序路径
Program path
L 补偿向量
Compensation
刀具中心路径
Tool center path
vector
L S
Single
单节segment
A (A)
（G42）
Program path
程序路径

Single
单节 segment
B (B)
（G41）
刀具中心路径
Tool center path
L S
Fig. 4-6-2-2-2 Straight Line – Straight Line
ii) Straight line ----- arc
Tool center path

(G41) (G42)
刀具中心路径程序段A
Program segment 程序段B
(A) Program segment
(B)
(G41)
程序路径
Program path
补偿向量
Compensation C
vector
Fig. 4-6-2-2-3 Straight Line - Arc, No Intersection Point (Change Compensation Direction)
iii) Arc ----- arc
D2 G42
S C
刀尖中心路径
Tool nose center
path
C
D1
G41
程序路径
Program path
补偿向量
Compensation
vector
Fig. 4-6-2-2-4 Arc - Arc, No Intersection Point (Change Compensation Direction)
115
4.6.2.3 Temporary cancellation of tool compensation
If the following instructions are assigned in compensation mode, the compensation vector will be
temporarily cancelled and followed by automatic recovery.
In such case, the tool will directly move to the instruction point where compensation vector is
cancelled from the intersection point, which is different from the compensation cancellation mode. If
compensation mode is recovered, the tool will be directly moved to the intersection point.
G90, G92, G94 fixed circulation, G71~G76 fixed circulation.
r
N8
s
s r
N6 刀尖中心路径
Tool nose center
path
N7 N5
程序路径
Program path
Fig. 4-6-2-3-1 Temporary Cancellation of Tool Compensation ②
N1 T0101
N2 G0 X100 Z100
N3 G0 X0 Z0
N4 G42 G90 X-20 W-50 F500 (Tool compensation is cancelled temporarily here)
N5 G0 X50 Z50 (Tool compensation recovered)
N6 G0 X100 Z100
N7 M30
4.6.2.4 Non movement instruction contained in tool compensation
1. Non movement instrument is available at beginning of compensation

No compensation vector will be generated if tool is not moved according to instruction at beginning of
compensation.
N7
SS N1 T0101;
N2 G0 X0 Z0;
S N3 G01 U-30 W20 F500;
刀具中心路径
Tool center path N4 G42 U0;
N6 N8 r N5 U30;
N6 U20 W20;
程序路径
Program path N7 G40 G0 X100 Z100;
N9 N8 M30;
Fig. 4-6-2-4-1 Non Movement Instruction Available at Beginning of Tool Compensation
2. Non movement instruction available at compensation mode

If only one program segment without tool movement is assigned in compensation mode, the vector
and tool center path should be the same with the case that this program segment is not assigned.
(For details, please refer to tool compensation in Article 4.6.2.1) This program segment without tool
movement should be executed at the stop point of single program segment.
116
N7 N8
N3 T0101;
SS N4 G0 X100 Z100;
N6 N5 G41 G01 X0 Z0;
N6 U-30 W20;
程序段N7在这
Program segment
里执行
N7 is executed
N7 G04 X5;
here N8 W30;
N9 G40 G0 X100 Z100;
N10 M30;
程序路径
Tool center path
Fig. 4-6-2-4-2 Non Movement Instruction Available at Tool Compensation
3. Non movement instruction available at compensation cancellation

If there's no tool movement in the program segment assigned together with compensation
cancellation, it will form a vector which has the length of compensation amount and direction vertical

to the movement direction of previous program segment. This vector will be cancelled in the next
movement instruction.
N7 N8
r N3 T0101;
SS N4 G0 X100 Z100;
N6 N5 G41 G01 X0 Z0 F500;
N6 U-30 W20;
N7 G04;
程序路径 N8 G0 X100 Z100;
Tool center path
N9 M30;
Fig. 4-6-2-4-3 Non Movement Instruction Available at Tool Compensation
4.6.2.5 Check of tool compensation interference
The excessive cutting of tool is called "Interference". Check of tool compensation interface, which can
be used for checking the potential excessive cutting of tool, should be implemented even if excessive
cutting is not occurred.
(a) Basic conditions for interface
(1) The path between tool and program is different. (The included angle between paths is
90°-270°).
(2) In arc processing, the included angle between start and end point of tool and program
has great differences (above 180°), except for the conditions.
Case ①
程序路径
Tool center path
Difference between two

path 两个路径方向差
directions is large
(180°异很大（180°
) ）
Fig. 4-6-2-5-1 Tool Interference ①
117
刀具中心路径
Tool center path
Program path
程序路径
Difference
两个路径方向差 between two
path异很大（180°
directions is ）
large
(180°)
Fig. 4-6-2-5-2 Tool Compensation Interference ②

(b) Interference case
(1) The depth is lower than compensation amount.
刀尖中心路径
Tool nose center 停止
Stop
path
程序路径
Program path
A C
B
Fig. 4-6-2-5-3 Tool Compensation Interference Case ①
N1 T0101; (R<=10)
N2 G0 X0 Z30;
N3 G42 G01 X50 Z0 F500;
N4 U50;
N5 W20;
N6 U10;
N7 W20;
N8 U-10;
N9 W20;
N10 G40 G0 X0 Z30;
N11 M30;
In the aforementioned programs, the tool nose radius compensation value of No. 01 tool is
R<=10, and tool compensation is implemented normally; if R>10, the system will give out
interference alarm, since the direction of Program C in program segment is opposite to the path
of tool radius compensation.
(2) Concave depth is lower than compensation amount
118
刀尖中心路径
Tool nose center
程序路径
Program path path
A B C
Fig. 4-6-2-5-4 Tool Compensation Interference Case ②
N1 T0101; (R<=25)

N2 G0 X0 Z30;
N3 G42 G01 X50 Z0 F500;
N4 U50;
N5 W20;
N6 U10 W10;
N7 U-10 W10;
N8 W20;
N9 G40 G0 X0 Z30;
N10 M30;
In the aforementioned programs, the tool nose radius compensation value of No. 01 tool is
R<=25, and tool compensation is implemented normally; if R>25, the system will give out
interference alarm, since the direction of Program C in program segment is opposite to the path
of tool radius compensation.
4.6.2.6 Tool nose radius compensation in Code G90/G94
As for circular paths, the tool nose center path is in parallel to the program path in general.
For both of Mode G41 and G42, the offset direction is as shown in figure below.
Fig. 4-6-2-6-1 G90/G94 Tool Nose Radius Compensation
119
4.6.2.7 Tool nose radius compensation in Code G70
Tool nose radius compensation can be realized in fine processing circulation (G70). Tool center
path will have automatic offset of one compensation value along with fine processing path. If G70
tool nose radius compensation is realized, G70 can be executed together with G41/G42 in the
same segment, or G41/G42 can be assigned in fine processing circulation segment.
4.6.3 Notice for tool compensation C
1. If 30 or more progress segments without movement instructions are continuously assigned in

compensation process, it will give out an alarm. For example:
N1 M05;................................................ Code M output

N2 S21;................................................. Code S output
N3 G04 X10;....................................….. Pause
……
N29 G01 U;.............................................Zero movement distance
N30 G9;...................................................Only Code G available.
2. If program segment is executed in input mode (MDI), tool nose radius compensation is
available.
3. The system will immediately enter cancellation mode after startup or in execution of M30. The
program must be ended in cancellation mode; otherwise, the tool may fail to be positioned at
end point, but say at the position which equals to the length of a vector from end point.
4. Tool nose radius compensation can be established or cancelled through Code G00 or G01 only,
instead of arc code (G02 or G03). The system will give out alarm if it is assigned.
5. If compensation amount is negative, G41 and G42 will have mutual exchange on program. If
tool center moves along with exterior side of workpiece, the tool will move along with the inner,
and vice versa, since the tool nose offset direction will be changed along with the variation of
compensation amount symbol, but the assumed tool nose direction maintains unchanged.
Therefore, it should not be changed without permission.
6. Generally, compensation amount should be changed when cancelling mode or switching tool.
New compensation amount is not effective, unless the tool offset is executed again.
7. If tool compensation program is being executed, Code G will be maintained to be G41 or G42
as before if there's error or alarm; in such case, tool compensation state C can be directly
cancelled by pressing rest button.
120
4.6.4 Example of tool compensation processing C
Example of tool compensation processing C ①:
The spare parts shown in Fig. 4-6-4-1 below should be processed. The size of spare parts is shown
in figure; tool nose radius R=1 and it is the first tool.

Fig. 4-6-4-1 Example of Tool Compensation C ①
O0001;
N010 G0 X100.0 Z100.0; (Positioned to safe position)
N020 M3 S300; (Spindle rotates anticlockwise, revolving speed: 300r/min)
N030 M8; (Cooling activated)
N040 T0101; (Switched to No. 1 tool for compensation)
N050 G00 X10.0 Z10.0; (Quick positioning and close to workpiece)
N060 G42 G1 Z0 F80; (Start execution of tool nose radius compensation)
N070 G3 X30 Z-10 R10;
N080 G1 Z-17.639;
N090 G2 X32.111 Z-22.111 R10;
N100 G1 X33.803 Z-23.803;
N110 G3 X35.914 Z-28.275 R14;
N120 G1 Z-35;
N130 X50;
N140 G40 G0 X80 Z80; (Cancel tool nose radius compensation)
N150 M09; (Cooling deactivated)
N160 G00 X100.0 Z100.0 T0200; (Quick return to safe position, switch to basic tool and
reset tool offset)
N170 M30; (Program complete)
Example of tool compensation C ②:
The spare parts shown in Fig. 4-6-4- 2 below should be processed. The size of spare parts is
shown in figure; tool nose radius R=1 and it is the first tool.
121
Fig. 4-6-4-2 Example of Tool Compensation C ②

O0002
NI G0 X100 Z100;
N2 M3 S800;
N3 M8;
N4 T0202;
N5 G0 X70 Z10;
N6 G71 U3 R1;
N7 G71 P8 Q14 U0 W0 F120;
N8 G0 X10;
N9 G1 Z-10 F80;
N10 G02 X30 W-10 R10;
N11 G1 X38;
N12 Z-30;
N13 G02 X48 W-5 R5;
N14 G1 X60;
N15 G0 X100 Z80;
N16 M3 S300;
N17 T0101;
N18 G0 X70 Z10;
N19 G42 G70 P8 Q14; (Tool nose radius compensation is jointly executed by G42 and G70
in the same segment)
N20 G40 G0 X80 Z50; (Cancel tool nose radus compensation)
N21 G0 X100 Z100 T0200;
N22 M30;
Example of tool compensation C ③:
The spare parts shown in Fig. 4-6-4-3 below should be processed. The size of spare parts is shown
in figure; tool nose radius R=1 and it is the first tool.
122
Fig. 4-6-4-3 Tool Compensation C Case ③

O0003
N1 G0 X100 Z100;
N2 M3 S800;
N3 M8;
N4 T0101;
N5 G42 G0 X70 Z10; (Start execution of tool nose radius compensation)
N6 G90 X45 Z-30 R-5 F80;
N7 G40 G0 X80 Z80; (Cancel tool nose radus compensation)
N8 G0 X100 Z100 T0100;
N9 M30;
4.7 Code G of Macro Function

4.7.1 User's macro program
Certain functions, which are realized by one group of codes, are pre-saved in memory and these
functions are represented by one code. These functions can be automatically realized if the user
writes out the representative codes. Such group code is called user's macro program body and
representative code is called "User's macro program". The user's macro program body and user's
macro program are respectively called macro program or macro program call code for short.
Body of user‘s
用户宏程序本体
macroprogram
主程序
Main program
Complete one group
macroprogram 完成某功能
of instructions of
用户宏程序命令
User‘s certain functions
instruction 的一组指令
Fig. 4-7-1-1
123
Variables can be used in user's macro program body. Variables can be calculated and be given
variable assignment by macro program.
4.7.2 Macro variables
General CNC instruction, or variables, can be used in user's macro program for calculation and
transfer of code.
User's macro program should be started from program number and ended by M99.
O0066; 程序号
Program number
G65 H01 ……；运算指令

Operation instruction
G90 G00 X#101 ……；使用变量的CNC指令

CNC instructions with
variables
……
……
……
G65 H82 ……；转移指令
Transfer instruction
……
……
M99; Body
用户宏程序本体结束 of user‘s
macroprogram is completed
Fig. 4-7-2-1 (Composition of User's Macro program Body)

1. Use Method of Variable
The parameter value in user's macro program body can be assigned by variable. Such variable can
be assigned by main program or set through LCD/MDI, or be assigned when user's macro program
body is executed.
Multiple variables can be used and distinguished by variable number:
(1) Expression of variable
Variable is expressed by variable number after # and format is as follows:
#i (i = 1, 2, 3, 4 ……)
(Example) #5, #109, #1005
(2) Quotation of variable
Value after reference value can be exchanged by variable.
(Example) F#103 if #103 = 15, it should be the same with F15 instruction.
G#130 if #130 = 3, it should be the same with G3.
Note: 1. Variable cannot be quoted by parameter word O and N (program and sequence number). O#100 and
N#120 should not be used for programming.
2. It should not be used if exceeding the maximum code specified by parameter code. If #30 = 120,
M#30 exceeds the maximum code.
3. Display and setting of variable: variable can be displayed on LCD picture, or set through MDI
method.
2. Type of Variable
Variables can be divided into null variable, partial variable, public variable and system variable
according to the difference of variables, and they are of difference applications and properties.
(1) Null variable #0; (this variable is null and cannot be assigned)
124
(2) Partial variable #1~#50: Partial variables can be used in macro program for data storage;
position parameter NO; it can be set as elimination after reset or emergency stop through
52#7. Partial variable is assigned by independent variable when macro program is called.
(3) Public variable #100~#199, #500~#999: position reference NO; it can be set as elimination
of public variable after reset or emergency stop through 52#6.
Public variable is common in main program and user's macro program called by main program,
that is to say, the variable #i used in user's macro program is the same with #i used in other
macro programs. Therefore, the public variable #1 in calculation result of certain macro
program can be used in other macro programs.
Application of public variable is not specified in system and can be freely used by user.
Table 4-7-2-1
Variable
Variable Number Function
Type

#100~#199 It is cleared after being powered off, and
Public reset to "Null" after being powered on
#500~#999 variable Data should be saved in file to prevent loss
even if it is powered off
(4) System variable: system variable is used for reading and writing the variations of data in CNC
running. It is as follows:
1) Interface input signal #1000 --- #1015 (Signal from PLC to system is read by digit, i.e.
Signal G)
#1032 (Signal from PLC to system is read by digit, i.e. Signal G)
2) Interface output signal #1100 --- #1115 (Signal outputted to PLC by digit, i.e. Signal F)
#1132 (Signal outputted to PLC by byte, i.e. Signal F)
3) Tool length compensation value #1500 --- #1799 (read-write supported)
4) Length wear compensation value #2000 --- #2299 (read-write supported)
5) Tool radius compensation value #1800 --- #1899 (read-write supported)
6) Radius wear compensation value #2300 --- #2399 (read-write supported)
7) Assumed tool nose #1900---#1999 (read-write supported)
8) Alarm #3000
9) User data sheet #3500 --- #3755 (read-only)
10) Modal information #4000 --- #4030 (read-only)
11) Position information #5001 --- #5030 (read-only)
12) Workpiece zero point offset #5201 --- #5235 (read-only)
13) Additional workpiece coordination system #7001 --- #7250 (read-write supported)
125
3. Detailed Introduction to System Variable

1) Modal information
Table 4-7-2-2
Variab Function Group No.

le No.
#4000 G04,G28,G31,G50,G65,G70,G71,G72,G73,G74,G75,G76 Group 00
#4001 G00,G01,G02,G03,G32,G34,G90,G92,G94 Group 01
#4002 G96,G97 Group 02
#4003 To be extended Group 03
#4005 G98, G99 Group 05
#4006 G20,G21 Group 06

#4007 G40,G41,G42 Group 07
#4014 G54,G55,G56,G57, G58,G59 Group 14
#4016 G17,G18,G19 Group 16
#4022 D
#4023 H
#4024 F
#4025 M
#4026 S
#4027 T
#4028 N
#4029 O
#4030 P (additional workpiece coordination system selected)
Note 1: Code P means additional workpiece coordination system selected.

Note 2: If G#4002 is executed, the value obtained from #4002 is 17, 18 or 19.
Note 3: Modal information is read-only.
126
2) Information of current position

Table 4-7-2-3
Read
Relevant Tool
Variable Operation
Position Information Coordination Compensation
No. in
Systems Value
Movement
#5001 X-axis program segment end
position (ABSIO)
Tool nose
#5002 Y-axis program segment end
position
position (ABSIO) Workpiece
(program
#5003 Z-axis program segment end coordination Available
instruction
position (ABSIO) system
position) not
#5004 The 4th axis program
considered

segment end position
(ABSIO)
position (ABSMT)
#5007 Y-axis program segment end Tool benchmark
position (ABSMT) Machine tool position
#5008 Z-axis program segment end coordination (machine tool
position (ABSMT) system coordinate)
The 4th axis program considered
#5009 segment end position
(ABSMT)
N/A
position (ABSOT) Tool benchmark
#5012 Y-axis program segment end position
position (ABSOT) (machine tool
#5013 Z-axis program segment end coordinate) not
position (ABSOT) considered
The 4th axis program
#5014 segment end position
Workpiece
(ABSOT)
coordination
system
position (ABSKP)
#5017 Y-axis program segment end
position (ABSKP)
#5018 Z-axis program segment end Available
position (ABSKP)
#5019 The 4th axis program
segment end position
(ABSKP)
#5021 X-axis tool length
compensation value
N/A
#5022 Y-axis tool length
compensation value
127
Read
Relevant Tool
Variable Operation
Position Information Coordination Compensation
No. in
Systems Value
Movement
#5023 Z-axis tool length
compensation value
#5024 The 4th axis tool length
compensation value
#5026 X-axis servo position
compensation
#5027 Y-axis servo position
compensation
#5028 Z-axis servo position
compensation
#5029 The 4th axis servo position
compensation
Note 1: ABSIO: end point coordination of previous program segment in workpiece coordination system.
Note 2: ABSMT: machine tool coordination system, position of present machine tool coordination system.
Note 3: ABSOT: workpiece coordination system, position of present coordination.
Note 4: ABSKP: workpiece coordination system, effective position of hopping signals in program segment G31.
128
3) Offset of workpiece zero point and additional zero point:

Table 4-7-2-4
Variable
Function
No.
#5201 External workpiece zero offset of the 1st axis
… …
#5204 External workpiece zero offset of the 4 th axis
#5206 Zero offset of workpiece G54 of the 1st axis
… …
#5209 Zero offset of workpiece G54 of the 4 th axis

… …
… …
… …
… …
… …
#7001 Zero offset of workpiece G54 P1 of the 1st axis
… …
#7004 Zero offset of workpiece G54 P1of the 4th axis
… …
#7009 Zero offset of workpiece G54 P2 of the 4th axis
… …
#7249 Zero offset of workpiece G54 P50 of the 4 th axis
4. Partial Variable
Corresponding relation between address and partial variable:
129
Table 4-7-2-5
Address of Address of
Partial Variable
Independent Independent Partial Variable No.
No.
Variable Variable
A #1 Q #17
B #2 R #18
C #3 S #19
I #4 T #20
J #5 U #21
K #6 V #22
D #7 W #23
E #8 X #24
F #9 Y #25
M #13 Z #26
Note 1: assignment can be made by adding figure after English letters. All English letters, except for G, L, O, N, H
and P can be used for assignment of independent variable; each letter can be used for one assignment
from A-B-C-D… to X-Y-Z; it is not needed to follow the sequence of letter for assignment; address without
assignment can be omitted.
Note 2: G65 must be assigned before using any independent variable.
5. Notice for User’s Macroprogram Body

Press Key # behind reference word G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S, T, P and Q to input the #
2) It can assign calculation and transfer code in MDI state.
3) H, P, Q and R of calculated and transferred code should be used as parameters as Instruction
G65 whether they are placed at front or rear side of G65.
H02 G65 P#100 Q#101 R#102: Correct

N100 G65 H01 P#100 Q10: Correct
4) Input range of variable should not exceed 15-digit significant figure, calculation result should
not exceed 9-digit integer and manual input range of variable should be 8-digit effective figure.
5) Calculation result of variable can be decimal with precision reaching 0.0001. Decimal points
should not be omitted, except for the calculation process of H11 (OR), H12 (AND), H13 (NOT)
and H23 (MOD).
For example:
#100 = 35, #101 = 10, #102 = 5
#110 = #100÷#101 (=3.5)
#111 = #110×#102 (=17.5)
#120 = #100×#102 (=175)
#121 = #120÷#101 (=17.5)
6) The time for executing calculation and transfer of code may change along with varying
conditions. Average value can be 10ms.
7) If variable value is undefined, it will become ―Null‖ variable. Variable #0 is null variable which is
read-only.
a. Quote
If an undefined variable is quoted, the address itself will be omitted.
130
For example:
If variable #1 is 0 and variable #2 is null, the execution result of G00X#1 Y#2 is G00X0;
b. Calculation
<Null> should be the same with 0 in other conditions, except for assignment via <Null>.
Table 4-7-2-6
If #1=<Null> If #1=0
#2=#1 #2=#1
↓ ↓
#2=<Null> #2=0
#2=#1*5 #2=#1*5
↓ ↓
#2=0 #2=0
#2=#1+#1 #2=#1+#1

↓ ↓
#2=0 #2=0
c. Conditional expression
<Null> in EQ and NE is different from 0.
Table 4-7-2-7
If #1=<Null> If #1=0
#1 EQ #0 #1 EQ #0
↓ ↓
True False
#1 NE #0 #1 NE #0
↓ ↓
True True
#1 GE #0 #1 GE #0
↓ ↓
True True
#1 GT #0 #1 GT #0
↓ ↓
False False
131
Fig. 4-7-2-2
Variable is null if it is blank.
4.7.3 Non-modal call of G65
If G65 is assigned, the user‘s macroprogram assigned by Address P is called the data are transferred
to user‘s macroprogram body through independent variable.
Format is as follows:
G65 P □□□□□L□□□□<Assignment of independent variable>;

Call times
Program number of called macroprogram body
It is needed to, behind G65, assign program number of user‘s macroprogram using Address P,
assign macroprogram call times using L and transfer data to macroprogram using independent
variables.
If repeat is needed, assign repeat times from 1 to 9999 behind Address L; the default repeat time is 1
is L is omitted.
If assignment is made using independent variable, the value will be assigned to corresponding partial
variable.
Note 1: the system may give out alarm (PS 078) if failing to search the subprogram number assigned by Address
P.
Note 2: subprogram numbered 90000~99999 is reserved program for the system; if such subprogram is called
by user, the system can execute their contents, but stay cursor at Code G65 segment and contents of
major programs are constantly displayed on program interface. (Position parameter N0: 27#4 can be
modified to display the contents of subprogram).
Note 3: a total of five layers can be nested in the call of macroprogram.
4.7.4 Function A of user’s macroprogram
1. General form:
G65 Hm P#i Q#j R#k;
m: 01~99 means the function of code calculation or transfer.
#i: variable name of stored calculation result.
132
#j: variable name 1 of calculation. It can be constant. Constant is directly expressed without #.
#k: variable name 2 of calculation. It can be constant.
Meaning: #i = #j ○ #k
└───────Calculation symbol, assigned by Hm
(Example) P#100 Q#101 R#102……#100 = #101 ○ #102;

P#100 Q#101 R15 ……#100 = #101 ○ 15;
P#100 Q-100 R#102……#100 = -100 ○ #102
Code H assigned by G65 has no influence on selection of offset.
Code G Code H Function Definition

G65 H01 Assignment
G65 H02 Add
G65 H03 Subtract
G65 H04 Multiply

G65 H05 Divide
G65 H11 Logic add (or)
G65 H12 Logic multiply (and)
G65 H13 Exclusive or
G65 H21 Square root
G65 H22 Absolute value
G65 H23 Take remainder
G65 H26 Compound multiplication
and calculation
G65 H27 Composite square root
G65 H31 Sine
G65 H32 Cosine
G65 H33 Tangent
G65 H34 Arc tangent
G65 H80 Unconditional transfer Direction N
G65 H81 Conditional transfer 1
G65 H89 Alarm
Fig. 4-7-4-1
2. Operation code:
1) Assignment of variable: # I = # J
G65 H01 P#I Q#J;
(Example) G65 H01 P#101 Q1005; (#101 = 1005)
G65 H01 P#101 Q#110; (#101 = #110)
G65 H01 P#101 Q-#102; (#101 = -#102)
2) Add operation: # I = # J+# K

G65 H02 P#I Q#J R#K;
(Example) G65 H02 P#101 Q#102 R15; (#101 = #102+15)
3) Subtract operation: # I = # J- #K
G65 H03 P#I Q#J R# K;
(Example) G65 H03 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102-#103)
4) Multiply operation: # I = # J×# K

133
(Example) G65 H04 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102×#103)
5) Division operatioin: # I = # J÷# K

(Example) G65 H05 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102÷#103)
6) Logic add (or): # I = # J.OR. # K

(Example) G65 H11 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.OR. #103)
7) Logic mulitply (and): # I = # J.AND. # K

(Example) G65 H12 P# 101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.AND.#103)
8) XOR: # I = # J.XOR. # K

(Example) G65 H13 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.XOR. #103)
9) Square root:
9）平方根：# I = #j
G65 H21 P#I Q#J；
（例）G65 H21 P#101 Q#102 ；
(Example) （#101= #102 ）
10) Absolute value: # I = | # J |

G65 H22 P#I Q#J;
(Example) G65 H22 P#101 Q#102; (#101 = | #102 |)
11) MOD: # I = # J-RUNC(#J/#K)×# K, TRUNC: Rounding decimal

(Example) G65 H23 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102- TRUNC (#102/#103)×#103)
12) Compound multiply operation: # I = (# I×# J)÷# K

G65 H26 P#I Q#J R# k;
(Example) G65 H26 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = (#101×# 102)÷#103)
13) Compound square root:

13）复合平方根：# I = #j2+#k2
G65 H27 P#I Q#J R#K；
（例）G65 H27 P#101 Q#102 R#103；
(Example) （#101 = #1022+#1032）
14) Sine: # I = # J•SIN (# K) (Unit: °)

(Example) G65 H31 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102•SIN (#103))
15) Cosine: # I = # J•COS (# K) (Unit: °)

G65 H32 P#I Q#J R# K;
(Example) G65 H32 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =#102•COS (#103))
16) Tangent: # I = # J•TAN (# K) (Unit: °)

G65 H33 P#I Q#J R# K;
(Example) G65 H33 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102•TAN (#103))
17) Arc tangent: # I = ATAN (# J /# K) (Unit: °)

G65 H34 P#I Q#J R# K;
134
(Example) G65 H34 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =ATAN (#102/#103))

Note 1: unit of angle variable is °.
Note 2: if necessary Q and R are not assigned in operation, they should be regarded as 0 in operation.
Note 3: trunc: rounding operation, rounding decimal.
3. Transfer Instruction
1) Unconditional transfer
G65 H80 Pn; n: sequence number
(Example) G65 H80 P120; (Transferred to Program Segment N120)
2) Conditional transfer 1 #J.EQ.# K (=)

G65 H81 Pn Q#J R# K; n: sequence number
(Example) G65 H81 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
If # 101 = #102, transfer to Program Segment N1000; if #101 ≠ #102, execute program by
sequence.

3) Conditional transfer 2 #J.NE.# K (≠)
(Example) G65 H82 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
If # 101 ≠ #102, transfer to Program Segment N1000; if # 101 = #102, execute program by
sequence.
4) Conditional transfer 3 #J.GT.# K (>)

(Example) G65 H83 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
If #101 > #102, transfer to Program Segment N1000; if #101 ≤ #102, execute program by
sequence.
5) Conditional transfer 4 #J.LT.# K (<)

(Example) G65 H84 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
If # 101<#102, transfer to Program Segment N1000; if #101 ≥ #102, execute program by
sequence.
6) Conditional transfer 5 #J.GE.# K (≥)

(Example) G65 H85 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
If # 101 ≥ #102, transfer to Program Segment N1000; if #101<#102, execute program by
sequence.
7) Conditional transfer 6 #J.LE. # K (≤)

(Example) G65 H86 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
If # 101≤ #102, transfer to Program Segment N1000; if #101>#102, execute program by
sequence.
Note: sequence number can be assigned by variable. For example, G65 H81 P#100 Q#101 R#102; if condition
is satisfied, program will transfer to the program segment with sequence number assigned by #100.
4. Logic AND, Logic OR and Logic NOT Code

Example:
G65 H01 P#101 Q3;
G65 H01 P#102 Q5;
135
G65 H11 P#100 Q#101 Q#102;

5 means binary system is 101, 3 means 011 and calculation result is #100=7;
G65 H12 P#100 Q#101 Q#102;
5 means binary system is 101, 3 means 011 and calculation result is #100=1;
5. Macro-variable Alarm
Example:
G65 H99 P1; Macro-variable 3001alarm
G65 H99 P124; Macro-variable 3124 alarm
4.7.5 Function B of user’s macro program
1. Arithmetic and logic operation

The operations in the following table can be executed in variable. The expression at right side of
operational character contains constant and/or the variable composed of functions or operational
character. Variable #j and #k in expression can be replaced by constant. The variable at left side can
be assigned by expression.
Table 4-7-5-1 Arithmetic and Logic Operation
Function Format Remarks

Definition #i = #j
Addition #i = #j + #k;
Subtraction #i = #j - #k;
Mollification #i = #j * #k;
Division #i = #j / #k;
Sine #i = SIN[#j];
Arc sine #i = ASIN[#j];
Angle should be
Cosine #i = COS[#j];
assigned by °, 90°30‘
Arc cosine #i = ACOS[#j];
is expressed in 90.5°
Tangent #i = TAN[#j];
Arc tangent #i = ATAN[#j] / [#k];
Square root #i = SQRT[#j];
Absolute value #i = ABS[#j];
Rounding #i = ROUND[#j];
Ceil #i = FUP[#j];
Floor #i = FIX [#j];
Natural #i = LN[#j];
logarithm
Exponential #i = EXP[#j];
function
OR #i = #j OR #k; Logic operation
XOR #i = #j XOR #k; should be executed
AND #i = #j AND #k; according to binary
136
system by byte
Transfer from #i = BIN[#j];
Used for
BCD to BIN
handshaking of
Transfer from #i = BCD[#j];
PMC.
BIN to BCD
Note:
(1) Angle unit

Angle unit for Function SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN and ATAN is °. For example, 90°30ˊ is
expressed in 90.5°.
(2)ARCSIN #i = ASIN [ #j ]

Value range: -90°~90°.
If #j exceeds the range of -1~1, the system will give out alarm.
Variable #j can be replaced by constant.
(3)ARCCOS #i = ACOS [ #j ]
Value range: 180°~0°.

If #j exceeds the range of -1~1, the system will give out alarm.
(4)ARCTAN #i = ATAN [ #j ] / [ #k ]
Assigned length of two sides and separated by slash (/).

Value range: 0°~360°.
[For example] If #1 = ATAN [ -1 ] / [ -1 ]; #1=225°.
(5) Natural logarithm #i = LN [ #j ]
If logarithm (# j) is 0 or less than 0, the system will give out alarm.

(6) Exponential function #i = EXP [ #j ]
If operation result exceeds 99997.453535 (#j is about 11.5129), it may have overflow and
give out alarm.
(7) ROUND (round off) function
ROUND function should be providing with rounding at the 1st decimal place.
For example:
If #1=ROUND [#2]; #2=1.2345, value of variable 1 is 1.0.
(8) Ceil and floor
While numeric operation is handled by CNC, it is needed to take ceil if absolute value of
integral generated from operation is larger than original value; or take floor if it is lower than
original value. The negative number should be handled with much caution.
For example:
If #1=1.2, #2=-1.2.
137
While executing #3=FUP[#1], 2.0 is assigned to #3.

While executing #3=FIX[#1], 1.0 is assigned to #3.
While executing #3=FUP[#2], -2.0 is assigned to #3.
While executing #3=FIX[#2], -1.0 is assigned to #3.
(9) Abbreviation of arithmetic and logic operation instruction
If function is assigned in program, the first two characters of function name can be used for assigning
the function. (For details, please see Table 4-10-5-1).
For example:
ROUND→RO
FIX→FI
(10) Operation sequence
① Function
② Multiply and division operation (* / AND)
③ Add and subtraction operation (+ - OR XOR)
例）#1 = #2 + #3 * SIN[#4] ;
Example
)
1
3
1 ,、 2 和
and 3 表示运算次序。
means calculation
sequence.
(11) Limit
[, ] used for closed expression.

If divisor is assigned to be 0 or TAN[90] in division, the system will give out alarm.
2. Transfer and circulation
1) Transfer and circulation

GOTO and IF statement can be used in the program to change the flow direction. Three transfer and
circulation operations are available:
Transfer and GOTO statement (unconditional

转移和循环 GOTO语句（无条件转移）
circulation transfer)
IF statement (conditional transfer: IF…THEN…)
IF语句（条件转移：IF…THEN…）
WHILE statement (circulate while …)

WHILE语句（当…时循环）
2) Unconditional transfer
 GOTO statement
Transfer to program segment marked with sequence number n. Sequence number can be assigned
by expression.
GOTOn; n: sequence number (1 – 99999)
For example:
138
GOTO 1;
GOTO #10;
3) Conditional transfer (IF statement) [<Condition expression>]

IF[<Condition expression>]GOTO n
If assigned condition expression is satisfied, transfer to program segment marked with sequence
number n; if assigned condition expression is not satisfied, execute the next program segment.
如果变量#1的值大于10，转移到顺序号N2
If variable #1 is higher than 10, transfer to program
segment with sequence number of N2
的程序段。
If 如果条件不满足
condition not IF [#1 GT 10] GOTO 2 ;
satisfied
如果条件满足
If condition satisfied
程序
Program

N2 G00 G91 X10.0 ;
:
IF[<Condition expression>]THEN
If condition expression is satisfied, execute predetermined macroprogram statement. Only one
macroprogram statement is executed.
If #1 equals to #2, 0 is assigned to #3.

IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN #3=0;
Note:
 Conditional expression
Operational character should be included in conditional expression. Operational character is
inserted between two variables or between variable and constant, and be closed by brackets
([ , ]). Variable can be replaced by conditional expression.
 Operational character
Operational character is composed of 2 letters for comparing two values and determining if they are
equal to, smaller or higher than another value.
Table 4-7-5-2 Operational Character

Operational Character Meaning
EQ Equal to (=)
NE Unequal to (≠)
GT Higher than (>)
GE Higher than or equal to (≥)
LT Lower than (<)
LE Lower than or equal to (≤)
139
 Typical program
The following program is used for calculating the sum of value 1~10.
O9500；
#1=0；存储和的变量初值
Variable initial value stored
#2=1；被加数变量的初值
Initial value of added
variable
N1 IF[#2 GT 10]GOTO 2；当被加数大于10
Transfer to N2 if added 时转移到N2
amount is higher than 10
#1=#1+#2；计算和
Calculate sum
#2=#2+1；下一个被加数
Next added value
GOTO 1；转到N1
Transfer to N1
N2 M30；程序结束
Program complete
4) Circulation (WHILE statement)

One conditional statement is assigned behind WHILE and if condition is satisfied, execute the
program from DO to END; otherwise, directly transfer to the program segment behind END.
WHILE[ 条件表达式]
WHILE [conditional DODO
expression] mm;; (m=1,2,3)
(m =1, 2, 3)
如果条件满足
If condition satisfied
程序
Program
如果条件不满足
If condition not
satisfied
END m ;
:
If condition is satisfied, execute the program from DO to END; otherwise, directly transfer to the
program segment behind END. This instruction format is applicable to IF statement. The number
behind DO and END refers to the mark number of program execution scope. Such mark number
should be 1, 2 and 3; otherwise, the system may give out alarm.
Note:
 Nest
Mark (1-3) in DO——END circulation can be used for multiple times as needed. But the system will
give out alarm if program has crossed and repeated circulation and overlapping within scope of DO.
Note:
 Infinite loop
If only WHITE statement, instead of DO, is assigned, an infinite circulation from DO to END will be
generated.
 Handling time
Retrieval of sequence number will be made while handling GOTO statement with mark transfer. The
period of reverse retrieval can be longer than positive retrieval. Handling period can be reduced by
using WHITE statement for realizing circulation.
 Undefined variable
<Null> and zero have different effects in conditional expression using EQ or NE. <Null> is seen as
140
zero in other forms of conditional expressions.

 Typical program
The following program is used for calculating the sum of value 1~10.
O0001 ；
#1=0；
#2=1；
WHILE [#2 LE 10] DO 1;
#1=#1+#2;
#2=#2+1;
END 1;
M30;
Note:
 If G65 is used for call of macro program and F for quoting variable, the system should be

executed according to variable.
 GOTO statement will have downward research from present program segment and, if failing to
research corresponding sequence number, restart research from the beginning of program. It is
not recommended to use the same Code N in the same program.
 If variable number is expressed by decimal, the system will directly round off decimal and give no
consideration to carry.
 Before major program is completed, the partial variable will be kept and be shared in all
subprograms.
141
Chapter 5 Code M of Auxiliary Function
Code M of this machine tool for users is listed as follows:
Table 5-1
Code M Function
Complete program and returning to program heating, add
M30
Code M workpiece number by 1
for Complete program and returning to program heating, add
M02
controlli workpiece number by 1
ng M98 Call of subprogram
progra M99 Complete subprogram for return/repeated execution

m M00 Pause program
M01 Pause selection of program
M03 Clockwise rotation of spindle
M04 Anticlockwise rotation of spindle
M05 Stop rotation of spindle
M08 Activate cooling
M09 Deactivate cooling
M10 Tailstock forward
M11 Tailstock back
M12 Fasten chuck
M13 Loosen chuck
Switch from speed control mode to position control mode
M14
of spindle
Switch from position control mode to speed control mode
M15
of spindle
Code M M18 Cancel spindle positioning
controll M19 Spindle positioning
ed by M20 Loosen Axis C
PLC M21 Fasten Axis C
M26 M26 output (user-defined)
M27 Deactivate M26 output
M28 Cancel rigid tapping
M29 Rigid tapping instruction
M32 Open lubricating pump
M33 Close lubricating pump
M35 M35 output (user-defined)
M41 Gear 1 of spindle
M44 M44 output (user defined)
Mobile code and auxiliary functions can be simultaneously executed if they are assigned in the same
program segment.
142
If variables behind Address M are assigned, the code signals and gating signals will be sent to
machine tool to activate or deactivate these functions. Generally, one Code M can be assigned in one
program segment, or at most three M codes can be assigned in the same program segment by
setting positioning parameter N0: 33#7. However, it may fail to assign the Code M simultaneously
due to the restriction of mechanical operation. For detailed about restriction to assignment of multiple
M codes in the same program segment, please refer to operation instructions of machine tool
manufacturer.
5.1 Code M Controlled by PLC

If Code M controlled by PLC is within the same segment of mobile code, Code M and mobile code
should be executed simultaneously.
5.1.1 Code instruction (M03, M04) for positive/reverse rotation of spindle

Code: M03 (M04) Sx x x;
Note:
M03: anticlockwise rotation (positive rotation) of spindle,
M04: clockwise rotation (reverse rotation) of spindle.
Code Sx x x refers to the rotation speed of spindle, or the gear under gear control mode.
Unit: RMP (r/min)
If it is controlled by frequency converter, the Sx x x refers to the actual rotation speed; for
example, S1000 refers to the rotation of spindle at speed of 1000r/min.
5.1.2 Spindle rotation stop instruction (M05)
Code: M05, spindle rotation will be stopped if Code M05 is automatically executed, but speed of
Code S instruction will be kept. The deceleration mode for spindle stop should be set
according to regulations of machine tool manufacturer. Generally, it should be set as power
consumption brake.
5.1.3 Cooling activation/deactivation (M08, M09)
Code: M08 - open cooling water pump. M09 – stop cooling water pump. Water pump control codes
cannot be executed if auxiliary function is blocked in auto mode.
5.1.4 Chuck control (M12, M13)
Code: exterior chuck: M12, fasten chuck; M13, loosen chuck;

Inner chuck: M12, loosen chuck; M13, fasten chuck.
5.1.5 Switch of spindle speed and position mode (M14, M15)
Code: M14, spindle is switched from speed control mode to position control mode.
M15, spindle is switched from position control mode to speed control mode.
5.1.6 Spindle orientation and cancellation (M18, M19)
Code: M18, cancel spindle orientation. M19 - implement spindle orientation for tool switch and
positioning.
143
5.1.7 Loosen and fasten Spindle C (M20, M21)
Code: M20, loosen Spindle C; M21, fasten Spindle C.
5.1.8 Gear control of spindle (M41, M42, M43 and M44)
Code: M41, Gear 1 of spindle; M42, Gear 2 of spindle; M43, Gear 3 of spindle; M44, Gear 4 of
spindle
5.1.9 Lubricating oil control (M32, M33)
Code: M32, open lubricating pump; M33, close lubricating pump.
5.2 Program control Code M

Code M for program control is divided into major program control type and macroprogram control
type. If program Control Code M and mobile code is placed in the same segment, it is needed to
firstly execute mobile code followed by Code M.
Note: 1. Code M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 should not be assigned together with other M codes; otherwise,
the system may give out alarm. If these M codes are assigned in the same segment together with other
non-M codes, the non-M codes should be executed firstly.
2. The Code M includes the ones to make CNC send Code M to machine tool and execute internal operations,
such as the Code M which deactivates the pre-reading function of program segment. Besides, the Code M
which can make CNC send Code M to machine tool but have no execution of internal operation, can be
assigned in the same program segment.
5.2.1 Program end and return (M30, M02)
In auto running mode, the system will stop auto running state when program reaches M30 (M02) and,
if the following programs are not executed, it will stop spindle and cooling and workpiece number is
increased by 1. M30 can be controlled by parameter N0: 33#4 whether to return program header;
M02 can be controlled by parameter N0: 33#2 whether to return program header. If M02 and M30 are
assigned at end of program, they will be returned to subprogram called and keep executing the
following program segments.
5.2.2 Program pause (M00)
In auto running mode, auto running state will be paused when program reaches M00 and in such
case, the previous modal information will be saved. Press circulation key to keep running. Its function
is equal to holding of key.
5.2.3 Program selection pause (M01)
In auto running mode, auto running state will be paused if program reaches M01. If ―Select off‖ switch
is turned to on position, M01 and M00 have the same effects; if turned to off position, M01 has no
effects. For detailed operation, please refer to operation manual.
5.2.4 Call of subprogram code instruction (M98)
Code M98 can be programmed in main program for call and execution of subprogram. Detailed
format:
144
M98 P L
重复调用次数
Repeat and call times
被调用的子程序号
Number of subprogram called
Fig. 5-2-4-1
5.2.5 Return from subprogram (M99)
Code format:
M 99 P

Number of program segment executed in major program
返回主程序执0行can
(0001~9999), 的程 be序omitted
段号（ 0001～ 9999），前导 0可省略。
Function: (in subprogram) if other codes in present program segment are executed, they will return
to program segment assigned by P in main program; if P is not inputted, it will return to main program
to call the next program segment of Code M98 for continued execution. If Code M99 is completed in
main program, it will have repeated execution of present program.
1. In auto running mode, if M99 is used at end of one program segment, it will return to beginning
of program for auto execution when program reaches M99; if the following program is not
executed, the workpiece amount will not be added.
2. If M99 is used at end of subprogram, it will return to main program when program reaches this
segment and the next program in subprogram segment will be called for continued execution.
145
Chapter 6 S Code of Spindle Function
Through Code S and subsequent values, code signals are converted into analog signals sent to the
machine for spindle control.
S is a modal value.
6.1 Analog Control of Spindle

If Bit Para N0: 1#2 SPT=0, address S and subsequent values control the spindle speed by the use of
analog voltage. See operating instructions for details.
Code format: S_
Description:
1、 One block can command a S code.
2、 Address S and subsequent data values specify the spindle speed directly, in revolutions /
minute (r/min). For example, M3 S300 means the spindle runs at a speed of 300 r/min.
3、 When movement code and S code occur in the same block, they are executed
simultaneously.
4、 The spindle speed is controlled through Code S and subsequent values.
6.2 Switching Value Control of Spindle

If Bit Para N0: 1#2 SPT=1, address S and the subsequent two-digit switching value control the
spindle speed.
In the case of switching value control, the system can provides 3 levels of spindle mechanical gear
shifting. For the correspondence of S code to spindle speed and spindle speed levels the machine
provides, please refer to the machine tool manufacturer‘s instructions for use.
Code format: S01 (S1);
S02 (S2);
S03 (S3);
Description:
At present, there are 8 gear shifting levels. The standard ladder graph shows 4 levels of gear shifting.
If the program specifies a S code not stated above, the system will display “miscellaneous function
in execution ”.
6.3 Constant Surface Cutting Speed Control G96/G97

Code format:
Code of constant surface speed control G96 S_ surface speed (mm/min or inch/min)
Canceling code of constant surface speed control G97 S_ spindle speed (r/min)
Controlled axis code of constant surface speed control G96 P_ P1 X-axis; P2 Y-axis; P3 Z-axis;
P4 4th axis
Function: S specifies a surface speed (relative speed between tool and workpiece). The spindle
rotates in such a way to keep the surface cutting speed constant, disregarding the tool position.
Description:
1. G96 is a modal code. After it is commanded, the program enters constant-speed control mode. S is
146
surface speed.
2. G96 code must specify an axis, along which constant-speed control is used. G97 code cancels the
G96 mode.
3. In order for constant surface cutting speed control, it is required to set the workpiece coordinate
system taking the middle of rotating axis as zero point.
4. Linear speed = spindle speed × |X| × π ’ 1000 (m/min)
Spindle speed: r/min
|X|: absolute value of absolute coordinate on X-axis (diameter value), in mm
π≈3.14

Z
0
Fig.6-3-1 Workpiece Coordinate System under Constant Surface Cutting Speed Control
5. Under constant surface cutting speed control, a value higher than G50 S_ setting is suppressed at
maximum spindle speed. If the maximum spindle speed is not set when the system is powered on, S
in G96 code is regarded to be S=0 until M3 or M4 occurs in the program.
主轴速度（rpm)
Spindle speed (rpm)
n
Spindle speed corresponding to
3000
在160mm（半径处)与表
surface spindle at the point of
2800 160 mm (radius)
面速度对应的主轴速度
2600
2400
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200 Surface speed S is
1000 表面速度S是
600 mm/min
800 600mm/min
600
400
200
0 Radius mm)
半径（mm)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120140 160180 200 220240 260 280 300
Fig.6-3-2 Relationship of Workpiece Radius and Spindle Speed with Surface Speed
147
6. The surface cutting speed is specified in G96 mode:
G96 Mode G97 Mode
Assign surface speed in mm/min (inch/

min)
G97 command
Save the speed in mm/min (inch/

min)
Assign
Comman
d spindle Use assigned
speed spindle speed (rpm)
Not assign
Surface speed (mm/min or inch/min)

switched to spindle speed (rpm)
Command other than G96
G96 command
Assign
Command
Use assigned surface speed
surface speed
Not assign
Use the saved surface speed, in mm/min

(inch/min). The surface speed is regarded
as 0 if not saved.
Fig.6-3-3
148
7. G96 related parameter setting: When G0 rapid positioning is set through Bit Para No.37#2, it is
required to calculate the datum coordinate of G96 spindle speed (0: end point, 1: current point). G96
spindle speed suppression (0: before spindle magnification; 1: after spindle magnification) is set
through Bit Para No.37#3; whether to use constant cycle speed control or not is set through Bit Para
No.61#0.
Restriction:
1. The response of servo system is not considered in spindle speed variation, and constant surface
cutting speed control is valid all the same during thread cutting. Thus, it is required to cancel the
constant surface cutting speed through G97 before thread machining.
2. In the fast motion block specified by G00, constant surface speed control is realized with a surface
speed calculated according to the end point of block not according to the instantaneous variation in
tool position. Constant surface cutting speed is not used because fast motion does not involve
cutting.

3. In the case of flexible tapping, rigid tapping, or deep-hole rigid tapping, it is required to cancel the
constant surface cutting speed through G97 first. Otherwise, crowding or tap breaking will happen.
149
Chapter 7 F Code of Feed Function
The feed function controls the feed speed of tool as follows:
7.1 Fast Motion

Rapid positioning is realized through code (G00). The speed of rapid feed is set through Num Para
P88~P92. Magnification can be adjusted as follows through magnification adjustment key on
operation panel:
Fig.7-1-1 Rapid Feed Magnification Keys
Where, F0 is set through Num Para P93.

The rapid positioning (G0) acceleration can be set reasonably through number parameters
P105~P123 according to the response characteristics of machine tool and motor.
Note: In G00 block, the feed speed F code is invalid even if it is specified. The system conducts positioning at G0
speed.
7.2 Cutting Speed

In linear interpolation (G01) or arc interpolation (G02, G03), the feed speed of tool is commanded
through the value behind F code, in mm/min. The tool moves at cutting feed speed prepared in the
program. The magnification of cutting feed speed is adjusted through feed magnification keys on
machine operation panel (magnification adjustment range: 0% ~ 200%).
To prevent mechanical vibration, the tool speed can be controlled automatically at the beginning and
end of tool movement. The acceleration can be set through number parameters P125~P128.
The maximum cutting speed is set through Num Para P96, and the minimum cutting speed through
P97. If the cutting speed is higher than the maximum value, it is suppressed at the maximum value. If
lower than the minimum value, it is suppressed at the minimum value.
When the system is energized, the cutting feed speed in automatic mode is set through Num Para
P87.
The cutting speed can be specified in the following 2 modes:
A). Feed per minute (G98): After F, the tool feed rate per minute is assigned.
B). Feed per revolution (G99): After F, the tool feed rate per revolution of spindle is assigned.
7.2.1 Feed per Minute (G98)
Code format: G98 F_

Function: tool feed rate per minute, in mm/min or inch/min.
Description:
1. After G98 (feed per minute mode) is assigned, the tool feed rate per minute is
immediately assigned through the value behind F.
2. As a modal code, G98 will be valid until the assignment of G99, once assigned. After
power-on, the machine defaults to the feed per minute mode. The default of cutting feed speed is set
150
through Num Para P87.

3. It is allowed to control the speed of feed per minute through magnification adjustment
keys on panel or through band switch. The magnification is 0 % ~ 200%.
7.2.2 Feed per revolution (G99)
Code format: G99 F_

Function: tool feed rate per revolution, in mm/r or inch/r.
Description:
1. The machine tool cannot use this function without a spindle encoder.
2. After the assignment of G99 (feed per revolution mode), the tool feed rate per revolution is set
through the value behind F.
3. As a modal code, G99 will be valid until the assignment of G98, once assigned. During initialization,
the default speed of feed per revolution is zero.
4. It is allowed to control the speed of feed per revolution through magnification adjustment keys on

panel or through band switch. The magnification is 0 % ~ 200%.
Note 1: When the spindle speed is low, it is possible that the lower the spindle speed is, the more frequently the feed
rate fluctuates.
Note 2: In G99 feed per revolution mode, the maximum speed of feed per revolution is F500. The system will give an
alarm if the speed exceeds F500.
7.3 Linear Speed Control of Cutting

Generally, the cutting feed controls the speed in the direction of profile trajectory tangent and makes
it reach the commanded value.
x x
Start point
Fz
End point F
Fx
F End point
Fx
Start
point Fz
z z
Linear
Arc interpolation
interpolation
Fig.7-3-1
F: Speed in tangential direction F= Fx2+Fz2

FX: Speed in X axis
FZ: Speed in Z axis
7.4 Feed Speed Magnification Keys

The feed magnification in manual mode or in automatic mode can be adjusted through magnification
adjustment keys on operation panel. The magnification can be 0 ~ 200% (10% for each gear, and 21
151
gears in total). In automatic mode, the system will stops feeding with the cutting magnification
displayed at 0%, when magnification adjustment keys are set to zero. After magnification adjustment
keys are adjusted, the program will continue running.
152
7.5 Automatic Speed Controlling

The system motor conducts speed controlling automatically at the beginning and end of movement, in
order for steady start and stop. It also conducts speed controlling automatically when the movement
speed varies, so that the speed can varies steadily. For this reason, speed controlling need not be
considered in programming.
Rapid feed: before-interpolation speed controlling (0: linear; 1: S-type) after-interpolation speed
controlling (0: linear; 1: exponential)
Cutting feed: before-interpolation speed controlling (0: linear; 1: S-type) after-interpolation speed
controlling (0: linear; 1: exponential)
Manual feed: after-interpolation speed controlling (0: linear; 1: exponential)
(The common time constant used by each axis is set through parameters.)

速度
Speed
插补后的速度
Speed after interpolation
加减速控制后的速度
Speed after speed controlling
时间
Time
Speed
速度
TR:快速进给加减速时间常数
Speed controlling time constant in
（数据参数105-124）
rapid feed
(Num Para 105-124)
Time
时间
TR TR
Rapid
快速进给feed
Speed
速度
切削进给及手动进给加减速
TC：Speed controlling time constant in
cutting时间常数
feed / manual feed
（数据参数125-128）
(Num Para 125-128)
Time
时间
TC TC
Cutting feed /
切削进给/手动进给
manual feed
Fig.7-5-1
153
7.6 Speed Controlling at the Corner of Block

For example, if the only X-axis moves in last block and only Z-axis in next block, Z-axis speeds
up during X slow-down. The tool trajectory is shown below:
Insert a quasi-stop command here
X 在此插入一个准停指令
(2)
程序路径
Program path
Actual
实际刀具路径cutter path
(1)
Fig.7-6-1
If a quasi-stop code is added, the tool moves according to the linear command (See the real lime
above). Otherwise, a higher cutting feed speed or a longer speed controlling time constant will causes
a larger radian at the corner. In the case of an arc command, the arc radius of actual tool path is
smaller than that given by program. In order to reduce the corner error, the speed controlling time
constant should be minimized if allowed by the mechanical system.
154
Chapter 8 Cutter Functions
Chapter 8 Tool Functions
8.1 Meaning of T Code Format

A value (maximum 4 digits) is assigned behind address T for selecting the tool on machine. When the
movement code and T code are assigned in the same block, they are executed simultaneously.
In principle, it is not allowed to assign over two T codes in the same block. If it is set not to give an
alarm when codes of the same group are assigned in the same block, the T code, which is behind,
should be executed. For the allowed digits of address T and the machine movements corresponding
to T codes, please see the machine manufacturer‘s instructions for use.

T codes have the following meanings:
T
刀具偏置号
Tool offset number
Tool option number
刀具选择号
a) Tool selection
Tool selection is realized through the specified T code corresponding to tool number.
For the relationship of tool number selected with cutter, please refer to the machine manufacturer‘s
manual.
b) Tool offset number
This is used for selecting the offset value corresponding to offset number. The offset value must be
inputted through keyboard units. An offset number has 2 corresponding offset values, one on X-axis
and other other on Z-axis. See Display, modification, and setting of tool offset in Operating
Instructions for operation details.
Table 8-1-1
Offset Value
Offset No. Offset Value of X
Offset Value of Z Axis
Axis
01 0.040 0.020
02 0.060 0.030
03 0 0
.. . .
.. . .
.. . .
If a T code is assigned and its offset number is not 00, the tool offset is valid.
If the offset number is 00, the tool offset function is canceled.
Setting range of offset value:
mm input: -9999.999 mm ~ 9999.999 mm
8.2 Tool Offset
An offset X, Z is specific to programming trajectory. A T code assigns the offset value corresponding
155
to offset number and is added to or removed from the end point of each block.
偏置后的轨迹
Trajectory after offset
(Compensation for offset X, Z (offset vector))

（偏置X，Z进行的补偿（偏置矢量））
编程轨迹
Programming trajectory
This program segment has T code
该程序段有T代码偏置指令
offset command
Fig.8-2-1
a) Offset vector
In the figure above, a vector with offset X, Z is called offset vector. Compensation functions as the
offset vector.
b) Offset canceling
When the offset number of T code is 00, the offset is canceled. At the end of block canceled, the
offset vector is zero.
N1 G01 U50.0 W100.0 T0202;
N2 W100.0:
N3 U0.0 W50.0 T0200;
Offset trajectory
Trajectory
偏置后的轨迹 after offset
N3
(假定02号偏置号中已经定了偏置值)
(Suppose that the value of No.02 offset is
set)
N2
编程轨迹 trajectory
Programming
N1
(Suppose that the value of No.02 offset is set)

(假定02号偏置号中已经定了偏置值)
Fig.8-2-2
8.3 Programming Examples
Tool nose offset (Z, X) Tool No.

Tool #1……B (0.120, 0.200) 01
Tool #2……C (-0.180, -0.050) 02
156
Chapter 8 Cutter Functions
Tool No.
Axis
No.1 tool offset trajectory

1号刀偏值轨迹
2号刀偏值轨迹
No.2 tool offset trajectory
Fig.8-3-1 Tool Offset Compensation Example 2
(Programming example 1)

G00 X280.0 Z240.0;
G00 X120.0 Z200.0 T0101;
G01 Z140.0 F30;
X160.0 Z80.0;
G03 X227.7 Z30.0 R53.81;
G00 X280.0 T0100;
The nose trajectory of #1 tool is the same as this programming trajectory.
(Programming example 2)
Through the following modifications, the nose trajectory of #2 tool is the same as this programming
trajectory.
T0101→T0202 and T0100→T0200
157
Part II Operating Instructions

Part Two Operations
158
Chapter 1 Operation Panel
1.1 Panel Division

GSK980TDHi series includes GSK980TDHi of horizontal structure and GSK980TDHi-V of vertical
structure. The panel is divided into 4 areas: LCD (liquid crystal display) area, editing keyboard area,
softkey functional area, and machine control area, as follows:
Editing
LCD display area keyboard
area
Machine
control area
Softkey
Part Two Operations

function
area
Fig.1-1-1 GSK980TDHi Panel
LCD display area
Editing
keyboard
area
Softkey
function
area Machine
control area
Fig.1-1-2 GSK980TDHi-V Panel
159
1.2 Description of Panel Functions

1.2.1 LCD (liquid crystal display) area
GSK 980TDHi and GSK980TDHi-V systems use 8.4-inch color LCD monitor with a resolution of
800×600.
1.2.2 Editing keyboard area
2 3
1
6
10
7
4
Part Two Operations
Fig.1-2-2-1 GSK980TDHi Editing Keyboard Area
3
2
1
5
9
6
7
9
8 4
10
Fig.1-2-2-2 GSK980TDHi-V Editing Keyboard Area
160
The editing keyboard area is further divided into 10 zones by key function, and the instructions for use
of each zone are given below:
S/N Name Function Description

1 RESET System reset; feed and output stop
2 Address key Start manual data input (MDI) of address
3 Number keys Start MDI of numbers
Input number, address, or data to the buffer zone; confirm the operation
4 ENTER
result
Press any one of screen keys, and enter the corresponding interface
5 Screen Keys
display. (See Chapter 3 for details)
Used for the page switching program page turning in the same display
6 PgUp PgDn
mode
7 CURSOR Used for moving cursor
Enable the cursor to move to the start or end of the program line or of the
8 EDIT
program
9 SEARCH Used for searching data, address for further view or modification
Used for inserting, modifying, or deleting a program or a field in program
10 EDIT
Part Two Operations

editing; use of composite keys
1.2.3 Introduction to screen keys

This system arranges 8 operation page display keys and 1 help page display key on operation panel,
as follows:
Graphic page Alarm page Help page PLC page Diagnosis page
System page Position page Program page Setting page
161
Function
Name Remarks
Description
Display graph parameter and graph page through corresponding
Graph Enter graph
softkey conversion; set the center, size, and scale of graph through
page page
parameters
Alarm Enter alarm View various alarm message pages through corresponding softkey
page page conversion
Help Enter help View various help messages related to the system through
page page corresponding softkey conversion
Ladder
Enter ladder View the version information on PLC ladder graph and configuration
graph
graph page of system I/O port through corresponding softkey conversion
page
Enter
Diagnosi View the I/O port signal state at each side of system through
diagnosis
s page corresponding softkey conversion
page
Display the CNC setting, parameters, pitch compensation, data, bus
System Enter system
configuration, timed shutdown pages through corresponding softkey
page page
conversion
Display the relative coordinate, absolute coordinate,
Position Enter position
comprehensive coordinate, program monitor pages through
page page
corresponding softkey conversion
Display the program, MDI, catalog display pages through
Program Enter
corresponding softkey conversion; it is allowed to view many pages
page program page
of program name through PgUp PgDn on catalog interface
Part Two Operations
Offset Enter offset Display 3 interfaces (offset, workpiece coordinate, macro-variable)

page page through corresponding softkey conversion
Note: Through the setting of bit parameters NO:25#0 ~ 25#7 and NO:26#6 ~ 26#7, the above softkey conversion can
be realized by continuously pressing corresponding function keys. For details of each page, please refer to Chapter 3
of this operation manual.
1.2.4 Machine control area
Fig.1-2-4-1 GSK980TDHi Machine Control Area
162
Fig.1-2-4-2 GSK980TDHi-V Machine Control Area

GSK980TDHi and GSK980TDHi-V have the use and function definition of basic keys in machine
control area in common.
Part Two Operations
163
Keys Designation Explanation Note and Operation Instructions
Auto mode, MDI mode, switching to Edit mode

in operation process; it decelerates and stops
Edit mode key To enter edit mode
after the system finishes operating the current
program segment
In this mode, internal storage program inside

Auto mode key To enter auto mode
system is selected
Switching to MDI mode in Auto mode, system

MDI mode key To enter MDI mode decelerates and stops after finishing operating
the current program segment
Switching to Machine zero return mode in Auto

Machine zero To enter machine zero return
mode. System will decelerate and stop
return mode key mode
immediately
Switching to Program zero return mode in Auto

Program zero To enter program zero return
mode. System will decelerate and stop
return mode key mode
immediately
Part Two Operations
Manual mode Switching to Manual Mode in Auto mode.

To enter manual mode
key System will decelerate and stop immediately
Switching to MPG mode in Auto mode. System

MPG mode key To enter MPG mode
will decelerate and stop immediately
If the program segment

marked with ―/‖ skips; the
Block skip key indicator lights up and the Auto mode and input mode
program skips when it is
started
Single program
segment/continuous
Single segment operation stats switching; it
Auto mode and input mode
key means single segment
operation if indicator lamp is
on
Idle operation The indicator lamp is on if idle

Auto mode and input mode
switch operation is valid
Whether the operation is

Optional
stopped if the program Auto mode and input mode
ON/OFF key
contains ―M01‖
164
Keys Designation Explanation Remarks and Operation Instructions
When auxiliary function is

enabled, indicator lamp will
Auxiliary
be on and M, S, T and Auto mode and input mode
function switch
function output become
invalid
The indicator lamp is on Auto mode, input mode, machine zero
Machine lock
and axis output is invalid if return, hand wheel mode and manual
switch
machine lock is unlocked mode
Lubrication Machine lubrication

Any mode
switch key ON/OFF
Cooling fluid
Cooling fluid ON/OFF Any mode
switch key
Part Two Operations

Spindle positive rotation
Spindle control
Spindle rotation stopping Hand wheel mode and manual mode
key
Single negative rotation
Spindle speed adjustment

Spindle rate key (spindle speed analog Any mode
control valid)
Spindle inching Spindle inching status Manual mode, hand wheel mode and
switch ON/OFF single step mode
C/S axis
clockwise and C/S axis clockwise and Valid when the spindle is analog amount
anticlockwise anticlockwise rotation control mode in manual mode
rotation key
Tool change Valid in manual pulse mode, manual mode

Tool change switch
switch key and single step mode
User
self-definition User self-definition
key
165
Remarks and Operation

Keys Designation Explanation
Instructions
Machine zero return, program

C/S axis Switching spindle zero return, hand wheel mode,
switching speed/position control manual mode and single step
mode
Fast
Fast movement ON/OFF Manual mode
movement key
Fast rate,
manual single Fast rate, manual single Automatic mode, input mode,
step, hand step, hand wheel rate machine zero return, hand wheel
wheel rate option key mode and manual mode
option key
Axis X, Y, Z and C
positive/negative
movement in manual,
Manual Machine zero return, manual
single step operation
feeding key mode, hand wheel mode
Part Two Operations
mode; hand wheel

option axis is along the
positive direction of axis
The system will stop

Feeding
automatic operating by Automatic mode and input mode
maintain key
pressing this key
The system will start

Circulating
automatic operating by Automatic mode and input mode
startup key
pressing this key
Note 1: When there are more than 1 ―/‖ at the beginning of a block, the system will skip over that block even if the
hop-by-hop function is not opened.
Note 2: In manual mode, the manual speed ratio is adjusted through feed switch when the fast motion key is not
pressed.
Note 3: In following instructions, keys inside < > are panel keys; keys inside [] are softkeys below screen; [] is the
interface corresponding to current softkey; means the menu has subordinate menus.
Note 4: There is a user defined key USER1.
166
Chapter 2 System Power-On, Shutdown, and Safe Operation
2.1 System Power-On

Before GSK980TDHi CNC system power-on, it is required to confirm that:
1. The machine tool is normal.
2. The supply voltage meets the requirements.
3. Connections are proper and firm.
If the system self-inspection is normal, initialization is followed by present POS (relative coordinate)
page.
c
Part Two Operations

Fig.2-1-1
2.2 Shutdown
Before shutdown, it is required to confirm that:
1. The X and Z axes of CNC stay in a stop state;
2. Miscellaneous functions (such as spindle and water pump) are closed;
3. CNC is switched off first, and machine tool second.
Before power cutoff, it is required to confirm that:
1. The LED indicator circulation start-up on operation panel stays in a stop state;
2. All movable components of CNC machine stay in a stop state;
3. The system is shut down by pressing POWER OFF.
Emergency power-off
During operation, the machine tool can be switched off immediately in emergency, in case of accident.
However, it should be noted that the system coordinate may deviate from actual position after
power-off. Thus, zero returning and tool setting are required.
Note: For machine tool power-off, please refer to the manufacturer‘s instructions for use of machine tool.
167
2.3 Safe Operations

2.3.1 Reset
The system stays in the reset state after is pressed:

1. All axis motions stop.
2. M function stops.
3. Modify the bit parameters NO:35#1 ~ NO:35#5, NO:35#7 and NO:36#0 ~ 36#7 to set whether to
keep G code or not after reset.
4. Modify the Bit Para NO:34#7 to set whether to F, H, and D codes or not after reset.
5. Modify the Bit Para NO:28#7 to set whether to delete the program or not after reset in MDI mode.
6. Modify the Bit Para NO:10#3 to set whether to cancel the relative coordinate system or not after
reset.
7. Modify the Bit Para NO:10#7 to set whether the cursor returns to program start or not after reset in
non-editing mode.
8. Modify the Bit Para NO:52#7 to set whether to clear local variables #1 ~ #50 of macro-program or
not after reset.
9. Modify the Bit Para NO:52#6 to set whether to clear public variables #100 ~ #199 of
macro-program or not after reset.
Part Two Operations
10. It can be used in the case of system output exception or motion exception of coordinate axis.
2.3.2 Emergency stop
During machine tool operation, press EMERGENCY STOP and the system will enter the emergency
stop state. Immediately, the machine tool stops moving. This state is removed after EMERGENCY
STOP is released. (In spite of different manufacturers, this button will automatically bounce up
generally after left rotation.)
Note 1: Before the release of emergency stop state, it is required to confirm the fault cause has been troubleshot.
Note 2: After the release of emergency stop state, it is required to conduct zero returning again so as to ensure the
correctness of coordinate position.
In most cases, the emergency stop signal is a normally-closed contact signal. When the contact is
disconnected, the system goes into the emergency stop state immediately and the machine tool
stops urgently. The circuit of emergency stop signal is connected as follows:
+24V
急停开关
Emergency stop switch
ESP
Fig.2-3-2-1
168
2.3.3 Feed hold
Machine operation can be paused by pressing (Feed Hold). It should be noted that, during
cyclic code operation, pause follows the present code operation.
2.4 Circulation Start-up and Feed Hold
On control panel, (Circulation Start-up) and (Feed Hold) are used for starting
and pausing the program in automatic mode and MDI mode. Modify PLC addresses K5.1 and K5.3 to
set whether to use external start and pause or not.
Note 1: Switched between auto and MDI modes. Circulation start-up is valid before the execution of current block
ends. Feed hold is invalid after Feed Hold is pressed.
Note 2: Switched from auto and MDI modes to editing mode. Circulation start-up is invalid before the execution of
current block ends. Feed hold is invalid after Feed Hold is pressed.
Note 3: Switched from auto and MDI modes to zero returning, single-step, manual, and manual pulse modes. Feed
hold is invalid after Feed Hold is pressed.
Note 4: If circulation start-up is valid and the system is switched between auto and MDI modes or switched to editing
Part Two Operations

mode, the feed hold function is invalid when Feed Hold is pressed before the execution of current block ends.
2.5 Over-travel Protection

To prevent a machine tool from being damaged due to X-axis and Z-axis over-travel, there must be
over-travel protection measures.
2.5.1 Hardware over-travel protection
Travel limit switches are mounted at the maximum strokes of X-axis and Z-axis in positive & negative
directions. In the case of over-travel, after a limit switch is touched, the operating axis decelerates to
a stop state and the system gives an over-travel alarm.
Specification:
Over-travel in automatic operation
In automatic operation mode, when the tool touches a limit switch on some axis, all axis motions
decelerate to a stop state and the system gives an over-travel alarm. The program stops in the
over-travel block.
Over-travel in manual operation
In manual operation mode, all axis motions decelerate to a stop state as long as any axis touches the
limit switch.
2.5.2 Software over-travel protection
The software stroke is set through parameters P66~P75, taking the coordinate of machine tool as the
reference value. If a moving axis goes beyond the setting of software limiting parameters, the system
will give an over-travel alarm. Whether to conduct stroke detection or not (0: No; 1: Yes) after
power-on before manual returning to the reference point is set through Bit Para N0:11#6. It is set
through Bit Para N0:11#7 to give an alarm (0: before or 1: after) over-travel. In the case of an
169
over-travel alarm, the alarm is released if the counter moving axis in <manual> mode goes beyond
the over-travel range.
2.5.3 Release of over-travel alarm
Method to release a hard over-travel alarm: In manual or manual pulse mode, move the axis out in
the reverse direction (in the case of positive over-travel, move it out in negative direction; in the case
of negative over-travel, move it out in positive direction).
Part Two Operations
170
Chapter 3 Modification & Setting of Interface Display and Data
3.1 Position Display

3.1.1 Four modes of display on position page
Press and enter the position page, which has five interfaces: [relative coordinate],
[absolute coordinate], [comprehensive], [program monitor], and [operation]. They can be viewed
through corresponding softkeys, as follows:
1) Relative coordinate: Press [relative coordinate] and display the position of current tool inside
relative coordinate system. (See Fig.3-1-1-1)
Part Two Operations

Fig.3-1-1-1
2) Absolute coordinate: Press the softkey [absolute coordinate] to display the position of current tool
inside absolute coordinate system. (See Fig.3-1-1-2)
Fig.3-1-1-2
3) Comprehensive: Press [comprehensive] to go into the interface and display:
(A) Position inside relative coordinate system;
171
(B) Position inside absolute coordinate system;

(C) Position inside machine coordinate system;
(D) Offset (displacement) in manual pulse interruption;
(E) Velocity component;
(F) Surplus shift (displayed in automatic MDI mode only).
The display page is shown below (See Fig.3-1-1-3):

Part Two Operations
Fig.3-1-1-3
4) On [comprehensive] interface, press [operation] to display: (See Fig.3-1-1-4)
Fig.3-1-1-4
5) Program monitoring mode
Press [program monitoring] to go into [program monitoring] interface. On this interface, the absolute
coordinate, relative coordinate, surplus shift of current position and the modal information, operating
block of current operating program can be displayed simultaneously. (See Fig.3-1-1-5)
172
Fig.3-1-1-5
Note 1: Whether to display the model or not on program monitoring interface can be set through parameter NO.: 23#6.
When BIT6=0, the interface does not display modal code but display the coordinate of machine tool at original
position.
Note 2: In 6 modes (<program zero returning>, <single-step>, <manual>, <manual pulse>, <machine zero returning>,
<edit>), a relative coordinate system is displayed at center the top of the page; in 2 modes (<automatic> and <MDI>),
the surplus shift at center the top of the page.
Part Two Operations

3.1.2 Display of processing time, number of parts, programming speed,
magnification, actual velocity
In <position> display mode, the [absolute coordinate] and [relative coordinate] interfaces can display
the programming speed, actual speed, feed magnification, rapid magnification, G function code, tool
offset, number of work pieces, cutting time, spindle speed magnification, spindle speed, chuck state,
machining tool, etc. as shown in Fig.3-1-2-1:
Fig.3-1-2-1
Their concrete meanings are given below:
Speed: actual processing speed after magnification.
Programming speed: speed designated by F code in the program.
Feed magnification: magnification selected by feed magnification switch.
Rapid magnification: system default magnification controlled by the panel, or magnification selected
by the feed magnification band switch
173
G function code: value of G code that is being executed.

number of work pieces: ―0002/0000‖ or ―0002‖ is the number of machined parts; ―0000‖ is the
aggregate number of parts to be machined. When the program executes M30 or M02 in automatic
mode, the number of machined parts is increased by 1; this number does not change in other modes.
When the number of machined parts is greater than or equal to the aggregate number of parts to be
machined, the system sends a signal F62#7=1. How to use this signal is defined by the machine tool
manufacturer.
cutting time: When automatic operation is initiated, timing starts. It is expressed in hour, minute,
second.
S00000: command speed. Press below relative coordinate or absolute coordinate page, and
the cursor will be located at ―S 00000‖ (spindle speed). At this time, you can modify S value (range: 0
~ setting of P258).
Tool offset: tool number designated by T code in the program.
Note: number of work pieces power failure memory.
number of work pieces and cutting time clearing methods:
1) Switch to the relative coordinate or absolute coordinate interface.
2) Press and the cursor will be located at ―number of work pieces‖ column. Then, you can
Part Two Operations
input a value in the MDI mode. Press and the number of machined parts will be cleared.
3) Switch to cutting time using up and down keys.
4) Press : cutting time will be cleared.

Note 1: There must be an encoder mounted on spindle to display the actual speed of spindle.
Note 2: actual speed = F value of programming speed × magnification. For G00, the operating speed of each axis is
set through parameters P88 ~ P92 and may be adjusted through rapid magnification; the maximum sp eed is set
through parameter P86.
Note 3: programming speed of feed per revolution: displayed during the execution of block involving feed per
revolution. feed per revolution.
3.1.3 Relative coordinate clearing and halving
The relative coordinate position is cleared as follows:

1) Enter any interface displaying a relative coordinate (as shown in Fig.3-1-3-1);
174
Fig.3-1-3-1
2) Clearing operation: Press ―X‖ or ―U‖ key, and U on interface will flicker. Press , and the
relative coordinate value in X direction will be cleared (as shown in Fig.3-1-3-2);
Part Two Operations

Fig.3-1-3-2
3) Halving operation: Press ―X‖ or ―U‖ key, and U on interface will flicker. Press , and the
relative coordinate value in X direction will be halved (i.e., the relative coordinate value is divided by
2);
4) Coordinate setting: Press ―X‖ or ―U‖ key, and U on interface will flicker. Input the data to be set,
and confirm it by pressing . Then, the data will be inputted to the coordinate system.
5) Z-axis clearing method is the same.
3.1.4 Bus monitoring page display
When the system uses Ethernet bus communication mode, press
175
to enter the position page display. Press [ ] to enter the [monitor] interface. This interface can
display the current machine coordinate, multi-turn position, single-turn position, raster position, motor
speed, motor load (%, percentage of rated load) simultaneously. It is convenient for machine
debugging and real-time monitoring of current operating state of servo. (See Fig.3-1-5)
Fig.3-1-4
3.2 Program Display

Part Two Operations
Press
on panel to enter the program page display. There are 3 sub interfaces: [ program], [MDI] and
[catalog], which can be viewed and modified through corresponding softkeys, as shown in Fig.3-2-1.
Details are given below:
1) Program display
Press [ program] to enter the program display interface. This interface displays the program on the
page where the block being executed in memory is (as shown in Fig.3-2-1).
Fig.3-2-1
Press [ program] again to enter the editing and modification page of program (as shown in
Fig.3-2-2):
176
Fig.3-2-2
Press [] to enter the next page
Press [] to enter the next page

In automatic mode, press [debugging] to check current program grammar. If there is a grammar
mistake, the system will give an alarm.
Part Two Operations

[B. edit] and [B. End] can only be operated in automatic mode (back-end editing function). The
functions of [B.editing] are exactly the same as program editing in <edit> mode. See Chapter 10
Program Editing Operations of Operating Instructions. After editing, press [B. End] to save or press
[back] to exit the editing interface.
Note: For the moment, [debugging] does not support (back-end editing) program grammar checking.
2) MDI input display

Press [MDI] to enter the MDI display interface. In input MDI mode, it is allowed to prepare and
execute the multi-block program in the same format as editing program. MDI operation is applicable
to simple testing program operations (See Fig.3-2-3).
Fig.3-2-3
3) Program catalog display
Press [catalog] to enter the program (system catalog) display interface. The display content is shown
177
below (See Fig.3-2-4):

(a) Program quantity: number of programs stored (including subprogram) / maximum number of
programs that can be stored.
(b) Storage capacity: storage capacity occupied / total storage capacity.
(c) Program catalog table: display the number of program stored in sequence.
(d) Preview the program where the cursor is now.
Fig.3-2-4
Part Two Operations
Explanation: Display the number of each program in memory through PgUp PgDn. A program name
that exceeds 6 places or that does not meet specifications cannot be previewed.
3.3 System Display
Press to enter the system page. This page contains 6 sub- interfaces: [ CNC setting],
[ parameter], [pitch compensation], [ data], [ bus configuration], and [ timed shutdown], which can
be switched through corresponding softkeys.
3.3.1 CNC setting page
1. Page access
Press to enter the setting display interface. On this interface, it is allowed to view or modify
settings through corresponding softkeys, as follows (See Fig.3-3-1):
178
Fig.3-3-1
2. [ CNC setting] interface operating instructions
Press [ CNC setting] to enter the setting interface shown in Fig.3-3-1. It is allowed to view and
modify parameters. Concrete operation methods and steps are given below:
(a) Enter <MDI> operation mode;
(b) Move cursor through up and down keys to the item to be modified;
(c) Type 0 or 1 according to the following instructions;
Part Two Operations

1) Parameter switch
0: Turn off parameter switch 1: Turn on parameter switch
When parameter switch is set to ―0‖, it is forbidden to modify or set system parameters.
2) Program switch
0: Turn off program switch 1: Turn on program switch
When program switch is set to ―0‖, it is forbidden to edit the program.
3) Keyboard selection
0: 980TDHi-H 1: 980TDHi-V
Note: In any mode, it is allowed to modify keyboard choice by pressing EMERGENCY STOP.
4) Input unit
Set the input unit of program to be metric system or British system
0: Metric 1: British
5) I/O channel
1: RS232 2: USB
6) Auto sequence number
0: In editing mode, the system will not automatically insert the sequence number after a program is
typed using keyboard.
1: In editing mode, the system will automatically insert the sequence number after a program is typed
using keyboard. The sequence number increment between different blocks is set through Num Para
P210.
7) Sequence number increment
Set the increment for automatic insertion of sequence number, within the range 0~1000.
8) Data and time
The user can set the system date and time at this place.
(d) Press to input something.
179
3.3.1.1 Setting and modification of password and permission
In order to prevent the machine program or CNC parameters from being modified with malice,
GSK980TDHi system offers the permission setting function. Its password is divided into 5 levels:
Grade 1 (end user level), Grade 2 (system debugging level), Grade 3 (machine manufacturer level),
Grade 4 (system manufacturer level), Grade 5 (machining operation level). After turn-on and
power-on, the system is at the minimum level in default.
Grade 1: It is allowed to modify some of CNC state parameters and number parameters.
Grade 2: It is allowed to modify CNC state parameters, number parameter, offset data, and pitch
compensation.
Grade 3 and Grade 4: It is allowed to modify CNC state parameters, number parameter, offset data,
and transmission PLC ladder graph.
Grade 5: No password. It is allowed to modify offset data, macro-variables; to operate the operation
panel of machine tool. It is not allowed to modify CNC state parameters, number parameters, or pitch
compensation data.
1) In <MDI mode>, enter the interface and move cursor to the target position.
2) Input corresponding password, and press . If the password is correct, the system will give
an prompt ―password is correct‖.
Part Two Operations
3) For modification of system password, input 0~6 numbers or letters, and press for
confirmation.
4) After modification, press and move cursor to ―logout (END)‖ button. The interface will
present: ―Press <MDI> to confirm logout!‖ After confirmation by pressing , the interface will
present: ―logout finished!‖ At the same time, cursor will get back to the password setting column. After
blackout reset, the password will automatically log out, too.
3.3.1.2 System setting and modification of date and time
1) Enter [CNC setting] interface in <MDI mode>.

2) Turn on parameter switch and permission password.
3) Move cursor to the position of date and time. (for example, yyyy-mm-dd)
4) Input the required number. Press <MDI> and cursor will skip to next position.
Note 1: If the new stage password is set in limited shutdown, the setting of date and time will be gray, which means it
cannot be modified.
Note 2: After the machine manufacturer password is acquired, you should open the password for staging period
before modification of date and time.
3.3.2 Parameter display, modification, and setting

3.3.2.1 Parameter display
1) Bit parameter page: Press [ parameter] to enter the bit parameter interface. (See Fig.3-3-2-1-1):
180
Fig.3-3-2-1-1
See Appendix I Parameters for the concrete definitions of various parameters.
2) Number parameter page: Press [number parameter] to enter the number parameter interface.
(See Fig.3-3-2-1-2):
Part Two Operations

Fig.3-3-2-1-2
See Appendix I Parameters for the concrete definitions of various parameters.
3) Common parameters
Fig.3-3-2-1-3
181
On this [common parameter] interface, select the required parameter catalog number to enter the
corresponding interface. (See Fig.3-3-2-1-4):
Fig.3-3-2-1-4
The operation methods are given below:
1) Select <MDI>operation mode.

Part Two Operations
2) Press and [ number parameter] to enter the [common parameter] display page.
3) Select parameter catalog through , , , , , .
4) Move cursor to the location of Parameter No.:
Method 1: Press <MDI> to select the block. Press PgUp PgDn to display the page where the
parameter to be set is; through arrow keys, move cursor to the position of parameter to be modified.
Method 2: Press corresponding number key followed by <MDI>. Press PgUp PgDn to display the
page where the parameter to be set is; through arrow keys, move cursor to the position of parameter
to be modified.
5) Press <HOME> or [back to catalog] to return to the list of common parameters.
6) Press <G> and the interface will jump to the parameter interface of selected parameter.
7) For common parameters, the letter ahead of Parameter No. represents parameter type. (B: bit
parameter; P: number parameter; K: K parameter; T: T parameter; D: DATA parameter; C: CTR
parameter)
8) The range of number parameters should be modified on number parameter interface.

Note: The list of common parameters and involved parameters can be freely selected by the user in corresponding
configuration document.
3.3.2.2 Modification and setting of parameter value

1) Select <MDI>operation mode.
182
2) Press to enter the <CNC setting> interface. Set the parameter switch at ―1‖.
3) Press followed by [ number parameter] to enter the [bit parameter] or [parameter] or

[common parameter] display page.
4) Move cursor to the location of parameter number to be modified:
Method 1: Press PgUp PgDn to display the page where the parameter to be set is; through arrow
keys, move cursor to the position of parameter to be modified.
Method 2: Input Parameter No. and press for location.

5) Input a new parameter through number key (For modification of different levels of parameters, it is
required to input corresponding password permission).
6) Press to confirm that the parameter value is input and displayed.

7) After setting of all parameters, turn off parameter switch.
Note: The [common parameter] interface does not support search function.
Part Two Operations

3.3.3 Display, modification, and setting of pitch compensation
3.3.3.1 Display of pitch compensation
Press [pitch compensation] to enter the pitch compensation interface, which is shown below (See
Fig.3-3-3-1-1):
Fig.3-3-3-1-1
3.3.3.2 Modification and setting of pitch compensation

1) Set the axis pitch error compensation number through number parameters P216 ~ P220. Set the
axis pitch error compensation space through number parameters P226 ~ P230.
2) Input the compensation of each point in <MDI mode>.
Note: For setting of pitch compensation, please refer to Part IV Installation and Connection of PLC Installation and
Connection Manual for GSK980TDHi CNC System.
183
3.3.4 Data backup, recovery, and transmission
Press [ data] to enter the setting (data processing) interface. On this interface, it is allowed to back
up (store) and recover (read) user data (ladder graph, ladder graph parameter, system parameter,
offset, pitch compensation, system macro-variable, user macro-program, CNC part program); it is
also allowed to input or output data using U disk or PC. Data backup and recovery do not influence
the part program stored in CNC (See Fig.3-3-4-1).
Fig.3-3-4-1
Part Two Operations
Operation method:
1. Press [CNC setting] to enter the CNC setting interface, and set corresponding password. For
password levels corresponding to data operations, please refer to 3.3.1.1 Setting and modification of
password permission.
2. Press [ data] twice to enter the data processing operation interface (as shown in Fig.3-3-4-2).
Fig.3-3-4-2

The functions of different operation items are listed in Table 3-3-4-1.
184
Table 3-3-4-1
Operation
Function Description
Item
Can back up the data of ladder graph (PLC), parameter (PLC), system parameter,
Data
offset, pitch compensation, or system macro-variable singly in system disk. After data
backup
backup, the system will generate a backup document whose name has a suffix ―.bak‖.
Can recover the data of ladder graph (PLC), parameter (PLC), system parameter,
Data
offset, pitch compensation, or system macro-variable singly in system disk. Data
recovery
recovery is to read and recover the backup document in system.
Data output Can output the data in system disk to an external storage device.
Data input Can input the data in an external storage device to system disk.
One-touch
Can back up multiple data items in system disk simultaneously.
backup
One-touch
Can recover the backup documents of multiple data items simultaneously.
recovery
One-touch Can copy the documents of multiple data items simultaneously from system disk to U
output disk.
One-touch Can copy multiple documents simultaneously from U disk to corresponding data items
input in system disk.
Part Two Operations

3. Press , to select the target document; press , to switch data item
directory and file directory table.
4. Conduct data backup, data recovery, data output, data input, one-touch backup, one-touch
recovery, one-touch output, one-touch input operations by pressing corresponding softkeys.
Note:
1) When I/O channel is set to be U disk, the data output and data input softkeys have the same function.
2) Before data output/input, please ensure I/O channel is set properly. Before the use of U disk, I/O channel should
be set to 2; before the use of transmission software on PC, I/O channel should be set to 1.
3) The content of one-touch operations is determined by password permission. For the relationship between data
items and password permissions, refer to 3.3.1.1 of Operating Instructions.
4) Correlation parameters:
①Set, through Bit Para N0:54#7, whether one-touch input/output is effective for part programs or not in the case
of debugging or higher permission.
②Set, through Bit Para N0:27#0, whether to forbid the editing of No.80000-89999 subprograms or not.
③Set, through Bit Para N0:27#4, whether to forbid the editing of No.90000-99999 subprograms.
5) During data processing, the system set related operation tips, which are listed below: (Table 3-3-4-2)
185
Table 3-3-4-2
S/N Message Cause Processing

1 one-touch operation completed Operation success Transmission completed
After completion of one-touch Have executed the
operation, the system prompts: macro-program Skip the input/out of this
2
Please modify the parameter input/output, but haven‘t set file.
before copying. system related parameters.
After completion of one-touch Have executed the
operation, the system gives an updating of ladder graph
Transmission completed.
3 alarm: This parameter and ladder graph
Please power on again.
modification must be followed parameter. It is required to
by once power-off. power on again.
4 Failure to read file File error Interrupt input and output.
5 Failure to write file File error Interrupt input and output.
6 Failure to copy file File error Interrupt input and output.
Part program is greater
7 Too large file Interrupt input and output.
than 4M
8 Insufficient free space Insufficient disk space Interrupt input and output.
After sent to the system, LADCHI**.TXT document is invalid until power-off.
3.3.5 Display, modification, and setting of bus servo parameters
Press [ Bus Configuration] to enter the bus interface, which is shown below (See Fig.3-3-5-1):
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-3-5-1
[ Bus Configuration] interface operating instructions
Press [ Bus Configuration] to enter the bus configuration interface shown in Fig.3-3-5-1. It is allowed
to view and modify the parameters here. Concrete operation methods and steps are given below:
1. Enter <MDI> operation mode;
2. Move cursor, through arrow keys, to the item to be modified;
3. Modify parameters according to the following instructions;
1) Bus
2) Encoder type
0: incremental 1: absolute
Note: It is also allowed to set whether to use the absolute encoder or not through Bit Para No: 20#6.
3) Maximum allowable deviation
Note: The system default is 10.000 mm. It can also be set through number parameters P450~P454 and P455~P459.
X and Z axes get back to machine zero at the same time. 0: without expansion card 1: with
expansion card
186
Note: It is also allowed to set whether to use the bus servo card or not through Bit Para No: 0#6.
4) Grating type
0: incremental 1: absolute
Note: It is also allowed to set whether to use the absolute grating or not through Bit Para No: 1#0.
5) Spindle expansion card
0: without expansion card 1: with expansion card
Note: It is also allowed to set whether the spindle drive unit uses bus control mode or not through Bit Para No: 1#1.
6) Absolute zero setting
a) First, set the system-side gear ratio, feed axis direction, and zeroing direction before power-off and
power-on.
b) In MDI mode, set ―bus or not‖ at 1 and ―encoder type‖ at 1 on bus configuration interface; move
axes to manually to set the position of machine zero point.
c) Move cursor to . As instructed, press <MDI> twice and the zeroing indicator gets up.
Record the current position of absolute encoder of each axis motor as the machine tool zero point.
After system power-off and power-on, the zeroing indicator light is out. It is allowed to set negative
boundary and positive boundary manually according to the actual maximum stroke of machine tool so
that the current absolute coordinate of machine tool shifts a value forward or backward. At last, set Bit
Para No.61#6 at 1. Then, the positive and negative limits will be effective.
Setting range: -99999.9999~99999.9999. It is also allowed to set the positive and negative
boundaries of each axis through number parameters P66~P85.
Part Two Operations

d) Whether to configure grating. For each axis, set whether to configure grating or not. 0: without
grating; 1: with grating.
Note 1: After machine zero setting, modification of zeroing direction, feed axis moving direction, servo or system gear
ratio will cause zero loss, which requires re-setting of machine zero point.
Note 2: Re-setting of machine zero point will influence other reference points such as second and third reference
points, so these affected points need be reset, too.
3.3.5.1 Display of servo parameters

Press [ Bus Configuration] to enter the servo debugging interface. Then, press [ servo parameter]
to enter the servo parameter interface, which is shown below (See Fig.3-3-5-1-1).
Fig.3-3-5-1-1
3.3.5.1.1 Modification and setting of servo parameters

1) Select <MDI> operation mode.
187
2) Press to enter the [CNC setting] interface. Set parameter switch at ―1‖.
3) Press followed by [ Bus Configuration] to enter the servo debugging interface. Then,
press [ servo parameter] to enter the parameter setting and display page.
4) Move cursor to current axis parameter #0, and input corresponding password. Press ENTER to
download the drive unit parameters to system. It is allowed to modify servo parameters on [servo
parameter] interface.
5) Move cursor to the position of reference number to be modified:
Method 1: Press PgUp PgDn to display the page where the parameter to be set is; or, through arrow
keys, move cursor to the position of parameter to be modified.
Method 2: Input the Parameter No. and press to locate it.
6) Press for confirmation. Then, the parameter will be sent to drive unit and the state
column will present ―Drive unit succeeds in parameter downloading!‖.
Part Two Operations
7) Press so that servo can save the updated parameter. The state column will present
―Drive unit succeeds in parameter saving!‖.
8) After the setting of all parameters, turn off parameter switch.
3.3.5.1.2 Servo parameter setting matching motor model

press [ servo parameter] to enter the parameter display page.
4) Move cursor to current axis parameter #0 and input password 385. Press ENTER to download the
drive unit parameter to system. It is allowed to modify servo parameters on [servo parameter]
interface.
5) Move cursor to parameter #1, and input the value matching motor model:
6) Press for confirmation. Then, the parameter will be sent to drive unit and the state
column will present ―Drive unit succeeds in parameter downloading!‖.
188
3.3.5.1.3 Backup of servo parameters

3) Press to enter the [CNC setting] interface. Input end-user password and higher-level
password.
5) Press [backup] and the current axis parameters can be backed up into a file DrvParXX.txt.
(XX-axis number. For example, the filename is DrvPar01.txt for X-axis backup.)
3.3.5.1.4 Recovery of servo parameters

Part Two Operations

password.
5) Press [recovery] and the parameter backup file of current axis DrvParXX.txt will be recovered to
servo drive. (XX-axis number. For example, the filename is DrvPar01.txt for X-axis backup)
3.3.5.1.5 Servo level clearing
During parameter debugging, the machine tool will shake if servo parameters are too rigid. In order to
avoid dangers, servo parameters can be recovered to Grade 0 initial state parameters through servo
level clearing.
189
password.
5) Press [level clearing] to recover all servo axis parameters to Grade 0 parameters.
6) Press so that servo can save the updated parameters. The state column will present
3.3.5.2 Servo debugging
In order to ensure servo debugging can reflect the actual servo performance, please cancel the gear
ratio at drive side and various offsets at system side (including pitch error compensation and
backlash compensation).
Part Two Operations
3.3.5.2.1 Interface composition

Press [ servo debugging] to enter the servo debugging tool interface, which is shown below (See
Fig.3-3-5-2-1-1 ~ Fig.3-3-5-2-2).
Fig.3-3-5-2-1 Rigid Level Interface
190
Fig.3-3-5-2-2 Roundness Test Interface

Note: The coordinate axes displayed on servo debugging interface are determined by number of system control axes
or number of bus servo slave stations, whichever is lesser.
3.3.5.2.2 Functions
1. Rigid level and parameter optimization

This function is to set servo parameters at the optimal servo performance state.
2. Roundness test
Part Two Operations

Roundness test can simulate the circle cutting motion circle and collect the position information on
motor encoder to judge the synchronicity of machine servo axes‘ response.
3.3.5.2.3 Operating instructions

1. Rigid level debugging
Explanation: The debugging and setting of rigid level can only be operated specific to one axis once.
Operation keys:
A. and : Select the axis. (Note: once entering the optimization procedure, the axis
being operated cannot be changed through arrow keys.)
B. and : Decrease or increase the rigid level of current axis. The rigid level decreases
or increases by one level after once pressing.
C. [Move +] and [Move -]: Move current axis a certain distance, which is set through Num Para P392,
at the speed set through Num Para P393. Before optimization, it is allowed to check whether motor
will vibrate or make an abnormal noise by pressing [Move +] and [Move -] repeatedly to move the
axis. However, once optimization starts, it is not allowed to acquire motor characteristic data by
pressing [Move +] and [Move -] repeatedly to move the axis.
Note 1: Once optimization starts, press [Move +] and [Move -] to move the axis so as to acquire data.
Note 2: Any non-professional person is not allowed to modify Num Para P392 or P393 without permission, or
optimization may fail.
D. : Confirm the operation or enter the next step;
E. : Cancel some operation or return to last operation;
191
F. : Reset the operation, or return to the initial operation step;
G. : Save the operation.
Operation procedure: As shown below:

Part Two Operations
192
Part Two Operations
2. Roundness test
Operation keys:
A. Number keys: Input various parameters;
B. and : Select the parameter item;
193
C. and : Select the function (acquisition and analysis);
D. : Input or confirm the parameter value and execute corresponding operation;
E. : Clear data and reset to the initial state.

Parameter items:
F. Plane: Select test plane G18;
G. Along or against the circle: Select the circle direction G02 or G03;
H. Sampling period: Set the sampling period according circle radius and feed speed. The greater
the radius is, the longer the sampling period should be; the slower the feed speed is, the longer
the sampling period is;
I. Feed speed: Movement speed during testing;
J. Magnification: Roundness analysis is the magnification of error.
Operation procedure:
Step 1: Press or to select the acquisition function after the setting of parameters;
Part Two Operations
Step 2: Initiate arc motion and start data acquisition by pressing . After acquisition, press
or to select the analysis function.

Step 3: Initiate the analysis function, output the roundness data, and draw the circular error
distribution, which is shown below, by pressing .
Fig.3-3-5-2-3-1
Note: After debugging of rigid level and parameter optimization, it is required to test the synchronization of current
feed axes by using roundness test tools.
If the roundness test of each plane is within 6u, it can be regarded that servo axes move in good synchronicity, and
that parameter debugging is basically a success.
194
3.3.6 Timed shutdown display

3.3.6.1 Setting of timed shutdown
1. Press [System] on system panel followed by [F1] to enter the following interface.
Fig.3-3-6-1
3.4 Offset Display
Part Two Operations

Press to enter the offset display interface below. This interface contains 3 sub- interfaces:
[ bias], [ Workpiece Coordinate], and [ Macro-variable], which can be viewed or modified through
corresponding softkeys (See Fig.3-4-1):
Fig.3-4-1
195
3.4.1 Display, modification, and setting of bias
Press [ bias] to enter the bias display page, which is shown below (See Fig.3-4-1-1-1):
Fig.3-4-1-1
Press to enter the next page

Part Two Operations
. It is allowed to input offset directly

or to do addition / subtraction with the value at current position.
3.4.1.1 Setting of bias
How to set the tool bias on bias interface:

1) Press [ bias] to enter the bias display interface.
2) Move cursor to the position of offset number to be inputted.
Method 1: Press PgUp/PgDn to display the page where the compensation amount to be modified is;
move cursor to the position of offset number to be modified, through arrow keys.
Method 2: After offset number is inputted, press to locate it.

3) Input numbers.
A. Bias line:
(1) Press address key ( or corresponding to axis name). Input a number, and then
press on panel or F1 [measuring input] (display value = absolute coordinate －input value);
after input, the current abrasion value will be automatically cleared.
(2) Press address key ( or corresponding to axis name). Input a number, and then
press on panel or F2 [+ input]. (Display value =current value + input value)
(3) Press address key ( or corresponding to axis name) followed by F3[C input].
(display value =relative coordinate －abrasion value)
(4) Press on panel. Input a number, and then press <MDI>. (Display value =input value)
196
(5) Press on panel. Input a number (an integer within 0~9), and then press on panel.
(display value =input value)
B. Abrasion line:
1. Press address key ( or corresponding to axis name) followed by F3[C input].

(display value =relative coordinate －abrasion value)
2. Press address key ( or corresponding to axis name). Input a number, and then
press on panel or F2[+ input]. (display value =current value +input value)
Note 1: T column: It is only allowed to input on panel. Any other letter inputted is invalid.
Note 2: Except the operation above, any operation is wrong in format on bias interface.
Note 3: After modification, bias will change in color. It returns after cursor moving or interface switching.
3.4.1.2 Modification of bias value
Part Two Operations

1) Move cursor to the position of tool bias number to be modified, as stated in 3.4.2.1 of this chapter.
2) For modification of the tool bias on X-axis, it is required to type U; for modification on Z-axis, it is
required to type W; alternatively, select the position of data to be modified and press address key
( or corresponding to axis name) before input of a number.
3) Press on panel or F2 [+ input]. Add the current tool bias value to the increment value
typed. Display the calculation result as new tool bias value.
For example, the tool bias on X-axis set is 5.678, and the increment typed is U1.5. In this case, the
new tool bias on X-axis is 7.178 (=5.678+1.5).
Note 1: During the modification of tool bias, the new bias cannot come into effect immediately. It takes effect after T
code designating its offset number is executed.
Note 2: The user can modify the tool offset value at any time during program operation. However, in order that
modification can take effect in time, the tool offset value must be modified before its offset number is operated.
3.4.2 Workpiece coordinate setting page
Press [ Workpiece Coordinate] to enter the coordinate system setting interface, which is shown
below (See Fig.3-4-2-1).
197
Fig.3-4-2-1
Except 6 standard workpiece coordinate systems (G54 ~ G59 coordinate systems) shown in
Fig.3-4-2-2, each coordinate system is viewed or modified through PgUp/PgDn. For operations of
additional coordinate system, see Programming—4.2.7 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System.
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-4-2-2
3.4.2.1 Direct input (number)
Enter workpiece coordinate system setting page. Move cursor to the position of typing through
and . Input a number, and press . In this way, you input the number directly. (See
Fig.3-4-3-2)
3.4.2.2 Two methods for coordinate input
Method 1: Move cursor to the position of typing through and . Press an address key
( , corresponding to axis name), and input a number. Press and CNC will
automatically input the data;
198
Method 2: Move cursor to the position of typing through and .Then, press an address
key ( , corresponding to axis name), and input a number. Press softkey

and CNC will automatically input the data;
Coordinate system searching method:
1) In any mode, input a coordinate system and press for location. For example, input ―G56‖.
2) In any mode, input ―P6‖ or ―P06‖ and press . The cursor will be located at the additional
workpiece coordinate system ―G54 P06‖.
3.4.2.3 Modification of workpiece coordinate system
Enter workpiece coordinate system setting page. Move cursor to the position of data to be modified
through and . Input a number, and then press F3[+ input] to add current bias of
workpiece coordinate system to the increment value inputted. The calculation result will be displayed
Part Two Operations

as new bias value of coordinate system. (display value =current value + input value) See
Fig.3-4-3-3-1
Fig.3-4-2-3-1
3.4.2.4 Clearing of workpiece coordinate system
Enter workpiece coordinate system setting page, and press . When all bias values of
workpiece coordinate system are cleared, system will display a prompt. In this case, it is required to
press again to delete all bias values. It is allowed to press <cancel> to cancel the deletion
operation; it is also allowed to set any axis bias at 0 with the direct input method stated in this chapter.
199
3.4.3 Display, modification, and setting of macro-variables

3.4.3.1 Display of macro-variables
Press [ Macro-variable] to enter the macro-variable page. This page contains the following 2 sub-
interfaces: [user variable] and [system variable], which can be viewed or modified through
corresponding softkeys.
1） User variable page: Press [user variable] to enter the user variable interface (See
Fig.3-4-3-1-1):
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-4-3-1-1
2） System variable page: Press [system variable] to enter the system variable interface (See
Fig.3-4-3-1-2):
Fig.3-4-3-1-2
For details of macro-variable instructions and usage, see Programming—4.7.2 Macro-variables.
3.4.3.2 Modification and setting of macro-variables

2) Press followed by [ Macro-variable] to enter the macro-variable display page.

3) Move cursor to the position of variable number to be modified:
200
Method 1: Press PgUp/PgDn to display the page where the variable to be set is; move cursor to the
position of variable to be modified, through arrow keys.
Method 2: Input a variable number and press for location.

4) Input a new value through number keys.
5) Press to confirm the value is inputted and displayed.
3.5 Graphic Display
Press to enter the following graph page. This page contains 2 display interfaces: [graphical
parameter] and [ Graph], which can be switched through corresponding softkeys. (See Fig.3-5-1):
Part Two Operations

Fig.3-5-1
1) Graphical parameter interface: Press [graphical parameter] to enter the graphical parameter
interface, as shown in Fig.3-5-1.
A、 Meaning of graphical parameters
Coordinate selection: Set a drawing plane. There are 2 selection modes (0~1), as shown in second
line.
Graphic mode: Set the graphic display mode.
Auto erase: Set this period to be 1 hour. After a program ends, its graph is automatically erased when
next circulation start-ups.
Scale: Set the scale of drawing.
Graphic center: Set the workpiece coordinate corresponding to LCD center the in workpiece
coordinate system.
Maximum and minimum: After the maximum and minimum of each display axis are set, CNC system
will set the scale and graphic center the automatically.
Xmax: maximum in X direction in graphic display (Unit: 0.0001 mm / 0.0001 inch)
Xmin: minimum in X direction in graphic display (Unit: 0.0001 mm / 0.0001 inch)
Ymax: maximum in Y direction in graphic display (Unit: 0.0001 mm / 0.0001 inch)
Ymin: minimum in Y direction in graphic display (Unit: 0.0001 mm / 0.0001 inch)
Zmax: maximum in Z direction in graphic display (Unit: 0.0001 mm / 0.0001 inch)
Zmin: minimum in Z direction in graphic display (Unit: 0.0001 mm / 0.0001 inch)
201
tool rest selection: Modify this parameter according to the type of machine tool rest, in order that
graphic display can reflect the actual conditions of machine more intuitively. There are 2 selection
modes (0-1), as shown in second line.
Note: The settings of Xmax and Xmin are radius values.
B、 Graphical parameters setting method
a) Move cursor to the parameter to be set;
b) Type a corresponding value as required;
c) Press for confirmation.

2) Graph interface: Press [ Graph] to enter the graph interface. (See Fig.3-5-2):
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-5-2
Press , , , to move the graphic display area, and the display boundary will
expand 1 time at most.
In graph page, it is allowed to monitor the machining track of program in operation.
A. Press [start] or to start drawing. At this point, ‗*‘ number moves to S: before drawing
starts;
B. Press [Stop] or to stop drawing. At this point, ‗*‘ number moves to T: before drawing
stops;
C. Once [switch] is pressed, the graph switches between coordinates corresponding to 0 ~ 1.
D. Press [clear] or to clear the graph drawn.
3.6 Diagnosis Display

The state of DI/DO signal between CNC and machine tool, state of signal between CNC and PLC,
PLC internal data, and CNC internal state are displayed on diagnosis page. For the meaning and
setting method of each diagnosis number, please refer to GSK 980TDHi CNC System and PLC
Installation & Connection Manual.
This part of diagnosis is non-modifiable and used for detecting the operating conditions of interface
signal and internal signal of CNC.
202
Press to enter the diagnosis display interface. This page contains 5 sub- interfaces: [
Signal], [System], [Bus], [DSP], and [ waveform], which can be viewed through corresponding
softkeys (See Fig.3-6-1).
Fig.3-6-1
3.6.1 Diagnosis data display
Part Two Operations

3.6.1.1 Display of signal parameters
Press [Signal] to enter the signal diagnosis interface, which is shown below (See
Fig.3-6-1-1-1~Fig.3-6-1-1-4).
a. F signal interface: On <Diagnosis> interface, press [F Signal] to enter the diagnosis
(NC→PLC) interface, as shown in Fig.3-6-1-1-1:
Fig.3-6-1-1-1
This is the signal system gives to PLC. For the meaning and setting method of each diagnosis
number, please refer to GSK 980TDHi CNC System and PLC Installation & Connection Manual.
b. G signal interface: On <Diagnosis> interface, press [G Signal] to enter the diagnosis
(PLC→NC) interface, as shown in Fig.3-6-1-1-2:
203
Fig.3-6-1-1-2
This is the signal PLC gives to system. For the meaning and setting method of each diagnosis
c. X signal interface: On <Diagnosis> interface, press [X Signal] to enter the diagnosis (MT→PLC)
interface, as shown in Fig.3-6-1-1-3:
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-6-1-1-3
This is the signal machine tool gives to PLC. For the meaning and setting method of each diagnosis
4, Y signal interface: On <Diagnosis> interface, press [Y Signal] to enter the (PLC→MT) interface, as
shown in Fig.3-6-1-1-4:
204
Fig.3-6-1-1-4
This is the signal PLC gives to machine tool. For the meaning and setting method of each diagnosis
3.6.1.2 Display of system parameters

Press [System] to enter the system signal diagnosis interface, which is shown below (See
Fig.3-6-1-2-1).
Part Two Operations

Fig.3-6-1-2-1
3.6.1.3 Display of bus parameters

Press [Bus] to enter the bus signal diagnosis interface, which is shown below (See Fig.3-6-1-3-1).
205
Fig.3-6-1-3-1
3.6.1.4 Display of DSP parameters
Press [DSP] to enter the system signal diagnosis interface, which is shown below (See
Fig.3-6-1-4-1).
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-6-1-4-1
3.6.1.5 Display of waveform parameters
Press [Waveform] to enter the waveform interface, as shown in Fig.3-6-1-5-1:
Fig.3-6-1-5-1
206
Axis selection: Select the axis for waveform diagnosis.

Waveform selection: Select the content of waveform for diagnosis.
Horizontal axis and longitudinal axis scale: Select the scale of graph to be drawn.
Data: In any mode, input corresponding data and press for confirmation.
Press <start> to start signal monitoring, and <stop> to stop it.
3.6.2 Viewing of signal state
1) Press to select corresponding display page.

2) There are corresponding address explanation and meaning at lower left of screen during left &
right moving of cursor.
3) Move cursor or input the parameter address to be searched, and then press . You can
find the target address.
4) [Waveform] interface can display the speed, acceleration, and jerk of each feed axis, in order for
debugging and to obtain the best fitting parameters for drive and motor.
Part Two Operations

3.7 Alarm Display
In the case a system exception alarm, the ―alarm‖ message is displayed at lower left of screen. In this
case, press to display alarm page. It contains 4 display interfaces: [alarm], [user], [history],
[resume], which are switched through corresponding softkeys (See Fig.3-7-1 ~ Fig.3-7-4). It is
allowed to set whether to switch to alarm interface or not in the case of an alarm, through Bit Para N0:
24#6.
1. Alarm interface: On <alarm> interface, press [alarm] to enter the alarm interface, as shown in
Fig.3-7-1:
Fig.3-7-1
Alarm display page displays the details of current P/S alarm number. See Appendix II.
2. User interface: On <alarm> interface, press [user] to enter the external alarm interface, as shown
207
in Fig.3-7-2:
Fig.3-7-2
For details of each user alarm message, please refer to GSK 980TDHi CNC System and PLC
Installation & Connection Manual.
Note: For external alarms, the user can set and edit the alarm number independently according to actual conditions.
The alarm content after editing is inputted by system transmission software to system. External alarms are to edit A of
file LadChi**.txt, and the latter two digits are set according to the bit parameters 53.0 ~ 53.3. (default is 01, i.e.,
Part Two Operations
filename is LadChi01.txt)
3. History interface: On <alarm> interface, press [history] to enter the historical alarm message
interface, as shown in Fig.3-7-3:
Fig.3-7-3
On this interface, messages are arranged from latest to earliest, for the convenience of user viewing.
4. Resume interface: On <alarm> interface, press [resume] to enter the resume interface, as shown
in Fig.3-7-4:
operation resume interfaces display the information on modification of system parameters and ladder
graph, including modification content and modification time.
208
Fig.3-7-4
An operation resume has 34 pages, including 9 pages of historical alarm messages such as alarm
time, alarm number, alarm message, and page number, which are viewed through PgUp PgDn.
The history and resume records can be deleted through (if the password level is
debugging or higher).
Part Two Operations

3.8 Ladder Graph Display
Press to enter the following ladder graph display page, containing 5 display interfaces:
[ladder graph information], [ladder Graph], [ ladder graph parameter], [signal diagnosis ], [ signal
tracking], which can be switched through corresponding softkeys (See Fig.3-8-1 ~ 3-8-5).
Fig.3-8-1
209
Fig.3-8-2
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-8-3
Fig.3-8-4
210
Fig.3-8-5
Note: For modification method and information related to PLC ladder graph, please refer to GSK 980TDHi CNC
System and PLC Installation & Connection Manual .
3.9 Help Display
Part Two Operations

Press to enter the help display page. This page contains 8 display interfaces: [system
information] [Operations] [Alarms] [G Codes] [Parameter List] [Macro Command] [ PLC.AD]
[Calculator], which can be viewed through corresponding softkeys, as shown below (See Fig.3- 9- 1 ~
3- 9- 12).
1. System information interface: On <Help> interface, press [system information] to enter the system
information interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-1:
Fig.3-9-1
2. Operation table interface: On <Help> interface, press [Operations] to enter the help information
(operation table) interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-2:
211
Fig.3-9-2
Help information (operation table) interface introduces various operation procedures and methods on
different interfaces in detail. One that is unfamiliar with or unclear about operations can search and
check corresponding procedures and methods on help interface.
3. Alarm table interface: On <Help> interface, press [Alarms] to enter the help information (alarm
table) interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-3:
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-9-3
This interface introduces the meaning and treatment method of each alarm number in detail.
4. G code table interface: On <Help> interface, press [G Codes] to enter the help information (G code
table) interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-4:
212
Fig.3-9-4
G code interface introduces the definition of each G code used by system. Select a G code to be
viewed with cursor, and you will see its definition at lower left of interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-4. For
concrete format and usage about G code, select a G code and press on panel. Then,
Part Two Operations

press to get back, as shown in Fig.3-9-5:
Fig.3-9-5
This interface introduces the format, function, description, and restriction of code in detail. On this
interface, one that is unfamiliar with or unclear about codes can searched and search and check
them.
5. Parameter list interface: On <Help> interface, press [Parameter List] to enter the help information
(parameter/diagnosis table) interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-6:
213
Fig.3-9-6
This interface introduces the parameter setting pf each function in detail. One that unfamiliar with or
unclear about parameter setting can search and check settings on this interface.
6. Macro command interface: Press to enter the [Macro Command] help information
(macro command table) interface, as shown in Fig.3-9-7:
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-9-7
This interface introduces the format and operation codes of macro commands and provides the
setting range of local variable, general variable, and system variable. One that is unfamiliar with or
unclear about macro command mathematical operations can search and check related information
on this interface.
7. PLC.AD interface: On <Help> interface, press [PLC.AD] to enter the help information (PLC
address table) interface. PLC address interface contains 4 sub- interface: [F Signal], [G Signal], [X
Signal], [Y signal], as follows (See Fig.3-9-8 ~ 3-9-11).
214
Fig.3-9-8
Part Two Operations

Fig.3-9-9
Fig.3-9-10
215
Fig.3-9-11
PLC address interface introduces PLC address, symbol, significance in detail. One that is unfamiliar
with or unclear about PLC address can search and check related information on this interface.
8. Motor table interface: On <Help> interface, press [Motor Table] to enter the motor table interface,
as shown in Fig.3-9-12:
Part Two Operations
Fig.3-9-12
9. Calculator interface: On <Help> interface, press [Calculator] to enter the calculator interface, as
shown in Fig.3-9-13
216
Fig.3-9-13
On this interface, system gives the operation formats of addition, subtraction, multiplication, division,
sine, cosine, and radication. Input the required value through number keys and press <MDI>. System
will compute the result automatically. If it is required to input data again for computation, press
to clear all data on the interface.
Part Two Operations
217
Chapter 4 Manual Operation
Press to enter the manual operation mode, including manual feed, spindle control, and
machine tool panel control.
4.1 Motion of Coordinate Axis

In manual operation mode, an axis can move at manual feed speed or manual fast motion speed.
4.1.1 Manual feed
In <manual mode>, hold the feed axis or and corresponding axis starts moving. Its
movement speed may vary with the adjustment of feed magnification. Once the key is released, axis
movement stops. The same goes for Z-axis. This system supports the simultaneous movement of
two axes or the simultaneous zero returning of all axes.
Part Two Operations
Note: The manual feed speed of each axis is set through P98.
4.1.2 Manual fast motion
Turn on the indicator light by pressing , and system enters manual fast motion state. Then,
press the axis key in feed direction and each axis moves at the speed of fast motion.
Note 1: The speed of manual fast motion is set through P170~ P173.
Note 2: Whether manual fast motion is effective or not before an axis returns to the reference point through Bit Para
N0:12#0.
4.1.3 Speed selection for manual feed and manual fast motion
In the case of manual feed, it is allowed to select the manual feed magnification from 21 levels
(0%--200%), through keys on operation panel.
In the case of manual fast motion, it is allowed to select the magnification of manual fast motion
speed from 4 levels (F0, 25%, 50%, 100%) through . (F0 speed is
set through Num Para P93).
Note: The selection of rapid magnification is valid for the following movement speeds.
(1) G00 rapid feed (2) rapid feed in fixed cycle
(3) G28 rapid feed (4) rapid feed in manual mode
For example, given that the rapid feed speed is 6 m/min, the speed is 3 m/min if magnification is 50%.
4.1.4 Manual intervention
If a program operating in automatic mode or in MDI mode is switched to manual mode after feed hold,
manual intervention is allowed. Move all axes, and switch the operation mode to original one. It the
218
program movement starts through , each axis returns to original manual intervention
point rapidly in G00 mode before continuous movement.
Detailed explanation:
1. If a single block is connected during returning, the tool will perform single-block pause at manual
intervention point.
2. In the case of an alarm or resetting during manual intervention or returning, this function will be
canceled.
3. In the case of manual intervention, be careful with the functions of machine tool such as lock,
mirror, and scaling.
4. During manual intervention, pay attention to the machining process and workpiece shape, so as to
protect tool or machine tool from being damaged.
Actions for manual intervention are shown below:
1.1、N1程序段切削工件。
Cut the workpiece in N1 program segment.
刀具
Cutter
N2
Part Two Operations

Start point of Workpiece
工件
program
程序段起点 N1
segment
2. At the midpoint A of N1 program segment, press Feed Hold
2、在N1程序段的中间点A，按下进给保持开关使机床停止运动。
Switch to stop machine motion.
刀具
Cutter
N2
Workpiece
工件
N1 A
3.3、手动将刀具移动到点B，然后使机床运动重新开始。
Move cutter to B manually, and then restart machine motion.
刀具
Cutter
B
Manual
手动干预
intervention N2
Workpiece
工件
N1 A
4.4、刀具以G00的速度自动返回A点后，执行N1段程序的剩余部分。
After cutter gets back t o A point automatically at G00 speed,
execute the rest part of N1 program segment.
B
刀具
Cutter
N2
Workpiece
工件
N1 A
Fig.4-1-4-1
219
4.2 Spindle Control

4.2.1 Counter-clockwise rotation of spindle
: If S speed is given in MDI mode, spindle rotates counterclockwise after this key is
pressed in manual/manual pulse/single-step mode.
4.2.2 Clockwise rotation of spindle
: If S speed is given in MDI mode, spindle rotates clockwise after this key is pressed in
manual/manual pulse/single-step mode.
4.2.3 Spindle stop
: Spindle stops rotation after this key is pressed in manual/manual pulse/single-step

mode.
4.2.4 Automatic gear shifting of spindle

Part Two Operations
Select variable-frequency control or I/O point control of spindle through Bit Para NO:1#2. When
NO:1#2=0, spindle realizes automatic gear shifting with its speed controlled by S speed command. At
present, system has three gears and corresponding maximum speeds are set through different
parameters (P246, P247, P248) respectively. When NO:1#2=1, the gear of spindle speed is shifted
automatically under I/O point control. At present, system has three gears (S1, S2, S3), and it is
allowed to modify the ladder graph to increase the gear output. After executing S speed according to
the command, system will select corresponding gear automatically.
Spindle
主轴电机速度motor speed
Maximum speed (10

最高速度（10V)
V)
Maximum clamping
主轴电机最
speed of spindle
motor 高箝位速度
Minimum
主轴电机最
clamping speed
低箝位速度 Spindle revolution
of spindle motor 主轴回转指令
command
（S指令）
(S command)
Gear 1齿轮1 齿轮2
Gear
Gear12 齿轮3Gear 3
最大转速Maximum
Maximum speed 最大转速
Maximum speed 最大转速
speed Maximum speed
Fig.4-2-4-1
Note: If automatic gear shifting control is effective, system detects the spindle gear and executes S code via gear
shifting in-place signal.
220
4.3 Other Manual Operations

4.3.1 Coolant control
: Coolant switches on and off. It switches on when its indicator light is on; it switches off
when its indicator light is off.
4.3.2 Lubrication control
: Lubrication is on when this lubrication key is held or when corresponding indicator light
is on; it is off when this key is released or when corresponding indicator light is off.
4.3.3 Chuck control
: In manual mode, push foot switch to release the chuck. It is displayed on [position]
interface that chuck is released. Push foot switch again to lock chuck. It is displayed on [position]
interface that chuck is locked.
Part Two Operations

4.3.4 Tailstock control
: The machine tool tailstock switches between forward / backward. It goes forward when
corresponding indicator light is on; it goes backward when corresponding indicator light is off.
4.3.5 Manual tool changing control
: In manual/manual pulse/single-step mode, press this key and the tool rest will rotate to
next tool. The total number of tool places can be viewed on [DATA] interface, which is entered
through [+ladder graph parameter] under <ladder graph >. (Refer to the machine manufacturer‘s
specification)
4.4 Tool Setting Operation

Generally, machining of one part requires the use of different cutters. Due to installation and deviation,
the nose of a tool rotating to the cutting position cannot coincide with that of another tool completely.
In order to neglect deviation between cutters in programming, this system sets the tool setting
method that is generated by tool bias automatically to simplify the tool setting operation. After tool
setting operation, the user can edit programs according to part drawings and machining process
without considering the deviation between tools. What the user needs to do is calling corresponding
tool compensation value. This system sets many modes, including tool setting through trial cutting
and tool setting for machine tool zeroing.
221
4.4.1 Fixed-point tool setting
During bias setting on interface, if only the address key U(or W) is typed before the pressing
of , then current relative coordinate is set as the bias corresponding to that address.
X
X
F 135
F 135
Z Z
178 178
Fig.A Fig.B
Fig.4-4-1-1
Before fixed-point tool setting, it is required to establish a workpiece coordinate system.
The operation procedure is given below:

Part Two Operations
1) Select any tool, without an offset (generally the first tool in machining) as the benchmark tool;
2) Locate the nose of benchmark tool at some point on workpiece (tool setting point), as shown in
Fig.A;
3) Clear relative coordinate (U, W) so that its value is zero (See 3.1.1 for details);
4) Press followed by and/or to move cursor. Select a bias number as the bias
number of benchmark tool. First, verify whether the offsets in X and Z directions are zero. If not, clear
them as stated below:
Move cursor to select No.001 ~ 099 tool biases. Input X0 and Z0 to clear the offsets separately.
5) After the tool is moved to a safe position, select another tool and move it to the tool setting point, as
shown in Fig.B;
6) Press and move cursor to select a bias number from 001 ~ 099 as the bias number of that
tool. Verify whether the offsets in X and Z directions are zero. If not, clear them as stated in 4) above;
7) Press the address key followed by , and the offset in X direction will be placed
behind corresponding bias number;
8) Press the address key followed by , and the offset in Z direction will be placed
behind corresponding bias number;
9) Repeat steps 5) ~ 8) to complete the offset setting of other cutters.
4.4.2 Tool setting through trial cutting
Where the workpiece coordinate system does not change, tool setting can be conducted through trial
222
cutting. The operation procedure is given below (workpiece end face taken as coordinate system).
表面 B B
Surface
表面 AA
Surface
α Z
‘；
‘7
77
‘
‘
X
Fig.4-4-2-1
1、 Select any tool (supposing it is No.1 tool), without an offset;

2、 Cut A surface in the negative X-axis in manual mode;
3、 When Z-axis does not move, press ―positive X-axis‖ to release tool and stop spindle rotation;
4、 Press to enter the bias display interface. Move cursor through and/or
to select No.1 bias number as the bias number of that tool;
Part Two Operations

5、 Type address key ―Z‖, number key ―0‖ and successively;
6、 In manual mode, press ―negative Z-axis‖ to cut the workpiece along B surface;
7、 When X-axis does not move, press ―positive Z-axis‖ to release tool and stop spindle rotation;
8、 Measure the diameter "α‘" (supposing α‘=30);
9、 Press to enter the bias display interface. Move cursor through and/or
to select No.1 bias number;
10、 Type address key ―X‖, number keys ―3‖ and ―0‖, and successively;
11、 Move tool to the safe tool changing position;
12、 Replace the tool by another tool (supposing it is No.2 tool), without an offset;
Surface
表面 B1 B1
表面 A1A1
Surface
α ’ Z
‘；
‘7 β ’
77
‘
‘ X
Fig.4-4-2-2
13、 In manual mode, press ―negative X-axis‖ to cut the workpiece along A1 surface.
14、 When Z-axis does not move, press ―positive X-axis‖ to release tool and stop spindle rotation
and stop spindle rotation.
223
15、 Measure the distance ―β‖ between A1 surface and workpiece coordinate system ―β‖
supposing β=1).
16、 Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select
No.2 bias number.
17、 Type address key ―Z‖, symbolic key ―-‖, number key ―1‖, and successively.
18、 In manual mode, press ―negative Z-axis‖ to cut the workpiece along B1 surface.
19、 When X-axis does not move, press ―positive Z-axis‖ to take out tool and stop spindle rotation.
20、 The measured diameter "α" is supposed to be α‘=28).
21、 Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select
No.2 bias number.
22、 Type address key ―X‖, number keys ―2‖ and ―8‖, and successively.
23、 For the tool setting of other cutters, repeat 11 ~ 22.
Part Two Operations
4.4.3 Tool setting of machine zero return
With this tool setting method, tools are not all the same, not containing benchmark tool. In the case of
tool abrasion or adjustment of any tool, what the user need is to conduct tool setting again. Tool
setting follows machine tool zeroing (For machine zero point, please see 9.1 of this manual). Once
energized after power-off, the machine is required to return to its zero point before continuous
machining, which is simple and convenient.
X
表面 B B
Surface
表面 A A
Surface
α Z
X0
α
Z0 。机床零点
Machine zero
α
Fig.4-4-3-1
224
1） Press to enter the operation mode of machine tool zeroing. Then, press ―positive
X-axis‖ followed by ―positive Z-axis‖ to get these two axes to the machine zero point once;
表面 B B
Surface
表面 AA
Surface
α Z
Fig.4-4-2-2
2） Select any tool (supposing it is No.1 tool), without an offset;
3） In manual mode, press ―negative X-axis‖ to cut the workpiece along A surface;
4） In the situation where Z-axis does not move, release tool along the positive X-axis and stop
Part Two Operations

spindle rotation;
5） Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select No.1
bias number as the bias number of that tool;
6） Type the address key ―Z‖, number key ―0‖, and successively;
7） In manual mode, press ―negative Z-axis‖ to cut the workpiece along B surface;
8） In the situation where X-axis does not move, release tool along the positive Z-axis and stop
spindle rotation;
9） The measured diameter "α" is supposed to be α‘=30);
10) Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select No.1
bias number to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select No.1 bias
number;
11) Type the address key ―X‖, number keys ―3‖ and ―0‖, and successively;
12) Move tool to the safe tool changing position;
13) Replace the tool by another tool (supposing it is No.2 tool), without an offset;
225
Surface
表面 B1 B1
Surface
表面 A1A1
α ’ Z
‘；
‘7 β ’
77
‘
‘
X
Fig.4-4-3-3
14) In manual mode, press negative X-axis to cut the workpiece along A1 surface;
15) In the situation where Z-axis does not move, release tool along positive X-axis and stop spindle
rotation;
16) Measure the distance between A1 surface and workpiece coordinate system (supposing β‘=1);
17) Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select No.2 bias
number;
Part Two Operations
18) Type the address key ―Z‖, symbolic key ―-‖, number key ―1‖, and successively.
19) In manual mode, press ―negative Z-axis‖ to cut the workpiece along B1 surface;
20) In the situation where X-axis does not move, withdraw tool along positive Z-axis and stop spindle
rotation;
21) Measure the diameter "α‘" (supposing α‘=28);
22) Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor through and/or to select No.2
bias number;
23) Type the address key ―X‖, number keys ―2‖ and ―8‖, and successively.
24) For the tool setting method of other cutters, repeat 12~23.
4.5 Adjustment of Compensation Values

During modification and adjustment, offsets can only be inputted through U and W. For example, the
offset on X-axis need be increased by 0.010mm. Press to enter the bias page. Move cursor
through and/or to select some bias number behind 001. Input U0.010 and then press
. The system will add 0.010 mm automatically to original offset.
226
Chapter 5 Single-Step Operations
Chapter 5 Single-Step Operations
5.1 Single-Step Feed
When PLC K parameter K017#1 is set to 1(1: single-step mode), press to enter the
single-step mode. In this mode, machine moves a distance equal to the selected step length at a
time.
5.1.1 Amounts of movement selection
Press any of keys to select a movement increment, which is

displayed on the page. For example, press F0% and <position> interface will display the single-step
step length: 0.0001. (See Fig.5-1-1-1)
Part Two Operations

Fig.5-1-1-1
Every time a movement key is pressed, corresponding axis of machine tool moves 0.1 mm.
5.1.2 Selection of shifting axis and movement direction
Press the direction key or of feed axis. Arrow keys of X-axis can make X-axis move
in the positive or negative direction. Every time a key is pressed, corresponding axis moves a
distance that the system defines for a single step; the same goes for Z-axis. This system supports
both simultaneous movement and simultaneous zeroing of two axes.
5.1.3 Specification for single-step feed
The maximum clamping speed of single-step feed is set through Num Para P155.
The single-step feed speed is not controlled by feed magnification or rapid magnification.
5.2 Auxiliary Control during Single-Step Operations

It‘s the same as the manual operation mode; see 4.2 and 4.3 of this manual for details.
227
Part Two Operations
228
Chapter 6 Manual Pulse Operations
When PLC K parameter K017#1 is set to 0 (0: manual pulse mode), press to enter the
manual pulse mode. In this mode, machine tool moves a distance equal to selected step length at a
time.
6.1 Manual Pulse Feed
Press any of keys to select a movement increment, which is

displayed on the page. For example, press 25% and <position> interface will display the manual
pulse increment: 0.0010. (See Fig.6-1-1):
Part Two Operations

Fig.6-1-1
6.1.1 Selection of shifting axis and movement direction
In manual pulse mode, select the shifting axis to be controlled by manual pulse and press
corresponding key ( , , ,, ). Then, the selected axis will move under manual
pulse control. Taking X-axis under manual pulse control for example, after is pressed, its light
flickers. At this time, the user can move X-axis through manual pulse. Generally speaking, the
clockwise rotation of manual pulse is in the positive direction of feed axis, and counter-clockwise
rotation of manual pulse is in the negative direction.
The feed direction under control of manual pulse (manual pulse generator) is determined by the
manual pulse rotation direction. See the machine manufacturer‘s specification for details. Generally
speaking, clockwise rotation under manual pulse control is the positive feed direction;
counter-clockwise rotation is the negative feed direction.
229
6.1.2 Specification for manual pulse feed
1. The relationship of manual pulse scales with machine tool shift is given below:
Table 6-1-2-1
Shift at each scale in manual pulse mode
Manual pulse
0.001 0.01 0.1
increment (mm)
Machine shift
0.001 0.01 0.1
(mm)
Manual pulse
0.001 0.01 0.1
increment (inch)
Machine shift
0.0001 0.001 0.01
(inch)
2. Data listed above vary with different mechanical transmission. See the machine manufacturer‘s
specification for details;
3. When Bit Para No.17#5 is set to 1, the selection of handing-pulse shift starts. The manual pulse
rotating speed cannot exceed 5 r/s. If it exceeds, there might be a phenomenon a scale does not
match the shift.
Part Two Operations
6.2 Control during Manual Pulse Interruption

6.2.1 Manual pulse interruption
In automatic mode and MDI mode, press [comprehensive] on [position] interface to enter the
comprehensive interface. Press [operation] followed by [interruption switch]. Select the manual pulse
axis number on panel to enter the state of manual pulse interruption for interruption operations. Press
[interruption switch] again to exit manual pulse.
In the state of manual pulse interruption, press , , , to select the axis.

When the manual-pulse interruption selection signal of some axis is ―1‖, this axis can be interrupted in
manual pulse mode. The equivalent of manual pulse interruption is equal to that of manual pulse
feed.
The speed at the time of manual pulse interruption is the sum of automatic operation speed and
speed in manual pulse interruption. However, its stacking velocity should not go beyond the
maximum speed of cutting & feeding of that axis. For example, given that the maximum manual pulse
speed is 2,000 mm/min, if the current feeding speed is 2,000 mm/min, then the speed range of
manual pulse interruption is 4,000 ~ 0 mm/min (the minus represents the manual-pulse interruption
moving direction is opposite to the feeding direction)
(For the coordinate system of manual pulse interruption, see Fig.6-2-1-2.)
230
Fig.6-2-1-2
Operation procedures for manual pulse interruption and coordinate system zeroing: Press .
Move cursor downwards until the X-axis of coordinate system of manual pulse interruption flickers.
Press to clear the coordinate system. The same goes for Z-axis. While executing zeroing,
Part Two Operations

the coordinate system will also be cleared automatically.
Note: If an alarm or resetting occurs during the adjustment of coordinate system based on manual pulse interruption,
the manual pulse interruption function is canceled.
6.2.2 Relationship of manual pulse interruption with other functions
When manual pulse interruption makes an axis move, the actual position of shifting axis changes and
the coordinate of machine tool is updated, but its absolute coordinate is not updated. Therefore, after
manual pulse interruption, the trailer moves. Then, the machine coordinate system will keep still,
while the workpiece coordinate system will shift.
Table 6-2-2-1
Display Relationship
Once machine tool latching is
machine tool latching enabled, the moving trailer in manual
pulse interruption is invalid.
The change in absolute coordinate
absolute coordinate value value is the displacement resulting
from manual pulse interruption.
The change in relative coordinate
relative coordinate value value is the displacement resulting
from manual pulse interruption.
The change in machine coordinate
Machine coordinate value value is the displacement resulting
from manual pulse rotation.
Note: When axes return to reference points manually, the shift in manual pulse interruption is cleared.
231
6.2.3 Cancellation of manual pulse interruption
Cancellation of interruption means that through manual pulse interruption the workpiece coordinate
system shifting from machine coordinate system returns to the position before shifting.
When interruption is canceled, the workpiece coordinate system shifts a distance equal to manual
pulse interruption and reflects manual pulse interruption in absolute coordinate.
The shift of workpiece coordinate system resulting from manual pulse interruption is shown below:
Position before handwheel interruption
手轮中断前的位置
Coordination system before handwheel interruption

手轮中断前的工件坐标系
手轮中断量
Handwhe
el
interruptio
n volume
手轮中断后的位置
Position after handhwheel interruption
机床坐标系
Machine tool coordinate system
When manual pulse interruption is canceled, the workpiece coordinate system restores to the state
before interruption, without any change in actual position, which are shown below:
Part Two Operations
Workpiece coordination system before handwheel interruption

手轮中断前的工件坐标系
Interruption
中断量取消 volume cancelled
手轮中断取消后的件坐标系
Workpiece coordination system after cancelling handwheel interruption
手轮中断取消前的工件坐标系
Workpiece coordination system before cancelling handwheel interruption
Machine
机床坐标系tool coordinate system
In any of the following cases, it is allowed to cancel interruption:

 Coordinate axes returns to reference points in manual mode.
 G28 command is specified before a reference point is determined.
 An interruption quantity is cleared through [interruption clear].
6.3 Auxiliary Control during Manual Pulse Operations
The same as manual operation mode, see 4.2 and 4.3 of operating instructions.
6.4 Manual Pulse Trial Cutting
Part programs are controlled through manual turning of manual pulse, and the machine is operated
along the tool path instructed by machine program. Mostly, this function is used for trial cutting of
workpiece and detection of machine program.
232
Operation method:
In automatic mode, open manual pulse trial cutting. After is pressed, any axis of system
stops moving. In this case, turn manual pulses to control the operation of part program. The faster
manual pulses turn, the faster the program executes an command. The slower manual pulses turn,
the slower the program executes an command. The shift of each manual pulse can be adjusted
through rapid magnification.
In manual pulse trial cutting mode, if is pressed again, the operation mode returns to
automatic mode. All operations in manual pulse test cutting mode are the same as in automatic
mode.
Speeds at which the interpolation command is executed in the state of manual pulse trial cutting.
G0: current rapid magnification × manual pulse magnification × manual pulse speed
G1: cutting magnification × manual pulse magnification × manual pulse speed
Note 1: Effective after manual pulse trial cutting is enabled.
Note 2: Effective for single-block pause in single-block mode.
Part Two Operations
233
Chapter 7 Automatic Operations
7.1 Selection of Automatic Running Program

1. Automatic mode loading program
(a) Press to enter the automatic operation mode;
(b) Press to enter the [catalog] page. Move cursor to find the target program;
(c) Press for confirmation.

2. Editing mode loading program
(a) Press to enter the editing operation mode;

Part Two Operations
(b) Press to enter the [catalog] page. Move cursor to find the target program;
(c) Press for confirmation.
(d) Press to enter the automatic operation mode;
7.2 Initiation of Automatic Running
After selection of the program to be initiated with two methods stated in 7.1, press
(circulation start-up) to start automatic running. It is allowed to switch to <position>, <program
monitoring>, or <graph> interface to observe program running.
Since program running starts from the line of cursor, it is better to check whether cursor is located on
the program line or not and whether modal values are correct or not before pressing
(circulation start-up). If automatic running need start from the start line, where cursor is not located, it
is required to press followed by (circulation start-up).

Note: During program running in automatic mode, it is not allowed to modify the workpiece coordinate system or basic
bias.
7.3 Stop of Automatic Running

To stop the program in automatic running, system provides 5 methods:
1. Program stops (M00)
When executing the block with M00, the program pauses, with modal information stored. After
234
(circulation start-up) is pressed, the program continues execution.

2. Program selection stops (M01)
If is pressed before program running, the program pauses when executing the block
containing M01, with modal information stored. After (circulation start-up) is pressed, the
program continues execution.
3. Press (feed hold)
During automatic running, after (feed hold) is pressed the machine tool presents the
following states:
1) Machine tool feeding slows down to stop;
2) When execution pauses (G04 code), timing stops and the machine goes into the state of feed
hold;
3) Other modal information is stored;
Part Two Operations

4) After (circulation start-up) is pressed, the program continues execution.
4. Press .
See 2.3.1 of Operating Instructions.
5. Press EMERGENCY STOP.
See 2.3.2 of Operating Instructions.
In addition, a program running on MDI interface in automatic mode or in MDI mode can also stop if it
is switched to another mode. Particular cases are given below:
1) The machine stops after running current block, if switched to editing or input interface.
2) The machine stops immediately, interrupting current operation, if switched to an interface in
manual, manual pulse, or single-step mode.
3) The machine slows down to stop if switched to the mechanical zero return interfaces.
7.4 Automatic Running from Any Block

The system supports automatic running from any block of current machine program. Its operation
procedure is detailed below:
1、 Press to enter the manual mode. Initiate the spindle and other miscellaneous functions;
2、 Run modal values of the program in MDI mode. It is required to ensure all modal values are
correct;
3、 Press to enter the editing operation mode. Press to enter the program
page. Find the program to be machined in [catalog];
4、 Open the program. Move cursor to the block to be run;
235
5、 Press to enter the automatic operation mode;
6、 Press (circulation start-up) to start automatic running.

Note 1. Before program running, it is required to confirm the current coordinate is where last block stops running (If the
running block is G00/G01 movement in absolute programming, confirmation is not required).
Note 2. If the running block is such movement as tool changing, it is required to confirm previously that the current
position will not collide with the workpiece, in case of machine damage and fatal accident.
7.5 Dry Running
Before program machining, it is allowed to adopt ―dry running‖, generally in combination with
―auxiliary lock‖ and ―machine lock‖, to check the program.
Press to enter the automatic operation mode. Press (That the indicator light is on
this key means the state of dry running).).
: program speed in rapid feed = dry running speed × rapid feed magnification.
: actual cutting speed of program screw thread in cutting feed = F*S (S is a programming value) F/S
is the current mode.
Note 1: The dry running speed is set through Num Para P86;
Part Two Operations
Note 2: Whether dry running is valid or not during cutting feed is set through Bit Para NO:12#6;
Note 3: Whether dry running is valid or not in rapid positioning is set through Bit Para NO:12#7.
7.6 Single-Block Running

Select ―program single block‖ running for detection of program single-block running.
In automatic and MDI mode, press (That the indicator light is on this key means the state of
dry running). During single-block running, the system stops running every time it finishes the
execution of one block. Press (circulation start-up) to continue executing next block. Repeat
this process until the program finishes running.
Note 1: In G28, single block stop is all the same at the midpoint.
Note 2: When the single-block program is ON, execute fixed cycles G90, G92, G70—G75 as follows:
236
Table 7-6-1
G
Tool Path Explanation
Code
Actions 1 ~ 4
4 4
form a cycle.
1 1 The program
G90 3 3 stops running at
2 the end of Action
2 4.
4 Actions 1 ~ 4
4
form a cycle.
1 1
3 3 The program
G92
2 stops running at
2
the end of Action
4.
Actions 1 ~ 4
1 1 form a cycle.
2 2 The program
Part Two Operations

G94 4 4
stops running at
3 3 the end of Action
4.
Actions 1 ~ 7
form a cycle.
The program
G70
stops running at
the end of
Motion 7.
4
1 ~ 4, 5 ~ 8, 9 ~
3
2 1 12, 13 ~ 16, and
8 17 ~ 20 form a
21 7
5
6 cycle. The
11
12 program stops
G71, 21
10
9
running at the
G72 21 16
15
13
end of cycle.
14
21 20
19
17
18
21
Note: This figure shows the case of G71, the same as G72.
6 Actions 1 ~ 6
5
form a cycle.
4
G73 3 2 1 The program
stops runnig at
the end of cycle.
237
G
Tool Path Explanation
Code
9 1 Actions 1 ~ 10
form a cycle.
2 The program
G74, 10 stops runnig at
G75 the end of cycle.
Actions 1 ~ 4, 5
11 9 ~ 8, and 9 ~ 12
10 form a cycle.
7 5 The program
6 stops runnig at
G76 3 1 the end of cycle.
2
4(8/12)
7.7 Locked Running of Machine

Part Two Operations
In <automatic> mode, press (The indicator lighting up means the machine is locked). Now,
any axis of machine does not move but its position coordinate displayed as if the machine were
moving. Besides, M, S, and T can be executed. This function is used for program checking.
7.8 Locked Running of Miscellaneous Functions
In <automatic> mode, press (The indicator lighting up means the miscellaneous function is
locked). In this case, M, S, or T code is not executed. This function is used for program checking
together with locked running of machine.
Note: M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 are executed as usual.
7.9 Adjustment of Feed and Fast Motion Speeds in Automatic Running

In <automatic> running, the system can change the movement speed by adjusting the magnification
of feed and fast motion.
In automatic running, the user can select the fast motion speed and rapid magnification through
to realize the adjustment of four levels: F0, 25%, 50%, 100%.
In automatic running, the user can also select the feed speed and feed magnification through
to realize the real-time adjustment of 21 levels.
Note 1: F setting in feed magnification adjustment program
238
Actual feed speed＝F setting × feed magnification

Note 2: The fast motion speed is obtained through adjustment of number parameters P88, P89, P90 and fast
magnification:
Actual fast motion speed on X-axis ＝ P88 setting × fast magnification
The actual fast motion speed on Z-axis is calculated in the same way.
7.10 Adjustment of Spindle Speed in Automatic Running

In automatic running, the spindle speed can be adjusted if it is controlled by an analog quantity.
In automatic running, the user can adjust the spindle magnification, through or , to
change the spindle speed and spindle magnification, so as to realize the real-time adjustment of 8
levels within 50% ~ 120%.
The speed magnification increases by one level every time is pressed, and each level is 10%.
The magnification will not increase any more if it reaches 120%;
The speed magnification decreases by one level every time is pressed, and each level is 10%.
The magnification will not increase any more if it reaches 50%.
Part Two Operations

7.11 Back-End Editing in Automatic Running
The system supports back-end editing during processing.
When the program runs in automatic mode, press <program > to enter the program display interface,
and then press [program] to enter the back-end editing interface, as shown in Fig.7-11-1:
Fig.7-11-1
Press [B. Edit] to enter the program back-end editing interface. The program is edited as same as in
editing mode. See Chapter 10 Program Editing Operations for details. Press [B. End] to save the
edited program before exiting.
In automatic mode, press [debugging] to check the program.
Note 1: The file to be edited at back end should have maximum 3,000 lines, or it will influence the processing effect.
Note 2: For back-end editing, a front-end program can be opened but cannot be edited or deleted.
Note 3: For back-end editing, a running front-end program cannot be edited.
239
Chapter 8 MDI Operations
In MDI mode, the system supports input and modification of parameters and biases, and also
provides MDI running function, through which it is allowed to input codes directly. Data input and
modification of parameters and biases are detailed in Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data
Modification & Setting. This chapter introduces the MDI running function among input operations.
8.1 Input of Code Segment in MDI

Input in MDI mode:
1. [MDI] supports continuous input of multiple blocks;
Input in [MDI] mode is shown below (See Fig.8-1-1), the same as program input in editing mode. See
Chapter 10 Program Editing Operations for details.
Part Two Operations
Fig.8-1-1
8.2 Running and Stop of Code Segment in MDI
After inputting code segments as stated in 8.1, press (circulation start-up) to start MDI
running. During running, it is allowed to press (feed hold) to stop code segment running.
Note 1: MDI running can only be conducted in MDI mode!
Note 2: It is allowed to input maximum 65 characters once.
Note 3: The maximum block that MDI program can edit is 1W.
8.3 Modification and Clearing of Code Segment Field Value in MDI
If there is a mistake in field input, the user can press to cancel input; if a mistake is found after
input, the user can either replace the wrong character by correct one or delete all characters by
pressing and input character again.
240
Chapter 8 MDI Operations
8.4 Switching of Running Modes

If a running program switches from automatic or MDI mode to MDI, automatic, or editing mode, the
system will stop program running after the end of current block.
If a running program pauses for a while before switching from automatic or MDI mode to manual
pulse mode, the system executes the function of manual pulse interruption. See 6.2 Manual Pulse
Interruption of this manual. If it switches to manual mode, the system executes the function of manual
intervention, as shown in 4.1.4 Manual Intervention.
If a running program switches from automatic or MDI mode immediately to single-step, manual pulse,
manual,zero return mode, the program slows down to stop.
Part Two Operations
241
Chapter 9 Zero Return
9.1 Machine Zero (Mechanical Zero)

The machine coordinate system is a intrinsic coordinate system of machine. Its origin, called
mechanical zero (or machine zero) and also called reference point in this manual, is the mechanical
origin specified by the machine manufacturer and generally mounted at the maximum stroke of
X-axis and Z-axis in positive direction. The CNC device is not at the mechanical origin when
energized, so it should return to the mechanical origin automatically or manually.
9.2 Zero Return of Program

Zero return of program is convenient for a programmer to use the workpiece coordinate system (also
called part coordinate system) during programming. The programmer selects a point as the program
zero (This point is specified through G50 code and called program zero) to establish a workpiece
coordinate system.
9.2.1 Procedure for program zero return

Part Two Operations
1. Press to enter the program zero return mode. At this point, the lower right corner of LCD
screen displays ―program zero return‖.
2. Select X-axis or Z-axis that need return to program zero.
3. The workbench moves towards program zero. When it returns to program zero, the coordinate axis
stops moving and the zero return indicator lights up.

Note 1: Once energized, the system must execute G50, or it will give ＃0097alarm.
Note 2: When the machine lock is valid, execute program zero return, with absolute coordinate returning to G50
setting but mechanical coordinate constant. Please pay attention to that case.
Note 3: After setting Bit Para NO: 6#5 to 0, the user can conduct zero return through program command G28 because
the detection stroke baffle block is equivalent to manual mechanical zero return.
9.3 Zero Return Setting of Bus Servo

There are two zero return modes, which are stated below, for system configuration of bus servo:
common zero return and absolute zero setting.
9.3.1 Common zero return
Set Bit Para No: 0#0=1. The system can return to zero in common mode, with or without one
revolution of signals. This zero return mode can be used for system configuration of GE2000 series
increment mode version. In zero return mode, each axis is valid.
Procedure for mechanical zero return of bus servo:
(1) Press to enter the mechanical zero return mode. At this point, the lower right corner of
LCD screen displays ―mechanical zero return‖.
242
Chapter 9 Zero Return
(2) Select X-axis or Z-axis that need return to program zero. The zero return direction is set through
Bit Para N0:7#0 ~ N0:7#4。
(3) The machine moves towards mechanical zero fast (The movement speed is set through Num
Para P100 ~ P104) before the slowdown point. After it touches the slow-down switch, the movement
speed of each axis is set through Num Para P342~P346. After it gets rid of baffle block, the machine
moves to mechanical zero (namely reference point) at FL (set through Num Para P099) speed. When
the machine returns to mechanical zero, coordinate axes stop moving and the zero return indicator
lights up.
Note: Bit para P6.0 is only valid for incremental zero return.
9.3.2 Absolute zero setting and zero return
Absolute zero setting can be conducted on [ Bus Configuration] interface. See 3.3.5 Display,
Modification, and Setting of Bus Servo Parameters for details.
For absolute zero return, select the machine zero return mode and press X-axis and Z-axis. At
machine zero, the indicator lights up.
Examples:
For absolute encoder zero setting, it is allowed to set the zero according to the absolute position
motor feeds back, as shown in Fig.9-3-2-1.
Part Two Operations

Ne The zero point can be set at any place
gati between positive and negative hard limits .
ve Positive
limi limit
t
Fig.9-3-2-1 Absolute Encoder Zero Setting

Note 1: If there is not a zero return slowdown switch installed or a mechanical zero set on your machine, please do not
operate mechanical zero return.
Note 2: At the end of mechanical zero return, the indicator of corresponding axis lights up.
Note 3: When corresponding axis is not at mechanical zero, the zero return indicator light is out.
Note 4: For mechanical zero (namely reference point) direction, please refer to the machine manufacturer‘s
instructions for use.
Note 5: Do not modify the zero return direction, feed axis direction, or gear ratio of any axis after mechanical zero
setting.
Note 6: For parameters related to mechanical zero return and various mechanical zero return modes, see Chapter IV
Installation & Connection of PLC and Installation Booklet.
243
Chapter 10 Editing Operations
10.1 Program Editing
A part program should be edited in editing mode. Press to enter the editing mode; press
on panel to enter the program interface.Press [ program] softkey to enter the program
editing & modifying interface. (See Fig.10-1-1):
Part Two Operations
Press [] to enter next page

Press [] to enter next page
Press [] to return to last page
Fig.10-1-1
The program can be replaced, cut, copied, pasted, re-started through corresponding softkeys.
Before program editing, it is required to turn on program switch. For operation details, see 3.3.1 in this
part.
Note 1: A program file has maximum 10,000 lines.
Note 2: As shown in Fig.10-1-1, when there are more than one ―/‖ at the beginning of a block, the system can skip this
block even if the skip function is not opened.
Note 3: During debugging, the system cannot switch from automatic mode to another mode. Otherwise, the
consequence will be unexpected.
: Execute debugging in automatic mode. When there is a ―/‖ at the beginning of a block, the program line behind this
character will execute debugging even if the skip function is not opened.
10.1.1 Program establishing
10.1.1.1 Automatic generation of sequence number
Set ―automatic sequence number‖ to 1 as stated in 3.3.1 of this part (See Fig.10-1-1-1-1).
244
Fig.10-1-1-1-1
Then, the system will insert sequence numbers automatically between blocks during program editing.
The increment in sequence number can be set in sequence number increment.
Note: After insertion of a new block, new S/N＝ current sequence number increment × (line where this block is －1).
10.1.1.2 Program content input
Part Two Operations

1、 Press to enter the editing mode;
2、 Press to enter the program page. (See Fig.10-1-1-2-1):
Fig.10-1-1-2-1
3. Press address key followed by number keys , , , ,

(taking the establishing of O00002 program name for example). O00002 is displayed behind data
column, as shown below (See Fig.10-1-1-2-2):
245
Fig.10-1-1-2-2
4. Press to establish a new program name, as shown below (See Fig.10-1-1-2-3):

Part Two Operations
Fig.10-1-1-2-3
5. After a program is edited and inputted, the program is stored automatically when the system
switches to another mode. Before switching to another interface (for example, interface), it is
required to press to store the inputted program.

Note 1: In editing mode, the system does not support inputting of a single number.
Note 2: If a code inputted is wrong during program input, it is allowed to press to cancel the inputting of
wrong code.
Note 3: At a time, the inputted block has maximum 65 characters.
10.1.1.3 Retrieving of sequence number, word, and line number
Sequence number retrieving is to retrieve some sequence number in the program, generally used for
executing or editing the program from this number. Blocks that are skipped during retrieval do not
influence CNC state. (The coordinate, M, S, T code, G code, etc. in a block skipped do not influence
the coordinate or mode of CNC.)
If execution starts from some block in retrieved program, it is required to figure out the current
machine state and CNC state. The program cannot run unless it agrees with the setting of M, S, T
246
code, and coordinate system.

Word retrieving is used for retrieving a certain address or number in the program, generally used in
program editing.
Procedure of sequence number, word, line number retrieval in program:
1. Select the mode: <edit> or <automatic>.
2. Search the target program in [catalog].
3. Press to enter the target program.
4. Input the word or sequence number for retrieval. Press arrow key or to search
it.
5. For line number searching, input the required line number, and press for
confirmation.
Note 1: Sequence number or word retrieving is canceled automatically when it comes to the end of program.
Note 2: In [automatic] and [edit] modes, it is allowed to conduct retrieval of sequence number, word, and line number.
In [automatic] mode, however, retrieval can only be conducted on back-end editing interface.
10.1.1.4 Cursor positioning method
Part Two Operations

Select the editing mode. Press to display the program page.
a) Press to move cursor upward one line. If the current column is greater than the ending
column of last line, cursor moves to the tail of last line.
b) Press to move cursor downward one line. If the current column is greater than the
ending column of next line, cursor moves to the tail of next line.
c) Press to move cursor right one column. Cursor can move to the head of next line if it
is now at the tail of line.
d) Press to move cursor left one column. Cursor can move to the tail of last line if it is
now at the head of line.
e) Press to scroll up, and cursor will move to last screen.
f) Press to scroll down, and cursor will move to next screen.
g) Press , and cursor will move to the head of current line.
h) Press ＋ , and cursor will return to the beginning of program.
i) Press , and cursor will move to the tail of current line.
247
j) Press ＋ , and cursor will return to the end of program.
k) Double click on for letter switching.
10.1.1.5 Insertion, deletion, and modification of words
Select <edit> mode and press to display the program page. Locate cursor at the position for
editing;
1. Insertion of words
Input a datum and press . Then, the system will insert this datum to the left side of cursor;
2. Deletion of words
Locate cursor at the position for deletion and press . The system will delete the content where
cursor is.
3. Modification of words
Part Two Operations
Move cursor to the position to be modified. Input new content and press . The system will
replace the content selected by cursor by new input.
10.1.1.6 Deletion of one block
Select <edit> mode and press to enter the program page. Move cursor to the line head of
block to be deleted. Press ＋ , and the system will prompt ―Please press <delete> again‖.
The user can delete the block where cursor is by pressing on panel.
Note: A block, whether with a sequence number or not, can be deleted after the inputting of (cursor should be
at the head of line).
10.1.1.7 Modification of blocks
Delete the area from current word to the specified block.
N100 X100.0 M03 S2000; ..... N2233 S02 ; N 2300 M30 ;

光标现在位置
Current cursor position
To delete this area
要把此区域删除
Fig.10-1-1-7-1
Select <edit> mode and press to enter the program page. Locate cursor at the home position
of target to be deleted (for example, character N100 above). Then, input the last complete character
in multiple blocks to be deleted, S02 for example (See Fig.10-1-1-7-1). Press and the system
248
will prompt ―Please press <delete> again‖. Press on panel to delete the program from cursor
to marked address.
Note 1: The block deleted has maximum 10,000 lines.
Note 2: If many complete characters to be deleted are the same in the program, it is required to delete the program
from first complete character to cursor character in the order of downward searching.
Note 3: When many blocks are deleted using N+ sequence number, the home position of N+ sequence number must
be located at the head of that block.
10.1.1.8 Deletion of code words
Delete the program from current code word to specified code word.
N100 X100.0 M03 S2000; G01 X50.0 Y100.0 N2233 S02 ;

光标现在位置
Current cursor position
To delete this area
要把此区域删除
Fig.10-1-1-8-1
Select <edit> mode and press to enter the program page. Locate cursor at the home position
of target to be deleted (for example, character N100 above). Then, input the last complete characters
Part Two Operations

of multiple code words to be deleted, Y100.0 for example (See Fig.10-1-1-8-1). Press . The
system will prompt ―Please press <delete> again‖. Press on panel to delete the program from
cursor to marked address.
Note: If N+ sequence number is located at the middle of block, the system will process it as a code word.
10.1.2 Deletion of one program
Delete some program from memory, as follows:

a) Select <edit> mode;
b) Enter the program page. There are two deletion methods:
1. Type the address ; input the program name (Type number keys , , ,
. Taking O0002 program for example). Press to delete the corresponding program in
memory.
2. Select [catalog] interface on program interface. Select the program name to be deleted and press
. The system presents: ―Confirm deletion?‖ Then, press and the state column presents
―deletion success‖. It means the program selected is deleted.
Note: If only one program file exists, after the deletion key is pressed on program (catalog) interface in editing mode,
the program name will become O00001 and the program will be deleted no matter what it is. If many program files
exist, the name and content of No.O00001 program are deleted together.
249
10.1.3 Deletion of all programs
Delete all programs from memory, as follows:

b) Enter the program page;
c) Type the address ;
d) Type address keys , , , , , successively.
e) Press to delete all programs from memory.
10.1.4 Copying of program

a) Select <edit> mode.
b) Enter the program page; select the program to be copied using cursor on [catalog] interface.
Press to enter the program page;

Part Two Operations
c) Press the address key and input a new program number;

d) Press [copy]. When copying finishes, enter a new program editing interface.
e) Return to [catalog] to view the new program name.
f) Copy current program and save it under another program name.
A program can also copied on program editing page (as shown in Fig.10-1-1):
1. Press the address key and input a new program number;

2. Press [copy]. When copying finishes, enter a new program editing interface.
3. Return to [catalog] to view the new program name.
10.1.5 Copying and pasting of blocks
Procedure for block copy and paste:
a) Move cursor to the head of block to be copied.
b) Type the last character of block to be copied.
c) Press followed by or press [copy] directly, to finish copying the program from cursor
to input character.
d) Move cursor to the position of pasting. Press followed by or press [Paste] directly,
to finish pasting.
Note 1: If many complete characters to be copied are the same in the program, copy the program from the first
complete character to cursor character in downward searching order.
Note 2: If program copying uses N+ sequence number mode, copy the program from cursor beginning to N+sequence
number. The N+sequence number must be located at the head of block, or copying fails.
Note 3: The copied block can have maximum 10,000 lines.
250
10.1.6 Cutting and pasting of blocks

Procedure for block cut and paste:
a) Enter the program editing page (as shown in Fig.10-1-1).
b) Move cursor to the head of block to be cut.
c) Type the last character of block to be cut.
d) Press [Cut] to cut the program to the pasteboard.
e) Move cursor to the position of pasting. Press [Paste] to finish pasting.
Note 1: If many complete characters to be cut are the same in the program, cut the program from the first complete
character to cursor character in downward searching order.
Note 2: If program cutting uses N+ sequence number mode, cut the program from cursor beginning to N+sequence
number.
Note 3: When a program name and its content are in the same block on program interface in editing mode, the system
supports copying of characters behind program name but does not support their cutting.
10.1.7 Replacement of blocks

Procedure for block replacement:
a) Enter the program editing page (as shown in Fig.10-1-1).
b) Move cursor to the character to be replaced.
c) Input the replacement content.
d) Press [Replace]. The system replaces cursor positioning content and ll the same content in the
Part Two Operations

block by inputs.
Note: This operation is available for characters only not for a whole segment of block.
10.1.8 Renaming of program

Rename current program number another name.
b) Enter the program page (cursor specified program name);
c) Type the address and input a new program name;
d) Press to finish file rename.
10.2 Program Management

10.2.1 Retrieval of program target
Press and then press [catalog] on program interface to enter the program catalog page (See
Fig.10-2-1-1):
251
Program Storage capacity

quantity information
information
Program
directory
Program preview
Fig.10-2-1-1
1) Program opening
Open a specified program: O+S/N+input (or EOB) or S/N+input (or EOB).
In editing mode, create a program if the sequence number inputted does not exist.
2) Program deletion: 1. In editing mode: Press DEL to delete the cursor specified program.
2. In editing mode: O+S/N+ DEL or S/N+ DEL.
Part Two Operations
10.2.2 Number of programs stored
This system can store maximum 400 programs. The current quantity stored is given in the program
number information on program catalog page in 10.2.1.
10.2.3 storage capacity
For details fo storage capacity, please refer to the program catalog page in 10.2.1.
10.2.4 Viewing the program list
The program catalog page can display maximum 6 CNC program names at a time. If there are more
than 6 CNC program names, they cannot be displayed on one page. In this case, the user can use
PgUp PgDn. LCD will display CNC program names on next page. Repeat pressing PgUp PgDn, and
LCD will display all these names in cycle.
10.2.5 Program locking
To prevent a user program from being modified or deleted without permission, this system sets a
program switch. After program editing, turn off the program switch to lock the program. Then, the user
cannot edit this locked program. See 3.3.1 for further information.
252
Chapter 11 System Communication
The system supports 2 kinds of communication interfaces, RS232 and USB, communicating with PC
or U disk respectively for data transmission.
11.1 GSKComm Introduction

As a kind of communication management software specially provided for users, GSKComm
communication software supports the serial port connection mode and can realize file uploading,
editing, etc. between PC and CNC. It is easy to operate, with high communication efficiency and
reliability. This software uses Windows interface, adapted to Win98, WinMe, WinXP, and Win2000.
Run GSK980TDHiComm.exe directly. After started, the program display the following interface:
Part Two Operations

Fig.11-1-1
11.1.1 Function Introduction
1． File menu
This menu includes create, open, save, print, and print setting, list of files opened, etc.
2． Edit menu
This menu includes cancel, cut, copy, paste, select all, search, replace, etc.
3． View menu
This menu includes the display of tool bar and status bar.
4． Connect menu
This menu includes the connection and disconnection of serial port / ethernet port.
5． Main menu
This menu includes file editing, dnc transmission, pc—cnc transmission, cnc—pc
transmission, software and serial port setting, user management, statistics. Press the black
triangle on main menu to view the menu content.
6． Help menu
Version information on this software.
Note: DNC transmission, user management, and statistics are not supported for the time being.
253
11.1.2 Editing operation
Click the main menu and press to enter the file editing interface. The user can create a new part
program file or open an existing part program file for editing.
Fig.11-1-2-1
11.1.3 File sending (PC—CNC)

Part Two Operations
Click the main menu and press to enter the file sending interface. Through the shortcut
menu column at the right side of ―send‖ interface, the user can either move cursor to the central file
display bar and right click it before choosing corresponding operation in the popup of environment
menu or select the file directly and press ―send‖.
Through [Add File], the user can add more files. He can choose one or more files to be added at a
time. When the file to be added has an illegal name or when its size exceeds 4 M, that item will
present red and its second column will present ―×‖. If both filename and file size are legal, the second
column of this item will present ―√‖ (as shown in Fig.11-1-3-1).
Fig.11-1-3-1
Press [Load File List] to add a file list saved; press [Save List] to save current file list; press [Delete
from List] to delete one or more files at a time from the PC—CNC file list; press [Clear List] to clear
the whole PC—CNC file list; press [Send] to send a selected file to CNC; press [Stop] to stop
ongoing data transmission. The user can rank the file lists by clicking the head of sending list. After
ranking, a small black triangle symbol will occur at the list head. The upward-pointing triangle
254
represents ascending and the downward-pointing triangle descending (as shown in Fig.11-1-3-2).
Fig.11-1-3-2
To transfer a file to CNC filename or memory area, the user can double click the list item to be
modified and then make modification in the popup of dialog box shown in Fig.11-1-3-3.
Part Two Operations

Fig.11-1-3-3
If the sent file has the same name with some file in CNC system, a dialog box, as is shown in
Fig.11-1-3-4, will be popped up during sending. The user can press ―Yes‖ to cover the original file, or
press ―No‖ to rename the sent file, or press ―Cancel‖ to skip the sending of this file.
Fig.11-1-3-4
255
11.1.4 File receiving (CNC—PC)
Press [get CNC List] to get the file list at CNC system side; press [delete from list only] to delete
the chosen item from the file list; press [delete CNC file] to delete the chosen file from the file list
and from CNC system; press [receive] and the display will pop up a dialog box (as shown in
Fig.11-1-4-1) from which the user can choose where to put the received file; press [Stop] to stop file
tramission.
Fig.11-1-4-1
Part Two Operations
11.1.5 Software and serial port settings
The setting page is shown in Fig.11-1-5-1. Here, the user can set some parameters related to
software and serial port.
Fig.11-1-5-1
For program start setting, the user can set whether to run this software automatically when the
system is powered on and whether to minimize the started software automatically at the lower right
corner of screen; for communication setting, the user can choose a serial port and set its baud rate.
(Press ―apply‖ to implement the setting.)
Note: Automatic start of server during program running is not supported for the time being.
256
11.2 Serial Communication

11.2.1 Preparation for serial communication
1. Connect PC serial port (COM port) to system RS232 interface via serial port line.
2. Open PC-side GSK Comm communication software.
3. Setting of GSK Comm communication software:
(1). Setting of baud rate:
Click ―setting‖ to enter the setting page so as to set the parameters related to serial communication;
Port selection: Choose a port for communication from the ―serial port number‖ pull-down menu
(Available PC ports are automatically recognized by the software);
Setting of baud rate: Make the baud rate of PC agrees with CNC through choices from ―baud rate ‖
pull-down menu. Standard factory setting: The baud rate of data transmission is 115200.
Part Two Operations

Fig.11-2-1-1
(2). Click ―connect‖ menu, and then choose ―pass serial port‖. If the serial port opens successfully,
the status bar will show ―serial port opened‖ and the small icon at the lower right corner will be ―green‖
and ―gray‖. However, this case only means the local serial port is opened. It does not represent that
PC has connected to CNC system.
Fig.11-2-1-2
(3). Click ―connect‖ menu, and then choose ―disconnect‖ to disconnect the CNC system.
Note: Communication software can connect to the system via serial port only.
11.2.2 Serial data transmission

1) Select <MDI> mode;
2) Press to enter the CNC setting page. Set I/O channel to 1.

3) The baud rate of data transmission is 115200.
257
4) Press [CNC setting] and input corresponding permission password. See 3.3.1.1 Setting and
Modification of Password Permissions for details.
5) Press [data] to enter the setting (data processing) page. Move cursor to <CNC part program>
through or .
A、 Data output (CNC→PC)
1. Press the system softkey [data output] and the system will prompt ―waiting for transmission‖.
2. Click on GSK Comm communication software to enter the receive page.

Part Two Operations
Fig.11-2-2-1
3. Click to get the CNC-side file list, as shown in Fig.11-2-2-2.
Fig.11-2-2-2
4. Select files to be received (Several files can be received simultaneously) and then press
. A dialog box is popped up for the user to choose the place of received files. Then, file
receiving starts, as shown in Fig.11-2-2-3.
Fig.11-2-2-3
258
5. After a file received, its list item status bar presents ―received‖, as shown in Fig.11-2-2-4.
Fig.11-2-2-4
B、 Data input (PC→CNC)
1. Press the system softkey [data input] and the system will prompt ―waiting for transmission‖.
2. Click on GSK Comm communication software to enter the send page.
Part Two Operations

Fig.11-2-2-5
3. Click to add the files to be sent to CNC, as shown in Fig.11-2-2-6.
Fig.11-2-2-6
4. Double click the send option to modify the file path, to save the file to CNC filename or memory
area.
When sending CNC part program or user macro-program, the user should choose a user partition;
when sending ladder graph (PLC), parameter (PLC), system parameter, tool compensation, pitch
compensation, system macro-variable, etc., the user should choose a system partition.
5. After the partition is chosen, choose the file to be sent (It is allowed to send many files
simultaneously), and then click to start sending, as shown in Fig.11-2-2-7.
259
Fig.11-2-2-7
7、 After sending, the dialogue status bar shows ―sent‖, as shown in Fig.11-2-2-8
Part Two Operations
Fig.11-2-2-8
Note 1: For descriptions of other function on send page, please refer to 11.1.4 PC—CNC File Sending; for
descriptions of other function on receive page, please refer to 11.1.4 CNC—PC File Receiving.
Note 2: Please ensure that the baud rate is set properly and that the serial port line is connected reliably, before
data transmission.
Note 3: During data transmission, it is forbidden to switch the system operation mode or system page, in order
to avoid data transmission errors.
Note 4: After transmitted to the system, LADCHI**.TXT file is invalid without restart.
11.3 USB Communication

11.3.1 Overview and attentions
Attentions:
1. Set I/O channel to 2 on <CNC setting> interface.
2.A CNC program file must have a suffix .txt, .nc or .CNC, and be saved in the root directory of U disk,
or the system cannot read it.
3. It is forbidden to pull out U disk during USB transmission communication, in order to avoid product
defaults or unexpected consequences.
4. After U disk communication ends, it is required not to pull out U disk before the U disk indicator light
stops flickering (or before a while), in order to ensure data transmission is finished.
11.3.2 Operation procedures of USB Part Program
In <MDI mode>, enter the system [data] interface, and then move cursor to ―CNC part program ‖
through or . Press [data output] or [data input] to enter the following operation interface
(Fig.11-3-2-1):
260
Fig.11-3-2-1
1． Copy a CNC program file from system disk to U disk:
Part Two Operations

a. Press the arrow key to switch cursor to the file directory table.
b. Move cursor through or to select the CNC program file to be copied from
system disk.
c. Press [copy]. The system presents a prompt ―Copy it to U disk? New file name‖, as shown
below (Fig.11-3-2-2).
Fig.11-3-2-2
d. If renaming is not required, press <MDI> to copy the CNC program file directly; if renaming
is necessary, press <cancel> before typing a new program number (such as O10 or O100) and then
press <MDI> to copy the CNC program file. If a file existing in U disk has the same name as this file,
the system will present a prompt ―Copy to U disk? Please rename‖. In this case, type a new program
261
number (such as O10 or O100) and press <MDI> again to copy the CNC program file.
2． Copy a CNC program file from U disk to system disk:
a. Press [U disk ] to switch to the file directory table display interface in U disk.
b. Press the arrow key to switch cursor to the file directory table.
c. Move cursor through or to select the CNC program file to be copied from U
disk.
Press [copy]. The system presents a prompt ―Copy it to U disk? New file name‖, as shown below
(Fig.11-3-2-3).
Part Two Operations
Fig.11-3-2-3
d. If renaming is not required, press <MDI> to copy the CNC program file directly; if renaming
is necessary, press <cancel> before typing a new program number (such as O10 or O100) and then
press <MDI> to copy the CNC program file. If a file existing in system disk has the same name as this
file, the system will present a prompt ―Copy to system disk? Please rename‖. In this case, type a new
program number (such as O10 or O100) and press <MDI> again to copy the CNC program file.
Note: After transmitted to the system, LADCHI**.TXT file is invalid without restart.
3． Delete a file from system disk/U disk:.
a. Move cursor through or to select the CNC program file to be deleted from
system disk / U disk.
b. Press [delete] and the interface bottom prompts: ―Confirm deletion?‖ Press <cancel> to
cancel deletion; press <MDI> to delete the file.
11.3.3 Exiting from U disk operation interface
1． Pull U disk out when U disk indicator does not flicker.

Press [back] to return to [system (data processing)] interface.
262
Appendixes
Appendix
263
Appendix I List of GSK980TDHi Series Parameters
Parameter description
By data type, parameters can be divided into the following categories:

2 kinds of data types and effective ranges of data value
Data Type Effective Range Note Remarks

Bit 0 or 1 System default, which the user can modify as required.
Depend on parameter System default range and default value, which the user
Number
range can modify as required.
1. For bit parameters, each datum consists of 8 bits. Each bit has its unique meaning.
2. For data types above, their value ranges are generally effective. Specific parameter value ranges
are not the same. Please refer to the specification of parameters.
[Example]
(1) Meaning of bit parameters
Data BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT1 BIT0

BIT4 BIT3 BIT2
number
(2) Meaning of number parameters

0 2 1
Data number data
Note 1: The space bits in parameter description and the Parameter No.s displayed but not recorded in parameter list
Appendix
should be set to 0 because they are reserved for future extension.

Note 2: Where 0, 1 in parameters do not have specified meanings, it is understood that 1 is positive and 0 negative.
Note 3: When INI is set to 0, for metric input, the parameter setting unit of linear axis is mm or mm/min; the base unit of
rotating axis is deg or deg/min.
When INI is set to 1, for British input, the parameter setting unit of linear axis is inch or inch/min; the base unit of
rotating axis is deg or deg/min.
264
Appendix I List of Parameters
1. Position Parameters
Sys Para No.

0 0 0 SVCD SEQ MSP INI INM PBUS
PBUS =1: transmission mode of drive unit: bus

=0: transmission mode of drive unit: pulse
INM =1: The least command increment of linear axis is British.
=0: The least command increment of linear axis is metric.
For metric output with INM set to 0: the base unit of linear axis is mm or mm/min; the base
unit of rotating axis is deg or deg/min.
For British output with INM set to 1: the base unit of linear axis is inch or inch/min; the
base unit of rotating axis is deg or deg/min.
INI =1: British input.
=0: Metric input.
For metric input with INI set to 0: the base unit of linear axis is mm or mm/min; the base
For British input with INI set to 1: the base unit of linear axis is inch or inch/min; the base
MSP =1: Adopt twin-spindle control.
=0: Do not adopt twin-spindle control.
SEQ =1: Insert sequence numbers automatically.
=0: Do not insert sequence numbers automatically.
SVCD =1: Use bus servo card.
=0: Do not use bus servo card.
Standard setting: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Sys Para No.
Appendix
0 0 1 SPM2 SPPT SPEP SPOM SPT SBUS RASA
RASA =1: Use absolute grating.

=0: Do not use absolute grating.
SBUS =1: The drive unit of spindle adopts bus control.
=0: The drive unit of spindle adopts non-bus control.
SPT =1: I/O point control.
=0: Variable-frequency or others.
SPOM =1: Select pulse string frequency for spindle speed control signal output.
=0: Select analog voltage for spindle speed control signal output.
SPEP =1: Encoder feedback interface of bus spindle: XS32 encoder interface
=0: Encoder feedback interface of bus spindle: the same as output interface
SPPT =1: Spindle pulse output mode: AB phase output
=0: Spindle pulse output mode: pulse + direction
SPM2 =1: Speed output of the 2 nd spindle: pulse string position
=0: Speed output of the 2 nd spindle: analog voltage
265
Sys Para No.

0 0 2 DEC5 DEC4 DEC3 DEC2 DEC1
DEC1 =1: When returning to the reference point, the 1st axis slows down if DECX is 1.
=0: When returning to the reference point, the 1st axis slows down if DECX is 0.
=1: When returning to the reference point, the 2 nd axis slows down if DECX is
DEC2
1.
=0: When returning to the reference point, the 2 nd axis slows down if DECX is
0.
DEC3 =1: When returning to the reference point, the 3rd axis slows down if DECX is 1.
=0: When returning to the reference point, the 3rd axis slows down if DECX is 0.
DEC4 =1: When returning to the reference point, the 4th axis slows down if DECX is 1.
=0: When returning to the reference point, the 4th axis slows down if DECX is 0.
DEC5 =1: When returning to the reference point, the 5th axis slows down if DECX is 1.
=0: When returning to the reference point, the 5th axis slows down if DECX is 0.
Sys Para No.

0 0 3 DIR5 DIR4 DIR3 DIR2 DIR1
DIR1 =1: The feeding direction of the 1st axis is reversed.

=0: The feeding direction of the 1st axis is not reversed.
DIR2 =1: The feeding direction of the 2nd axis is reversed.
=0: The feeding direction of the 2nd axis is not reversed.
DIR3 =1: The feeding direction of the 3rd axis is reversed.
=0: The feeding direction of the 3rd axis is not reversed.
DIR4 =1: The feeding direction of the 4th axis is reversed.
=0: The feeding direction of the 4th axis is not reversed.
Appendix
DIR5 =1: The feeding direction of the 5th axis is reversed.

=0: The feeding direction of the 5th axis is not reversed.
Sys Para No.

0 0 4 SK0
SK0 =1: The jump signal SIKP is inputted as the signal, if it is 0.

=0: The jump signal SIKP is inputted as the signal, if it is 1.
Sys Para No.
0 0 5 DOUS ISC
ISC =1: The least command increment is 0.0001 mm&deg or 0.00001 inch.
=0: The least command increment is 0.001 mm&deg or 0.0001 inch.
DOUS =1: The double-drive tool uses raster position.
=0: The double-drive tool does not use raster position.
266
Sys Para No.

0 0 6 MAOB ZPLS SIOD SJZ AZR JAX ZMOD ZRN
=1: The reference point has not been established, and the system gives an
ZRN
alarm if a code other than G28 is specified in automatic running.
=0: The reference point has not been established, and the system does not
give an alarm if a code other than G28 is specified in automatic running.
ZMOD =1: Zeroing mode: in front of baffle block.
=0: Zeroing mode: behind baffle block.
JAX =1: Control axis during manual returning to the reference point: single axis.
=0: Control axis during manual returning to the reference point: multi-shaft
AZR =1: G28 command before the reference point is established: alarm
=0: G28 command before the reference point is established: baffle block
SJZ =1: Reference point memorizing
=0: Reference point not memorizing
SIOD =1: Mechanical zeroing DECX: through PLC logical operations.
=0: Mechanical zeroing DECX: read X signal directly.
ZPLS =1: Reset mode: with one turn of signal.
=0: Reset mode: without one turn of signal.
MAOB =1: Reset mode without one turn of signal: B mode.
=0: Reset mode without one turn of signal: A mode.
Sys Para No.

0 0 7 ZMI5 ZMI4 ZMI3 ZMI2 ZMI1
ZMI1 =1: Set the direction from the 1st axis to the reference point: negative.
=0: Set the direction from the 1st axis to the reference point: positive.
Appendix
ZMI2 =1: Set the direction from the 2nd axis to the reference point: negative.
=0: Set the direction from the 2nd axis to the reference point: positive.
ZMI3 =1: Set the direction from the 3rd axis to the reference point: negative.
=0: Set the direction from the 3rd axis to the reference point: positive.
ZMI4 =1: Set the direction from the 4th axis to the reference point: negative.
=0: Set the direction from the 4th axis to the reference point: positive.
ZMI5 =1: Set the direction from the 5th axis to the reference point: negative.
=0: Set the direction from the 5th axis to the reference point: positive.
267
Sys Para No.

0 0 8 ROT5 ROT4 ROT3 ROT2 ROT1
ROT1 =1: The 1st axis is set as rotating axis.

=0: The 1st axis is set as linear axis.
ROT2 =1: The 2nd axis is set as rotating axis.
=0: The 2nd axis is set as linear axis.
ROT3 =1: The 3rd axis is set as rotating axis.
=0: The 3rd axis is set as linear axis.
ROT4 =1: The 4th axis is set as rotating axis.
=0: The 4th axis is set as linear axis.
ROT5 =1: The 5th axis is set as rotating axis.
=0: The 5th axis is set as linear axis.
Standard setting: 0 0 0 1 1000
Sys Para No.
0 0 9 DTO RAB ROS5 ROS4 ROS3 ROS2 ROS1
=1: The rotating axis type of the 1st axis: B type, with a coordinate of linear axis
ROS1
type.
=0: The rotating axis type of the 1st axis: A type, with a coordinate within
3~360.
=1: The rotating axis type of the 2nd axis: B type, with a coordinate of linear axis
ROS2
type.
=0: The rotating axis type of the 2 nd axis: A type, with a coordinate within
3~360.
=1: The rotating axis type of the 3 rd axis: B type, with a coordinate of linear axis
ROS3
type.
Appendix
=0: The rotating axis type of the 3rd axis: A type, with a coordinate within
3~360.
=1: The rotating axis type of the 4th axis: B type, with a coordinate of linear axis
ROS4
type.
=0: The rotating axis type of the 4th axis: A type, with a coordinate within 3~360.
=1: The rotating axis type of the 5th axis: B type, with a coordinate of linear axis
ROS5
type.
=0: The rotating axis type of the 5th axis: A type, with a coordinate within 3~360.
RAB =1: Each axis rotates nearby when acting as the rotating axis.
=0: No one axis rotates nearby when acting as the rotating axis.
=1: Input type of rotating axis in cylindrical interpolation: expand the planar
DTO
distance.
=0: Input type of rotating axis in cylindrical interpolation: angle.
268
Sys Para No.

0 1 0 RCUR MSL WCZS RLC ZCL SCBM
SCBM =1: Do stroke testing before the move.

=0: Do not do stroke testing before the move.
ZCL =1: Clear the relative coordinate returning to the reference point.
=0: Do not clear the relative coordinate returning to the reference point.
RLC =1: Cancel the relative coordinate system after reset.
=0: Do not cancel the relative coordinate system after reset.
=1: zero-point input value of workpiece coordinate system minus that of
WCZS
machine coordinate system
=0: zero-point input value of workpiece coordinate system plus that of machine
coordinate system
=1: When multiple MDI blocks are started in cycle, the start line is where cursor
MSL
is.
=0: When multiple MDI blocks are started in cycle, the start line is top line of
the program.
RCUR =1: For reset in non-editing mode, cursor returns to the home position.
=0: For reset in non-editing mode, cursor does not return to the home position.
Sys Para No.

0 1 1 BFA LZR OUT2
OUT2 =1: No entry to the outside area of second stroke limit.

=0: No entry to the inside area of second stroke limit.
Appendix
=1: Do stroke testing after power-on before manual returning to the reference
LZR
point.
=0: Do not do stroke testing after power-on before manual returning to the
reference point.
BFA =1: If an over-travel code is sent, the alarm is given after over-travel.
=0: If an over-travel code is sent, the alarm is given before over-travel. (The
scope of system alarm is 5MM in front of each boundary of keepout
areas.)
269
Sys Para No.

0 1 2 RDR FDR TDR RFO LRP RPD
RPD =1: From power-on to returning to the reference point, manual fast is valid.
=0: From power-on to returning to the reference point, manual fast is invalid.
LRP =1: Determine (G00) interpolation type to be linear.
=0: Determine (G00) interpolation type to be non-linear.
RFO =1: Rapid feed, which stops when feed magnification is Fo.
=0: Rapid feed, which does not stop when feed magnification is Fo.
TDR =1: Dry running is valid during tapping.
=0: Dry running is invalid during tapping.
FDR =1: Dry running is valid during cutting feed.
=0: Dry running is invalid during cutting feed.
RDR =1: Dry running is valid during rapid positioning.
=0: Dry running is invalid during rapid positioning.
Sys Para No.
0 1 3 HPC2 HPC NPC
NPC =1: The feed per revolution is valid after the position encoder is installed.
=0: The feed per revolution is invalid before the position encoder is installed.
HPC =1: The system has a position encoder installed.
=0: The system does not have a position encoder installed.
HPC2 =1: The 2nd spindle has a position encoder installed.
=0: The 2nd spindle does not have a position encoder installed.
Appendix
Sys Para No.

0 1 4 ROVT DLF
=1: After the reference point is established and memorized, manual zeroing is
DLF
located at the reference point at manual fast speed.
=0: After the reference point is established and memorized, manual zeroing is
located at the reference point at rapid positioning speed.
ROVT =1: Rapid magnification adopts 6 gears.
=0: Rapid magnification adopts 4 gears.
270
Sys Para No.

0 1 5 PCKM RPCK PIIS PPCK ASL PLAC STL
STL =1: Select the read-ahead processing mode.

=0: Select the no-read-ahead processing mode.
=1: Mode of after-interpolating speed controlling in predictive control:
PLAC
exponential.
=0: Mode of after-interpolating speed controlling in predictive control: linear.
=1: Automatic corner deceleration function in predictive control: speed
ASL
difference control
=0: Automatic corner deceleration function in predictive control: angular
difference control
PPCK =1: Predictive control includes in-position testing.
=0: Predictive control excludes in-position testing.
=1: Overlapping interpolation of before-interpolating speed controlling block in
PIIS
predictive control is valid.
=0: Overlapping interpolation of before-interpolating speed controlling block in
predictive control is invalid.
RPCK =1: For rapid positioning, in-position testing is valid.
=0: For rapid positioning, in-position testing is invalid.
PCKM =1: Rapid positioning uses the motor in-position sign.
=0: Rapid positioning does not use the motor in-position sign.
Sys Para No.

0 1 6 ALS JOG CUTT PRT
Appendix
PRT =1: Speed controlling type in rapid running: constant acceleration.
=0: Speed controlling type in rapid running: constant time constant.
CRTT =1: Cutting pattern: B.
=0: Cutting pattern: A.
JOG =1: The manual continuous feed speed of each axis is valid.
=0: The manual continuous feed speed of each axis is invalid.
ALS =1: The automatic corner feed function is valid.
=0: The automatic corner feed function is invalid.
Standard setting: 0 0 0 0 0 010
271
Sys Para No.

0 1 7 CPCT CALT WLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL
CBOL =1: Cutting feed mode: speed controlling after.

=0: Cutting feed mode: speed controlling before.
CBLS =1: Speed controlling before cutting feed: S-type.
=0: Speed controlling before cutting feed: linear.
CLLE =1: Speed controlling after cutting feed: exponential.
=0: Speed controlling after cutting feed: linear.
WLOE =1: Manual pulse running: exponential.
=0: Manual pulse running: linear.
CALT =1: Cutting feed controls acceleration.
=0: Cutting feed does not control acceleration.
CPCT =1: Cutting feed controls the positioning accuracy.
=0: Cutting feed does not control the positioning accuracy.
Sys Para No.

0 1 8 RVCS RBK RVIT
=1: If the backlash is greater than the clearance tolerance, interpolation is

RVIT
finished before execution of next block.
=0: If the backlash is greater than the clearance tolerance, interpolation is
unfinished before execution of next block.
RBK =1: Do backlash compensation for cutting and fast motion respectively.
=0: Do not do backlash compensation for cutting and fast motion respectively.
If P18.6 is 0: P190~194 (backlash compensation amount for the 1st axis ~the 5th axis).
Appendix
If P18.6 is 1: G00:P231~P235 (backlash compensation amount during fast motion of the

1st axis ~the 5th axis).
G01: P190~194 (backlash compensation amounts on the 1st axis ~ the 5th
axis).
RVCS =1: Backlash compensation mode: speed controlling.
=0: Backlash compensation mode: fixed frequency.
272
Sys Para No.

0 1 9 ALS2 ALS1 ALM5 ALM4 ALM3 ALM2 ALM1
ALM1 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 1st axis drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 1st axis drive unit is 0.
ALM2 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 2nd axis drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 2nd axis drive unit is 0.
ALM3 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 3rd axis drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 3rd axis drive unit is 0.
ALM4 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 4th axis drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 4th axis drive unit is 0.
ALM5 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 5th axis drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 5th axis drive unit is 0.
ALS1 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 1st spindle drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 1st spindle drive unit is 0.
ALS2 =1: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 2nd spindle drive unit is 1.
=0: Give an alarm when the alarm signal of the 2nd spindle drive unit is 0.
Sys Para No.

0 2 0 DIT ITX ITL
ITL =1: The interlocking signal on each axis is valid.

=0: The interlocking signal on each axis is invalid.
ITX =1: The mutual sales signal on each axis is valid.
=0: The mutual sales signal on each axis is invalid.
DIT =1: The mutual sales signal in each axial direction is valid.
Appendix
=0: The mutual sales signal in each axial direction is invalid.
Sys Para No.

0 2 1 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1
APC1 =1: Type of servo encoder on the 1st axis: absolute.

=0: Type of servo encoder on the 1st axis: incremental.
APC2 =1: Type of servo encoder on the 2nd axis: absolute.
=0: Type of servo encoder on the 2nd axis: incremental.
APC3 =1: Type of servo encoder on the 3rd axis: absolute.
=0: Type of servo encoder on the 3rd axis: incremental.
APC4 =1: Type of servo encoder on the 4th axis: absolute.
=0: Type of servo encoder on the 4th axis: incremental.
APC5 =1: Type of servo encoder on the 5th axis: absolute.
=0: Type of servo encoder on the 5th axis: incremental.
273
Sys Para No.

0 2 2 PRC DAL
DAL =1: Display of absolute position excludes tool length compensation.

=0: Display of absolute position includes tool length compensation.
=1: Use PRC signal in inputting of tool bias offset and workpiece coordinate
PRC
system bias.
=0: Do not use PRC signal in inputting of tool bias offset and workpiece
coordinate system bias.
Sys Para No.

0 2 3 POSM
POSM =1: Display the mode on program monitoring page.

=0: Do not display the mode on program monitoring page.
Sys Para No.

0 2 4 NPA
NPA =1: Switch to the alarm page in the case of an alarm.

=0: Do not switch to the alarm page in the case of an alarm.
Standard setting: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sys Para No.

0 2 5 ALM DGN GRA OFT SYS PRG POS
POS =1: Press ―position‖ again on position interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press ―position‖ again on position interface, not to switch the page.
Appendix
PRG =1: Press "program" again on program interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press "program" again on program interface, not to switch the page.
SYS =1: Press "system" again on system interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press "system" again on system interface, not to switch the page.
OFT =1: Press "offset" again on offset interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press "offset" again on offset interface, not to switch the page.
GRA =1: Press "graph" again on graph interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press "graph" again on graph interface, not to switch the page.
DGN =1: Press "diagnosis" again on diagnosis interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press " alarm" again on alarm interface, not to switch the page.
274
Sys Para No.

0 2 6 HELP PLC SMDI PETP
=1: Press program menu in editing mode, to jump to the program page
PETP
automatically.
=0: Press program menu in editing mode, not to jump to the program page
automatically.
SMDI =1: Press ―program‖ in MDI mode, to jump to the input interface automatically.
=0: Press ―program‖ in MDI mode, not to jump to the input interface
automatically.
PLC =1: Press ―ladder-shaped‖ again on PLC interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press ―ladder-shaped‖ again on PLC interface, not to switch the page.
HELP =1: Press ―help‖ again on help interface, to switch the page.
=0: Press ―help‖ again on help interface, not to switch the page.
Sys Para No.

0 2 7 NE9 NE8
NE8 =1: Forbid editing the subprogram of No.80000 – 89999 programs.

=0: Do not forbid editing the subprogram of No.80000 – 89999 programs.
NE9 =1: Forbid editing the subprogram of No.90000 – 99999 programs.
=0: Allow editing the subprogram of No.90000 – 99999 programs.
Sys Para No.

0 2 8 MCL MKP
Appendix
=1: Clear the prepared program during execution of M02, M30, or % in MDI
MKP
mode.
=0: Do not clear the prepared program during execution of M02, M30, or % in
MDI mode.
MCL =1: Delete the prepared program when pressing ―reset‖ in MDI mode.
=0: Do not delete the prepared program when pressing ―reset‖ in MDI mode.
275
Sys Para No.

0 2 9 IWZ WZO MCV GOF WOF
WOF =1: Forbid inputting the tool abrasion bias by the use of MDI keyboard.
=0: Allow inputting the tool abrasion bias by the use of MDI keyboard.
GOF =1: Forbid inputting the tool geometric bias by the use of MDI keyboard.
=0: Allow inputting the tool geometric bias by the use of MDI keyboard.
MCV =1: Forbid inputting the macro-program variable by the use of MDI keyboard.
=0: Allow inputting the macro-program variable by the use of MDI keyboard.
WZO =1: Forbid inputting the workpiece origin bias by the use of MDI keyboard.
=0: Allow inputting the workpiece origin bias by the use of MDI keyboard.
=1: Forbid inputting the workpiece origin bias by the use of MDI keyboard
IWZ
during pause.
=0: Allow inputting the workpiece origin bias by the use of MDI keyboard during
pause.
Sys Para No.

0 3 0 SFA
SFA =1: Output SF signals even without gear switching.

=0: Do not output SF signals without gear switching.
Sys Para No.

0 3 1 FPM G19 G18 G01
G01 =1: G01 mode when the system is powered on or cleared.

Appendix
=0: G00 mode when the system is powered on or cleared.

G18 =1: Plane when the system is powered on or cleared: G18.
=0: Plane when the system is powered on or cleared: G17.
G19 =1: In the case of G19 mode, set G18 to 0 when G19=1.
=0: Depend on parameter No: 31#1.
FPM =1: G99 feed per revolution when the system is powered on or cleared.
=0: G98 feed per revolution when the system is powered on or cleared.
G19 G18 G17, G18, and G19 Modes

0 0 G17 mode (X-Y plane)
0 1 G18 mode (Z-X plane)
1 0 G19 mode (Y-Z plane)
276
Sys Para No.

0 3 2 AD2
=1: The system gives an alarm when the same block has two or more identical
AD2
addresses.
=0: The system does not give an alarm when the same block has two or more
identical addresses.
Sys Para No.

0 3 3 M3B MHI M30 M02 TF
TF =1: Execute the same T code, to output TF signals.

=0: Execute the same T code, not to output TF signals.
M02 =1: Return to the start of block when executing M02.
=0: Do not return to the start of block when executing M02.
M30 =1: Return to the start of block when executing M30.
=0: Do not return to the start of block when executing M30.
=1: Exchange between strobe signal and ending signal of M/S/T: high-speed
MHI
mode.
=0: Exchange between strobe signal and ending signal of M/S/T: usual mode.
M3B =1: One block can instruct maximum 3 M codes.
=0: One block can instruct 1 M code.
Sys Para No.

0 3 4 CFH DWL
Appendix
DWL =1: G04 is pause per revolution in feed per revolution mode.
=0: G04 is not pause per revolution in feed per revolution mode.
CFH =1: Clear F,H,D codes in the case of reset or emergency stop.
=0: Reserve F,H,D codes in the case of reset or emergency stop.
Sys Para No.

0 3 5 C07 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01
C01 =1: Clear G codes in 01 group in the case of reset or emergency stop.
=0: Reserve G codes in 01 group in the case of reset or emergency stop.
277
Sys Para No.

0 3 6 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08
Sys Para No.
0 3 7 SCS CSS CSZR SOC RSC BDP SCRW
SCRW =1: The pitch error compensation is valid.

=0: The pitch error compensation is invalid.
BDP =1: Use bi-direction pitch error compensation.
=0: Do not use bi-direction pitch error compensation.
Appendix
=1: Calculate the datum coordinate of G96 spindle speed as current point in
RSC
the case of G0 rapid positioning.
=0: Calculate the datum coordinate of G96 spindle speed as end point in the
case of G0 rapid positioning.
SOC =1: G96 spindle speed is suppressed after spindle magnification.
=0: G96 spindle speed is suppressed before spindle magnification.
CSZR =1: The reference point return of CS contouring control is valid.
=0: The reference point return of CS contouring control is invalid.
CSS =1: Conduct Cs contouring control in each spindle.
=0: Do not conduct Cs contouring control in any spindle.
SCS =1: Use Cs contouring control.
=0: Do not use Cs contouring control.
278
Sys Para No.

0 3 8 SGB GTT FLRE FLR EOV MPP SAR
SAR =1: Check the spindle speed arrival signal.

=0: Do not the spindle speed arrival signal.
=1: In multi-spindle control, the program selects a program by instructing P
MPP
codes.
=0: In multi-spindle control, the program selects a program not instructing P
codes.
EOV =1: Use the magnification signal of each spindle.
=0: Do not the magnification signal of any spindle.
=1: The rate of allowance (q) and the rate of change (r) set in spindle speed
FLR
fluctuation detection are expressed in 0.1%.
=0: The rate of allowance (q) and the rate of change (r) set in spindle speed
fluctuation detection are expressed in 1%.
FLRE =1: The spindle speed fluctuation detection is valid.
=0: The spindle speed fluctuation detection is invalid.
GTT =1: Spindle gear: T type.
=0: Spindle gear: M type.
SGB =1: M-type gear switching mode: speed at each gear switching point (mode B).
=0: M-type gear switching mode: maximum speed of each gear (mode A).
Sys Para No.

0 3 9 THSY THQR THST DIA TLCM
TLCM =1: The tool length compensation can be modified during program execution.
=0: The tool length compensation cannot be modified during program
Appendix
execution.
DIA =1: Adopt the diameter method for programming.
=0: Adopt the radius method for programming.
THST =1: Spindle pulse sampling in the case of thread cutting: average.
=0: Spindle pulse sampling in the case of thread cutting: original.
THQR =1: In thread tail, movement in stub axle positioning mode is valid.
=0: In thread tail, movement in stub axle positioning mode is invalid.
THSY =1: Synchronize with mode B during thread cutting.
=0: Synchronize with mode A during thread cutting.
279
Sys Para No.

0 4 0 ODI THST TPRT CCN SUP
SUP =1: Type of knife picking in tool radius compensation: B type.

=0: Type of knife picking in tool radius compensation: A type.
CCN =1: Cancel radius compensation when G28 command moves to the midpoint.
=0 Reserve radius compensation when G28 command moves to the midpoint.
TPRT =1: Linear speed controlling in thread cutting uses constant acceleration.
=0: Linear speed controlling in thread cutting uses constant time constant.
THST =1: Mode of threaded screw head signal reading: read once only.
=0: Mode of threaded screw head signal reading: read every time.
ODI =1: The tool radius offset is set according to the diameter.
=0: The tool radius offset is set according to the radius.
Sys Para No.

0 4 1 CNI G39 PUIT
=1: Number parameters are inputted and displayed according to Bit Para
PUIT
NO.0#2 INI.
=0: Number parameters are inputted and displayed in metric system.
G39 =1: The corner arc function is valid in radius compensation.
=0: The corner arc function is invalid in radius compensation.
CNI =1: Do interference checking in radius compensation.
=0: Do not do interference checking in radius compensation.
Appendix
Sys Para No.

0 4 2 RD2 RD1
RD1 =1: Set the retracting direction of G76 and G87: negative.
=0: Set the retracting direction of G76 and G87: positive.
RD2 =1: Set the retracting axis of G76 and G87: the 2nd axis.
=0: Set the retracting axis of G76 and G87: the 1st axis.
Sys Para No.

0 4 3 PLS PDI
=1: Use the 2nd axis of plane in polar coordinate interpolation when it is
PDI
specified by diameter.
=0: Use the 2nd axis of plane in polar coordinate interpolation when it is
specified by radius.
RD2 =1: Use the polar coordinate interpolation offset.
=0: Do not use the polar coordinate interpolation offset.
280
Sys Para No.

0 4 4 PCP DOV RTR
=1: The drilling pattern of G83 and G87 is high-speed deep-hole drilling-cutting
RTR
cycle.
=0: The drilling pattern of G83 and G87 is deep-hole drilling-cutting cycle.
DOV =1: During rigid tapping tool retracting, magnification is valid.
=0: During rigid tapping tool retracting, magnification is invalid.
PCP =1: Tapping is high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle.
=0: Tapping is not high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle.
Sys Para No.

0 4 5 OVS OVU TDR NIZ
NIZ =1: Do smooth processing of rigid tapping.

=0: Do not smooth processing of rigid tapping.
TDR =1: the same time constant used in tool feeding and retracting of rigid tapping
=0: not the same constant used in tool feeding and retracting of rigid tapping
OVU =1: magnification in tool retracting of rigid tapping in 10%。
=0: magnification in tool retracting of rigid tapping in 1%。
OVS =1: in rigid tapping, feed rate: magnification canceling signal valid
=0: in rigid tapping, feed rate: magnification canceling signal invalid
0 4 7 SCA5 SCA4 SCA3 SCA2 SCA1
Appendix
SCA1 =1: the 1st axis synchronized control determined by signal
=0: the 1st axis synchronous control: synchronized sooner or later
SCA2 =1: the 2nd axis synchronous control: synchronization determined by signal
=0: the 2nd axis synchronous control: synchronized sooner or later
SCA3 =1: the 3rd axis synchronous control: synchronization determined by signal
=0: the 3rd axis synchronous control: synchronized sooner or later
SCA4 =1: the 4th axis synchronous control: synchronization determined by signal
=0: the 4th axis synchronous control: synchronized sooner or later
SCA5 =1: the 5th axis synchronous control: synchronization determined by signal
=0: the 5th axis synchronous control: synchronized sooner or later
Sys Para No.

0 4 8 MDL
MDL =1: The G code for one-way orientation is set to a modal code.
=0: The G code for one-way orientation is not set to a modal code.
281
Sys Para No.

0 4 9 RPST
RPST =1: During restart, the program moves in 01 mode.

=0: During restart, the program moves at dry running speed in 01 mode.
Sys Para No.

0 5 0 SIM REL
REL =1: relative position setting of index workbench: in 360°

=0: relative position setting of index workbench: out of 360°
=1: Give an alarm if indexing code and other control axis code are in the same
SIM
block.
=0: Do not give an alarm if indexing code and other control axis code are in the
same block.
Sys Para No.

0 5 1 MDLY SBM
SBM =1: single blocks allowed in macro-program command statements

=0: single blocks not allowed in macro-program command statements
MDLY =1: deferred in macro-program command statements
=0: not deferred in macro-program command statements
Sys Para No.

0 5 2 CLV CCV PRTC
Appendix
PRTC =1: parts arriving signal (PRTSF) set to 0 in reset

=0: parts arriving signal (PRTSF) not set to 0 in reset
CCV =1: macro-program public variables #100 - #199 cleared after reset
=0: macro-program public variables #100 - #199 not cleared after reset
CLV =1: macro-program local variables #1 - #50 cleared after reset
=0: macro-program local variables #1 - #50 not cleared after reset
Sys Para No.

0 5 3 LAD3 LDA2 LAD1 LAD0
LAD0~LAD3 are binary family parameters. W hen it is 0, use No.0 ladder graph; when it is
1~15, use No.0~15 ladder graphs.
282
Sys Para No.

0 5 4 OPRG PRGS
PRGS =1: program switch open initially

=0: program switch closed initially
=1: For debugging or higher permission, one-touch input/output is valid for part
OPRG
program.
=0: For debugging or higher permission, one-touch input/output is invalid for
part program.
Sys Para No.

0 5 5 GPRG CANT
CANT =1: one-piece processing time cleared automatically

=0: one-piece processing time not cleared automatically
GPRG =1: programming with templates valid
=0: programming with template invalid
Sys Para No.

0 5 6 HNG5 HNG4 HNG3 HNG2 HNG1 HPF
HPF =1: manual pulse shift running automatically

=0: manual pulse shift not running automatically
=1: the 1st axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in different
HNG1
directions
=0: the 1st axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in the same
Appendix
direction
=1: the 2nd axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in different
HNG2
directions
=0: the 2nd axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in the same
direction
=1: the 3rd axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in different
HNG3
directions
=0: the 3rd axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in the same
direction
=1: the 4th axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in different
HNG4
directions
=0: the 4th axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in the same
direction
=1: the 5th axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in different
HNG5
directions
=0: the 5th axis moving and manual pulse generator turning in the same
direction
283
Sys Para No.

0 5 7 PLW5 PLW4 PLW3 PLW2 PLW1
PLW1 =1: the 1st axis pulse width variable with speed
=0: the 1st axis pulse width constant for 1 μs
PLW2 =1: the 2nd axis pulse width variable with speed
=0: the 2nd axis pulse width constant for 1 μs
PLW3 =1: the 3rd axis pulse width variable with speed
=0: the 3rd axis pulse width constant for 1 μs
PLW4 =1: the 4th axis pulse width variable with speed
=0: the 4th axis pulse width constant for 1 μs
PLW5 =1: the 5th axis pulse width variable with speed
=0: the 5th axis pulse width constant for 1 μs
Sys Para No.

0 5 8 NEG 5 NEG 4 NEG 3 NEG 2 NEG1
PLW1 =1: the 1st axis neglected

=0: the 1st axis not neglected
PLW2 =1: the 2nd axis neglected
=0: the 2nd axis not neglected
PLW3 =1: the 3rd axis neglected
=0: the 3rd axis not neglected
PLW4 =1: the 4th axis neglected
=0: the 4th axis not neglected
PLW5 =1: the 5th axis neglected
Appendix
=0: the 5th axis not neglected

Sys Para No.
0 5 9 LEDT
LEDT =1: external program locking signal signal valid

=0: external program locking signal signal invalid
Sys Para No.
0 6 0 PMCA PMCP PMCS
PMCS =1: PMC-axis specified by G signal

=0: PMC-axis not specified by G signal
PMCP =1: PMC-axis zero return mode with one revolution of signals
=0: PMC-axis zero return mode without one revolution of signals
=1: Give an alarm when PMC-axis not returning to reference point commands
PMCA
the mechanical coordinate selection mode.
=0: Do not give an alarm when PMC-axis not returning to reference point
commands the mechanical coordinate selection mode.
284
Sys Para No.

0 6 1 FALM LALM EALM SALM AALM SSC
SSC =1: Use constant cycle speed control

=0: Do not use constant cycle speed control。
AALM =1: Neglect the external user alarm.
=0: Do not neglect the external user alarm.
SALM =1: Neglect the spindle drive unit alarm.
=0: Do not neglect the spindle drive unit alarm.
EALM =1: Neglect the emergency stop alarm.
=0: Do not neglect the emergency stop alarm.
LALM =1: Neglect the hard limit alarm.
=0: Do not neglect the hard limit alarm.
FALM =1: Neglect the feed axis drive unit alarm.
=0: Do not neglect the feed axis drive unit alarm.
Standard setting: 0 0 0 0 0000
2. Data Parameters
Parameter No. Parameter Definition Default
0000 I/O channel, input-output device (1:RS232 2:USB) 2
Setting range: 1 ~ 2
It is set to 0 or 1 when CNC communicates with PC via RS232 interface; set to 2 when CNC is
connected to U disk.
0005 CNC controlled axes 3

Appendix
0006 System language selection (0: Chinese; 1: English) 0
0007 Days ahead of the timed shutdown expiration 7

reminder
0008 Size of MDT data packet at Ethernet bus slave 16

station
0009 Max. re-transmission times of Ethernet bus 10

0010 the 1st axis offset from external workpiece origin 0.0000
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)
0011 the 2nd axis offset from external workpiece origin 0.0000
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0012 the 3rd axis offset from external workpiece origin 0.0000
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
285
0013 the 4th axis offset from external workpiece origin 0.0000
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0014 the 5th axis offset from external workpiece origin 0.0000
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0015 Workpiece origin offset on the 1st axis of G54 0.0000

Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)
0016 Workpiece origin offset on the 2nd axis of G54 0.0000

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0017 Workpiece origin offset on the 3rd axis of G54 0.0000

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0018 Workpiece origin offset on the 4th axis of G54 0.0000

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Appendix
Setting range: -19999.9999 ~ 19999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
286
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
Appendix
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
287

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0045 Machine coordinate of the 1st reference point on the 0.0000

1st axis
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

2nd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

3rd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

4th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

5th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0050 Machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point on the 0.0000

1st axis
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

2nd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
Appendix

3rd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

4th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

2nd reference point the 5th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0055 Machine coordinate of the 3rd reference point on the 0.0000

1st axis
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

2nd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

3rd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
288

4th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

5th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0060 Machine coordinate of the 4th reference point on the 0.0000

1st axis
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

2nd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

3rd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

4th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

5th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0066 Storage stroke testing 1: negative boundary -19998

coordinate on the 1st axis
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)
Appendix
0067 Storage stroke testing 1: positive boundary 19998
Setting range: -19999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

coordinate on the 2nd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

coordinate on the 3rd axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

coordinate on the 4th axis
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
289

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -19999.9989 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Setting range: -1999.9998 ~ 19999.9998 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Appendix
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm)
0086 Dry running speed 2000

Setting range: 0 ~ 9999 (mm/min)
290
0087 Cutting feed speed when the machine is powered on 100

0088 G0 rapid positioning speed on the 1st axis 4000

Setting range:
Metric: 1 ~ 30,000 (mm/min)
British: 1 ~ 30,000/ 25.4 (inch/min)
Rotating axis: 1 ~ 30,000 (deg/min)
0089 G0 fast running speed on the 2nd axis 8000

Setting range:
British: 0 ~ 30,000/ 25.4 (inch/min)
0090 G0 fast running speed on the 3rd axis 8000

Setting range:
British: 0 ~ 30,000/ 25.4 (inch/min)
0091 G0 fast running speed on the 4th axis 8000

Setting range:
British: 0 ~ 30,000/ 25.4 (inch/min)
0092 G0 fast running speed on the 5th axis 8000
Appendix
Setting range:
British: 0 ~ 30,000/ 25.4 (inch/min)
0093 Rapid magnification is Fo speed (universal for all 30

axes)
0094 Maximum speed of rapid positioning (universal for all 8000

axes)
Setting range: 300 ~ 30,000(mm/min)
0095 Minimum speed of rapid positioning (universal for all 0

axes)
0096 Maximum speed of cutting feed (universal for all 8000

axes)
Setting range: 300 ~ 30,000(mm/min)
0097 Minimum speed of cutting feed (universal for all 0

axes)
291
0098 Manual (JOG) feed speed on each axis (universal for 2000
all axes)
Setting range: 0 ~ 30,000 (mm/min)
0099 (FL) speed in acquisition of Z pulse signal (universal 100

for all axes)
0100 Rapid movement speed of returning to reference 2000

point on the 1st axis

point on the 2nd axis

point on the 3rd axis

point on the 4th axis

point on the 5th axis
0105 Speed of manual (JOG) continuous feed on the 1st 2000

axis
Appendix
0106 Speed of manual (JOG) continuous feed on the 2nd 2000

axis
0107 Speed of manual (JOG) continuous feed on the 3rd 2000

axis
0108 Speed of manual (JOG) continuous feed on the 4th 2000

axis
0109 Speed of manual (JOG) continuous feed on the 5th 2000

axis
0110 Rapid positioning acceleration (mm/s 2) on the 1st 5000

axis
Setting range: 1 ~ 9999 (mm/s2)
0111 Rapid positioning acceleration (mm/s 2) on the 2nd 5000

axis
292
0112 Rapid positioning acceleration (mm/s2) on the 3rd 5000

axis
2Setting range: 1 ~ 9999 (mm/s2)
0113 Rapid positioning acceleration (mm/s 2) on the 4th 5000

axis
0114 Rapid positioning acceleration (mm/s 2) on the 5th 5000

axis
0115 S-type speed controlling time constant T1 in rapid 70

positioning on the 1st axis
Setting range: 0 ~ 400 (ms)

positioning on the 2nd axis

positioning on the 3rd axis

positioning on the 4th axis

Appendix

positioning on the 1st axis

positioning on the 2nd axis

positioning on the 3rd axis


293
0125 L-type time constant of speed controlling before 100

cutting feed
0126 S-type time constant speed controlling before cutting 100

feed
0127 L-type time constant of speed controlling after cutting 80

feed
0128 E-type time constant of speed controlling after cutting 60

feed
0129 Exponential speed controlling FL speed 10

0130 Pre-interpolation maximum combined blocks 0

0131 Cutting feed positioning accuracy 0.03

Setting range: 0.001 ~ 0.5 (mm)
0132 Arc interpolation control accuracy 0.03

Setting range: 0 ~ 0.5 (mm)
0133 Pre-interpolation contouring control accuracy 0.01

Appendix
0134 Acceleration of linear speed controlling before 2000

interpolation in predictive control mode
Setting range: 0 ~ 5000 (mm/s²)
0135 S-type constant of speed controlling before 100

0136 Time constant of linear speed controlling after 80

0137 Exponential time constant of speed controlling after 60

interpolation in predictive control
0138 Exponential speed controlling FL speed of cutting 10

feed in predictive control
294
0139 Contouring control accuracy in predictive control 0.01

mode
0140 Combined blocks in predictive control mode 0

0141 Positioning accuracy in predictive control mode 0.05

0142 Maximum acceleration/deceleration (mm/s 2) in rapid 5000

positioning
Setting range: 1 ~ 9999 (mm/s²)
0143 Acceleration/deceleration FL speed (mm/min) in 30

rapid positioning
0144 In predictive control mode, critical angle between two 5

blocks in automatic corner deceleration
Setting range: 2 ~ 178 (°)
0145 In predictive control mode, minimum feed speed in 120

automatic corner deceleration
0146 In predictive control mode, allowable variation of 80

each axis in speed difference deceleration
Appendix
0147 In predictive control mode, cutting accuracy level 2
0148 Acceleration limit outside arc interpolation 1000

0149 Lower speed limit on acceleration block level outside 200

arc interpolation
0150 Suppressed time constant in cutting feed 50

acceleration
0151 Maximum suppressed speed of manual pulse 2000

incomplete running mode
0152 Time constant in manual pulse linear speed 120

controlling
295
0153 Exponential speed controlling time constant in 80

manual pulse/single-step mode
0154 Highest-speed pulses of periodic (4ms) sampling in 1000

manual pulse trial cutting
0155 Maximum suppressed speed of single-step feed 1000
0156 S-type speed controlling time constant T1 in JOG 50

feed of each axis
0157 S-type speed controlling time constant T12 in JOG 40

feed of each axis
0158 Acceleration suppression constant in manual pulse 50

incomplete running mode
0159 Magnification value in the 5 th gear of manual pulse 1000

feed (minimum setting unit: X setting)
0160 Command multiplication ratio (CMR) of the 1st axis 1

Appendix
0161 Command multiplication ratio (CMR) of the 2nd axis 1

0162 Command multiplication ratio (CMR) of the 3rd axis 1

0163 Command multiplication ratio (CMR) of the 4th axis 1

0164 Command multiplication ratio (CMR) of the 5th axis 1

0165 Command division ratio (CMD) of the 1st axis 1

0166 Command division ratio (CMD) of the 2nd axis 1

0167 Command division ratio (CMD) of the 3rd axis 1

296
0168 Command division ratio (CMD) of the 4th axis 1

0169 Command division ratio (CMD) of the 5th axis 1

0170 Manual rapid positioning speed of the 1st axis 4000

Setting range: 0 ~ 30,000
0171 Manual rapid positioning speed of the 2nd axis 8000

0172 Manual rapid positioning speed of the 3rd axis 8000

0173 Manual rapid positioning speed of the 4th axis 8000

0174 Manual rapid positioning speed of the 5th axis 8000

0175 Program name on the 1st axis (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 0
5:C)
0176 Program name on the 2nd axis (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 1
Appendix
5:C)
0177 Program name on the 3rd axis (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 2
5:C)
0178 Program name on the 4th axis (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 4
5:C)
0179 Program name on the 5th axis (0:X 1:Y 2:Z 3:A 4:B 5
5:C)
0180 Grating offset or reference point offset of the 1st axis 0

Setting range: -50 ~ 50
0181 Grating offset or reference point offset of the 2nd axis 0

0182 Grating offset or reference point offset of the 3rd axis 0

297
0183 Grating offset or reference point offset of the 4th axis 0

0184 Grating offset or reference point offset of the 5th axis 1

0189 Reverse determination accuracy of backlash 0.0100

compensation (X0.0001)
Set   p(189)  0.0001. After feed is reversed, it is confirmed that backlash compensation starts if
the servo periodic feed rate is greater than  .
Thus, during machining of large radius outer profile, it is required to set a small accuracy in order to
ensure the compensation position does not deviate from the quadrant position. During machining of a
curved surface, in order to prevent each tool path from conducting backlash compensation at a fixed
point and forming an uplift, it is required to set a great accuracy so that backlash compensation is
distributed within a certain width evenly.
0190 Backlash compensation amount of the 1st axis 0.0000

Setting range:
Metric: -0.5 ~ 0.5 (mm)
British: -0.5 ~ 0.5/25.4 (inch)
Rotating axis: -0.5 ~ 0.5000 (deg)
0191 Backlash compensation amount of the 2nd axis 0.0000

Setting range:
Metric: -0.5 ~ 0.5 (mm)
British: -0.5 ~ 0.5/25.4 (inch)
Appendix
0192 Backlash compensation amount of the 3rd axis 0.0000

Setting range:
Metric: -0.5 ~ 0.5 (mm)
British: -0.5 ~ 0.5/25.4 (inch)
0193 Backlash compensation amount of the 4th axis 0.0000

Setting range:
Metric: -0.5 ~ 0.5 (mm)
British: -0.5 ~ 0.5/25.4(inch)
Rotating axis: -0.5 ~ 0.5(deg)
0194 Backlash compensation amount of the 5th axis 0.0000

Setting range:
Metric: -0.5 ~ 0.5(mm)
British: -0.5 ~ 0.5/25.4(inch)
0195 Step length in fixed-frequency backlash 0.0030

compensation of the 1st axis
298

compensation of the 2nd axis

compensation of the 3rd axis

compensation of the 4th axis

compensation of the 5th axis
0200 Time constant in variable-speed backlash 20

compensation
0203 Output time of reset signal 200

0204 Allowable bits of M code 2

0205 Allowable bits of S code 5

Appendix
0206 Allowable bits of T code 4
0207 Retardation time of strobe signal MF/SF/TF (n*8) 16

0208 Acceptable width of M/S/T function ending signal 32

(FIN) (n*8)
0209 Compensation conditions for Z-axis friction 0

compensation of machine tool (default: 1.0)
0210 Number increment in automatic insertion of 10

sequence number
0211 Opening number of tool bias that cannot be inputted 1

in MDI
299
0212 Number of tool bias that cannot be inputted in MDI 99

0214 Arc radius error limit (mm) 0.05

0216 Pitch error compensation number of the 1st axis 0

reference point
0217 Pitch error compensation number of the 2nd axis 0

reference point
0218 Pitch error compensation number of the 3rd axis 0

reference point
0219 Pitch error compensation number of the 4th axis 0

reference point
0220 Pitch error compensation number of the 5th axis 0

reference point
0221 Pitch error compensation amount of the 1st axis 0

moving from zeroing opposite to zero point
Setting range: -0.9999 ~ 0.9999
Appendix
0222 Pitch error compensation amount on the 2nd axis 0

Setting range: -0.9999 ~ 0.9999
0223 Pitch error compensation amount of the 3rd axis 0

Setting range: -0.9999 ~ 0.9999
0224 Pitch error compensation amount of the 4th axis 0

Setting range: -0.9999 ~ 0.9999
0225 Pitch error compensation amount of the 5th axis 0

Setting range: -0.9999 ~ 0.9999
0226 Pitch error compensation space of the 1st axis 10

Setting range: 0 ~ 19999.9998
0227 Pitch error compensation space of the 2nd axis 5

300
0228 Pitch error compensation space of the 3rd axis 5

0229 Pitch error compensation space of the 4th axis 5

0230 Pitch error compensation space of the 5th axis 5

0231 Backlash compensation amount of the 1st axis in fast 0

motion
Setting range: -0.5 ~ 0.5
0232 Backlash compensation amount of the 2nd axis in 0

fast motion
0233 Backlash compensation amount of the 3rd axis in fast 0

motion
0234 Backlash compensation amount of the 4th axis in fast 0

motion
0235 Backlash compensation amount of the 5th axis in fast 0

motion
Appendix
0236 Rapid positioning accuracy of each axis (mm) 0.01
Setting range: 0.0001 ~ 0.5
0240 Gain adjustment data of spindle speed analog output 1

0241 Bias voltage compensation of spindle speed analog 0

output
0242 Spindle speed in orientation or jogging 50

Setting range: 0 ~ 9999 (r/min)
0246 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to Gear 1 6000



301
0250 Minimum suppressed speed of spindle motor 50

0251 Maximum motor speed during spindle gear shift 6000

0254 Counting datum axis in surface speed control 0

0255 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed 100

control (G96)
0257 Upper limit of spindle speed in tapping cycle 6000

0258 Upper limit of spindle speed 6000

0261 Lines of spindle encoder 1024

0262 Spindle motor speed at Gear 1-Gear 2 switching 6000

point

point
Appendix

point
0266 Neglect the vector limit during movement along the 0

corner outer in tool radius compensation C
0267 Positive and negative limits on each abrasion value 1

inputted in tool offset
0268 Maximum error in tool radius compensation C 0.0010

Setting range: 0.0001~0.0100
0270 G73 retracting amount of high-speed deep-hole 2.0000

cycle
0271 G83 blank space of fixed cycle 2.0000

302
0272 Pause time in returning to hole top 2

0281 Shortest pause time at hole bottom 50

0283 Magnification in rigid tapping retracting 100

Set
0282 Longest pause time at hole bottom 9999
Note: If Bit Para N0: 44#4=1, magnification is valid.
If N0:45#3=1, data unit is set to 10%; the maximum magnification set to 1000%.
0284 Retracting amount or blank space in deep-hole 2

tapping cycle
Setting range: 0 ~ 100 (mm)
0286 Number of teeth of the spindle-side gear (the 1st 1

gear)
0287 Number of teeth of the spindle-side gear (the 2nd 1

gear)
0288 Number of teeth of the spindle-side gear (the 3rd 1

gear)
Appendix
0289 Number of teeth of the spindle-side gear (the 3rd 1

gear)
0290 Number of teeth of the position encoder-side gear 1

(the 1st gear)

(the 2nd gear)

(the 3rd gear)

(the 4th gear)
0294 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 1st 6000

gear)
303
0295 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 2nd 6000

gear)
0296 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 3rd 6000

gear)
0297 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (the 4th 6000

gear)
0298 Linear speed controlling time constant for spindle 200

and tapping axis (the 1st gear)

and tapping axis (the 2nd gear)

and tapping axis (the 3rd gear)

and tapping axis (the 4th gear)
0302 Time constant for spindle and tapping axis in tool 200
retracting (the 1st gear)
Appendix
retracting (the 2nd gear)
retracting (the 3rd gear)
retracting (the 4th gear)
0310 Rate of allowance for spindle regarded to reach the 5

command speed (q)
0311 Rate of change for spindle not giving a speed 5

fluctuation detection alarm (r)
304
0312 Fluctuation in spindle speed without giving a spindle 10

speed flunctuation detection alarm (i)
0313 Period from the chang in command speed to the 1000

beginning of spindle speed flunctuation detection
(p)ms
0320 Amount of clearance of rigid tapping spindle (the 1st 0

gear)
0321 Amount of clearance of rigid tapping spindle (the 2nd 0

gear)
0322 Amount of clearance of rigid tapping spindle (the 3rd 0

gear)
0323 Command multiplication ratio (CMR) of spindle (the 512

1st gear)

2nd gear)

3rd gear)
Appendix
0326 Command division ratio (CMD) of spindle (the 1st 25

gear)
0327 Command division ratio (CMD) of spindle (the 2nd 125

gear)
0328 Command division ratio (CMD) of spindle (the 3rd 125

gear)
0340 Number of pre-processed blocks in decoding 0

0341 Buffer zone size at ARM interpolation point 36

0342 Low-speed zeroing speed of the 1st axis 200

305
0343 Low-speed zeroing speed of the 2nd axis 200

0344 Low-speed zeroing speed of the 3rd axis 200

0345 Low-speed zeroing speed of the 4th axis 200

0346 Low-speed zeroing speed of the 5th axis 200

0352 Speed controlling time constant in high-speed 100

zeroing
0353 Speed controlling time constant in low-speed zeroing 30

0361 Speed controlling time constant 1 in thread cutting 20

0362 Maximum acceleration of linear speed controlling in 5000

thread cutting (mm/s*s)
Setting range: 1 ~ 10000(ms)
0365 Stub-axle speed controlling time constant in thread 10

tail rolling
Appendix
Setting range: 1 ~ 200(ms)
0366 Pulse sampling period of spindle in thread cutting 16

(ms)
0367 Linear speed controlling time constant in rigid thread 40

cutting
0368 Initial speed in thread cutting 0

0370 Interval for thread block ending (ms) 0

0371 Reverse positioning tolerance of the 1st axis 0.0150

0372 Reverse positioning tolerance of the 2nd axis 0.0150

306
0373 Reverse positioning tolerance of the 3rd axis 0.0150

0374 Reverse positioning tolerance of the 4th axis 0.0150

0375 Reverse positioning tolerance of the 5th axis 0.0150

If the backlash compensation setting (P0190---P0193) of some axis is greater than its reverse
positioning tolerance setting (P0371---P0374), the spot speed at one section terminal before
backlash compensation decreases to the minimum speed so that other axes move a short distance
during the period of backlash compensation and the synthetic track deviates little from the actual
track.
0376 Sequence of axis movement to program restart 12345

position
0380 Setting of the axis synchronized with the 4th axis 0

0: not synchronized with any axis; 1: X-axis; 2: Y-axis;
3: Z-axis
0381 Maximum permissible error between synchronous 200

axes
0382 Set the dual-drive reference position difference 0.0000
Appendix
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 2000.0000
0384 Control axis number of tool rotating axis for polygon 1500
machining
0385 Maximum speed of tool rotating axis for polygon 0

machining
0386 Spindle speed variation permission level in polygon 0

machining between spindles
0387 Steady-state confirmation state in polygon machining 0

between spindles
0388 Master axis in polygon machining between spindles 0

0389 Polygonal synchronized axis in polygon machining 0

between spindles
307
0392 Moving distance in servo optimization 50

0393 Movement speed in servo optimization 2000

0394 The 1st axis backup of coordinate system 0

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0395 The 2nd axis backup of coordinate system 0

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0396 The 3rd axis backup of coordinate system 0

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0397 The 4th axis backup of coordinate system 0

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0398 The 5th axis backup of coordinate system 0

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
400 Gain adjustment data of the 2 nd spindle speed analog 1

output
401 Bias voltage compensation value in the 2nd spindle 0

Appendix
speed analog output

402 Spindle speed in the 2nd spindle orientation or gear 50

shift
403 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to Tooth 2 6000




407 Minimum suppression speed of the 2nd spindle motor 50

308
408 Maximum suppression speed of the 2nd spindle 6000

motor
Setting range: - 0.2 ~ 0.2
409 Maximum speed of the 2nd spindle 6000

410 Number of lines of the 2nd spindle encoder 1024

411 Number of teeth of the 2nd spindle-side gear (the 1st 1

gear)
412 Number of teeth of the 2nd spindle-side gear (the 2nd 1

gear)
413 Number of teeth of the 2nd spindle-side gear (the 3rd 1

gear)
414 Number of teeth of the 2nd spindle-side gear (the 4th 1

gear)
415 Number of teeth of the 2nd spindle encoder-side gear 1

(the 1st gear)
Appendix
(the 2nd gear)

(the 3rd gear)

(the 4th gear)
419 Spindle motor speed at the 2nd spindle Gear 1-Gear 6000
2 switching point
420 Spindle motor speed at the the 2nd spindle Gear 6000
2-Gear 3 switching point
421 Spindle motor speed at the 2nd spindle Gear 3-Gear 6000
4 switching point
309
422 Forward-rotation M code of the 2nd spindle 63

423 Reverse-rotation M code of the 2nd spindle 64

424 Servo axis number in position output of the 2nd 0

spindle speed command pulse string (0: invalid;
1~5: the 1st axis ~the 5th axis)
425 Linear speed controlling time constant for the 2nd 200
spindle and tapping axis
(the 1st gear)
(the 2nd gear)
(the 3rd gear)
(the 4th gear)
Appendix
429 Time constant for the 2nd spindle and tapping axis in 200
tool retracting (the 1st gear)
tool retracting (the 2nd gear)
tool retracting (the 3rd gear)
tool retracting (the 4th gear)
433 Amount of clearance of the 2nd spindle in rigid 0

tapping (the 1st gear)

tapping (the 2nd gear)
310

tapping (the 3rd gear)
4440 M code started in Cs contouring control axis function 14

4441 M code closed in Cs contouring control axis function 15

0445 Configuration grating accuracy of Axis 1 0.001

Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 10.0000

Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 10.0000

Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 10.0000

Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 10.0000

Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 10.0000
0450 Position deviation limit (mm) in the 1st axis 10

movement
Appendix
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 99.9999
0451 Position deviation limit (mm) in the 2nd axis 10

movement
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 99.9999
0452 Position deviation limit (mm) in the 3rd axis 10

movement
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 99.9999
0453 Position deviation limit (mm) in the 4th axis 10

movement
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 99.9999
0454 Position deviation limit (mm) in the 5th axis 10

movement
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 99.9999
0455 Position deviation limit (mm) when the 1st axis stops 0.5
0456 Position deviation limit (mm) when the 2nd axis stops 0.5
311
0457 Position deviation limit (mm) when the 3rd axis stops 0.5
0458 Position deviation limit (mm) when the 4th axis stops 0.5
0459 Position deviation limit (mm) when the 5th axis stops 0.5
0460 Non-monotonic allowed value of composite 0.1

machining cycles G71 and G72 (Z-axis)
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0461 Non-monotonic allowed value of composite 0.1

machining cycles G71 and G72 (X-axis)
Setting range: 0.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0462 Retracting amount of composite machining fixed 0

cycles G71 and G72
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999

cycles G71 and G72
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0465 Retracting distance of composite machining fixed 0

cycle G 73 (X-axis)
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999
Appendix
0466 Retracting distance of composite machining fixed 0

cycle G 73 (Z-axis)
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0467 Partition times of composite machining fixed cycle 0

G73

cycles G74 and G75
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0469 Minimum feeding amount of composite machining 0

fixed cycle G76
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0470 Fine machining allowance of composite machining 0

fixed cycle G76
Setting range: -9999.0000 ~ 9999.9999
0471 Number of fine machining allowance repetitions of 0

composite machining fixed cycle G76
312
0472 Tool nose angle of composite machining fixed cycle G76 0

0473 Chamfer of threading cycle (G92,G76) (setting *0.1 lead 0

distance)
0474 Cutting angle of threading cycle G76 0

0475 Whether composite machining fixed cycles G71 and G72 0

execute the final rough turning trajectory
0476 Idle stroke at the start position of composite machining fixed 1

cycle G71 cutting feed
0477 Whether the groove tool retracting of composite machining 0

fixed cycle G71 uses 45°retracting
0480 Control axis executing the function of the 1st position switch 0
0481 Control axis executing the function of the 2 nd position 0

switch
Control axis executing the function of the 3rd position switch
Appendix
0482 0
0483 Control axis executing the function of the 4th position switch 0
0485 Control axis executing the function of the 6th position switch 0.
Setting range: 0. ~ 5
0488 Control axis executing the function of the 9th position 0

switch
313
0489 Control axis executing the function of the 10th 0

position switch
0490 Maximum in the action range of the 1st position 0.0000

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0491 Maximum in the action range of the 2 nd position 0.0000

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0492 Maximum in the action range of the 3rd position 0.0000

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0493 Maximum in the action range of the 4th position 0.0000

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
Appendix

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0500 Minimum in the action range of the 1st position switch 0.0000
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0501 Minimum in the action range of the 2 nd position 0.0000

switch
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0502 Minimum in the action range of the 3 rd position switch 0.0000

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
314
0503 Minimum in the action range of the 4 th position switch 0.0000

Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0504 Minimum in the action range of the 5th position switch 0.0000
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
Setting range: -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999
0530 Linear axis number in polar coordinate interpolation 0.0000

(0: None 1~5: the 1st axis ~the 5th axis)
0531 Rotating axis number in polar coordinate interpolation 0.0000

(0: None 1~5: the 1st axis ~the 5th axis)
Appendix
0532 Automatic rate and allowance rate in polar coordinate 90

interpolation, in % (0~100)
0533 Compensation for hypothetical axis direction error in polar 0.0000

Setting range: -999.0000 ~ 999.0000
0535 Set the 1st axis as the axis in basic coordinate system 1
0536 Set the 2nd axis as the axis in basic coordinate system 2
0537 Set the 3rd axis as the axis in basic coordinate system 3
0538 Set the 4th axis as the axis in basic coordinate system 0
315
0539 Set the 5th axis as the axis in basic coordinate system 0
0540 System axis number under PMC-axis control (0: None 0

1~5: the 1st axis ~ the 5th axis)
0541 Least unit of PMC-axis control data (0.0001~360.0) 0.0010

Setting range: 0.0001 ~ 360.0000
0542 Speed controlling time in speed command under 500

PMC-axis control
0545 System axis number under the 2 nd PMC-axis control 0

(0: None 1~5: the 1st axis ~the 2nd axis)
0546 Least unit of the 2nd PMC-axis control data 0.001

(0.0001~360.0)
Setting range: 0.0001 ~ 360
0547 Speed controlling time in speed command under the 2 nd 500

PMC-axis control
0550 System axis number under the 3rd PMC-axis control 0

Appendix
0551 Least unit of the 3rd PMC-axis control data 0.001

(0.0001~360.0)
0552 Speed controlling time in speed command under the 3rd 500
PMC-axis control
0555 System axis number under the 4th PMC-axis control 0

0556 Speed controlling time in speed command under the 4 th 0.001

PMC-axis control (0.0001~360.0)
0557 Speed controlling time in speed command under the 4 th 500

PMC-axis control
316
Appendix II Alarm Table
Alarm
Alarm Content Remarks
No.
0000 This parameter modification requires one-time power-off.
0001 File opening failed
0002 Input data out of range
0003 Program number exists
Digit or Character ―-‖ inputted at the beginning of block should not exist.
0004
Modify program.
The address is followed by another address or EOB code instead of proper
0005
data. Modify program.
Character ―-‖ input error (Character ―-‖ or two or more ―-‖ are inputted behind
0006
an address that cannot have a minus sign). Modify program.
Decimal point "." input error (Character "." or two or more "." are inputted in
0007
an address that cannot have a decimal point). Modify program.
0008 Program file is too large.
0009 The address inputted is illegal. Modify program.
The G code used is not available or the G code commanded does not have
0010
this function. Modify program.
The feed speed is not commanded or is improper in cutting feed. Modify
0011
program.
0012 Out of disk space. Fail to create a file or add to the file.
The number of program files has reached its upper limit. Fail to create a
0013
program.
Appendix
0015 Allowed simultaneously controlled axes exceeded
0016 Current pitch error compensation point out of range
Modification permission denied. Please input a password on password
0017
interface.
Neither null variable or local variable can be modified. G10 can only modify
0018
the user-level parameters.
In arc interpolation (G02 or G03), the distance from start point to arc center
0020 is different from that from end point. Their difference exceeds the value
specified in number parameter 214.
In arc interpolation, an axis commanded is not available on the selected
0021
plane (G17,G18,G19). Modify program.
In arc interpolation, neither R(specified arc radius) nor I, J, K (specified
0022
distance from start point to center) is commanded.
0023 In arc interpolation, both IJK and R are specified.
File format unsupported. The file is big or includes a line exceeding 1024
0026
bytes.
In planar selective command, two or more axes are commanded in the same
0028
direction. Modify program.
The command P value is too large or unspecified in the setting of offset
0031 value, workpiece coordinate system, external workpiece coordinate system,
or additional workpiece coordinate system through G10.
The offset value is too large or unspecified in its setting through G10 or in its
0032
writing through system variable. Modify program.
0033 The intersection in tool offset C or chamfer is not sure. Modify program.
317
Alarm
No.
Fail to create or cancel the tool offset in the case of arc instruction. Modify
0034
program.
0036 In tool offset mode, jump cutting is commanded (G31). Modify program.
The plane selected through G17, G18, or G19 is changed in tool offset C.
0037
Modify program.
In tool offset C, over-cutting will occur, because the start point or end point of
0038
arc coincides with arc center. Modify program.
0039 Tool nose positioning error in tool offset C
Fail to switch the workpiece coordinate system in tool offset C. Please
0040
cancel the tool offset before coordinate system switching.
Interference exists in tool offset C, and over-cutting will occur. Modify
0041
program.
More than ten blocks specifying parking instruction instead of moving
0042 instruction are continuously commanded in tool offset mode. Modify
program.
0043 Permission denied. Please modify the permission on password interface.
In fixed cycle mode, one of G27, G28, G29, and G30 is commanded. Modify
0044
program.
In fixed cycle G73/G83, the cutting depth (Q) is unspecified or equal to 0.
0045
Modify program.
In the 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference points returning command, a command other
0046
than P2, P3, and P4 is given.
0050 Change the moving position in fixed cycle mode.
The block behind fillet or chamfer specifies a wrong movement or moving
0051
distance. Modify program.
0053 Chamfer or fillet command format error. Modify program.
0055 Chamfer movement failed
Appendix
M99 cannot stay in the same block with macro-program command (G65).
0056
Modify program.
0057 File writing failed. Please de-energize the system before restart.
In any chamfer or fillet block, the specified axis is not on the selected plane.
0058
Modify program.
In external program number retrieving, program number is not found or the
0059 specified program is edited in the background. Please check the program
number and external signal or suspend background editing.
Sequence number is not found in sequence number searching. Please
0060
check the sequence number.
0061 The 1st axis away from reference point
0062 The 2nd axis away from reference point
0063 The 3rd axis away from reference point
0064 The 4th axis away from reference point
0065 The 5th axis away from reference point
0066 Cancel the fixed cycle mode before execution of parameter input (G10)
0067 Setting format unsupported by G10
0068 Parameter switch is not on
0069 Close U disk operation interface before machining
0070 Out of memory. Please delete unnecessary programs before retrying.
318
Alarm
No.
Target address is not found, or the specified program not found in program
0071
retrieving. Please check the data.
0072 Over 400 programs are stored. Delete unwanted programs.
The commanded program number has been occupied. Change the program
0073
number or delete unwanted programs.
0074 Program number beyond 1–99999. Change the program number.
0075 Attempting to register a protected program number.
0076 Address P(program number) is not specified in M98 block. Modify program.
0077 Program calling exceeds 5 times. Modify program.
In M98 or G65 block, the program number specified by address P is not
0078
found or the macro-program called by M06 does not exist.
0079 System service life expires. Please contact the supplier.
Input data are unreasonable. Maximum speed is lower than minimum speed
0080
or minimum speed is higher than maximum speed
0081 Macro-program cannot call the subprogram. Modify program.
0084 Key overtime or short-circuit occurs.
Effluence occurs when data are inputted via serial port. The baud rate
0085
setting or input/output device is incorrect.
0086 In fixed cycle mode, system cannot switch planes.
NO.0087~0091 alarm mean that reference point returning is unavailable
because the start point of each axis is too close to the reference point or
0087
because the speed is too low. Keep reference point far enough from start
point or set a high speed of returning.
G27 ( reference point returning checking) instructed not to return to
0092
reference point
Appendix
0093 Motor model mismatching
After power-one, after emergency stop, or if program including G28 does not
0098
return to reference point, execute the program before restart.
In parameter (setting) screen, PWE (parameter writing effective) is set to 1.
0100
Please set it to 0 before restarting the system.
0101 Power-cut memory data disorder. Please ensure the position is correct.
0102 The motor model of system disagrees with that of drive.
0103 bus communication error. Please check the cable reliability.
0104 Machine zero setting overtime
0105 drive unit data acquisition overtime
0106 Gear ratio of drive unit disagrees with that of system servo parameters
0107 Parameters of drive unit disagree with that of system servo parameters
0108 Please insert U disk.
0110 Position data beyond allowed range. Please clear the data.
0111 Calculation result beyond allowed range (-1047 ~ -10 -29, 0 and 10-29 ~ 1047)
0112 Zero (including tan90°) divisor specified
User macro-program specifies an unavailable function command. Modify
0113
program.
0114 G39 format error. Modify program.
319
Alarm
No.
Fail to specify the variable value or to use O, N as variable specified in user
0115
macro-program. Modify program.
A variable is on the left of assignment statement but cannot be assigned.
0116
Modify program.
This parameter does not support G10 online modification. Please modify the
0117
program.
0118 Parenthesis nesting exceeds its upper limit (five layers). Modify program.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, M06 commands cannot stay in the same
0119
block with other M commands.
0120 Part settings are restored.
0121 machine coordinate and encoder feedback exceed the deviation setting.
0122 Nesting layers called by macro-program exceed 5. Modify program.

Program ends illegally, without a M30/M02/M99 command or a ending
0124
character. Modify program.
0125 Macro-program format error. Modify program.
0126 Program cycle false. Modify program.
0127 NC and user macro command statements co-exist. Modify program.
Sequence number is not 0-99999, or is not found, in branch command.
0128
Modify program.
0129 <independent variable assignment> address false. Modify program.
PLC-axis control command is outputted to a CNC controlled axis; or
0130 CNC-axis control command is outputted to PLC controlled axis. Modify
program.
0131 5 or more external alarm messages occurring. Check the ladder graph.
0132 The alarm of external alarm message does not exist. Check PLC.
Appendix
0133 Axis command unsupported. Modify program.

The indexing angle of index workbench is not a multiple of angle unit. Modify
0135
program.
Index workbench indexing specifies B axis and another axis. Modify
0136
program.
The sequence number to be transferred according to jump instruction is
0137
inside loop cycle. Modify program.
Loop statement mismatching or jump instruction entering loop cycle. Modify
0138
program.
0139 Selected axis error under PLC-axis control. Modify program.
0140 Sequence number specified in macro command does not exit.
Scaling magnification beyond 1–999999 specified. Modify the scaling
0142
setting.
0145 G28 command specified before reference point is determined.
automatic corner deceleration beyond judgment corner setting range. Modify
0148
the parameter.
0150 Wrong modal command
An unavailable command is specified between blocks specified by P and Q
0151
in composite fixed cycle.
0160 In polar coordinate mode, arc can only be programmed by R.
In polar coordinate mode, a reference point, or plane selection, or direction
0161
related command cannot be executed.
320
Alarm
No.
0165 Please specify a command, scaling or G10 command, in a single block.
0166 No axis specified during reference point returning
0167 Midpoint coordinate is too large.
Hole-bottom minimum pause time should be shorter than hole-bottom
0168
maximum pause time.
Tool radius compensation is not canceled when entering or exiting
0170
subprogram.
In the block calling the subprogram, P is not an integer or P is smaller than or
0172
equal to 0.
0173 Subprogram calling times cannot exceed 9999.
0175 Fixed cycle can only be executed on G17 plane.
0176 Spindle speed unspecified before the start of rigid tapping
IO control under G76 command does not support the spindle orientation
0177
function. Modify the program or parameter
0178 Spindle speed unspecified before the start of fixed cycle
0181 Illegal M code
0182 Spindle speed is too high or too low.
0183 Illegal T code
0184 Selected tool out of range
0189 U is too small. U should be greater than or equal to tool radius.
0190 V is too small or V is undefined. V should be greater than 0.
0191 W is too small or W is undefined. W should be greater than 0.
0192 Q is too small or Q is undefined. Q should be greater than 0.
Appendix
0193 I is undefined or I is 0.
0194 J is undefined or J is 0.
0195 D is undefined or D is 0.
In constant surface cutting speed control, the specified axis is wrong. (See
0198
parameter No.254). Its command P includes illegal data. Modify program.
0199 Macro command undefined. Modify program.
In rigid tapping, S value is out of range or unspecified. In rigid tapping, S max
0200
is specified through a parameter. Modify the parameter setting or program.
0204 M29 should be specified in G80 mode. Modify program.
0206 Plane switching is specified in rigid mode. Modify program.
This command cannot be executed in G10 mode. Please cancel G10 mode
0208
first.
0210 Program restart filename is inconsistent. Please select correct filename.
The chamfer or reverse R is commanded or there is an additional axis on the
0212
plane. Modify program.
0213 Tool shift macro-program does not support G31 jump. Modify program.
0214 Tool shift macro-program does not support jump operation.
Tool shift macro-program does not support dynamic modification of
0215
coordinate system and tool offset.
0219 Tool base is unused (parameter is not opened). Cannot use tool shift
321
Alarm
No.
command M06.
Scaling/rotation/polar coordinate does not support metric-British input
0220
switching.
0221 Tool shift macro-program does not support metric-British input switching.
Before the start of automatic running, reference point returning is not
0224
executed.
In the specified format of program parameter input, the following errors
occur:
1) Address N or R is not inputted;
0231
2) Parameter No. is unspecified;
3) Address P is unspecified when bit parameter is inputted to L50;
4) N, P, R are out of range. Modify program.
0232 3 or more axes are specified as spiral interpolation axes.
0233 Other operations are using the device connecting to the RS-232-C port.
0235 Record ending character (%) is commanded.
0236 Program restart parameter setting error
0237 The decimal point of command is unspecified as necessary.
The same address occurs many times in a block, or two or more G codes of
0238
the same group occur in a block.
An illegal G code is specified in pre-reading control mode. The indexing axis
is specified in pre-processing control mode. Maximum cutting feed
0239
parameter is set to 0. Speed controlling parameter before interpolation is set
to 0. Set parameters properly.
0241 Manual pulse exception
0242 Bus connection error
0250 Axis name already exists. Please modify the parameters NO.175~179.
Appendix
emergency stop alarm. After canceling the alarm, please return to zero point
0251
again.
Program ending illegal (CNC transmission speed is low. Please decrease
0252
the feed speed)
The pulse command speed of DSP interpolation axis is too high. Please
0261
press ―reset‖ before zero-point returning.
0262 DSP alarm: DSP is not started. Please energize the system again.
0263 DSP alarm: DSP parameter setting error
0264 DSP alarm: The sent data is too large. Please energize the system again.
0265 DSP alarm: Bus cannot be connected, or bus initialization fails.
DSP interpolation axis speed exceeds 200M/MIN. Please press ―reset‖
0266
before zero-point returning.
DSP initialization mark (5555) exception. Please press ―reset‖ before
0267
zero-point returning.
The unit cycle output of DSP is too large. Please press ―reset‖ before
0268
zero-point returning.
0269 DSP internal alarm. Please press ―reset‖ before zero-point returning.
0270 The interpolation point length divided equally by DSP is too small.
Interpolation data received by DSP are too small. Press ―emergency stop‖
0271
before zero returning again.
0272 DSP receives an unidentifiable G code.
322
Alarm
No.
0273 DSP hardware data interaction exception (command type)
0274 DSP hardware data interaction exception (data type)
0275 In high-speed mode, interpolation speed magnification is 0.
Before the use of tool setting function, each axis should return to zero point
0280
first.
It is required to switch to [setting][tool setting center division] interface before
0281
the use of tool setting function.
Please check whether the tool setting meter is installed or whether bit
0282
parameter 1.6 is set to 1.
Z-axis surpasses the safe position. Please check tool setting meter or tool
0283
length setting.
0286 Automatic measurement error. Please execute measurement once again.
0401 Drive unit alarm 01: Servo motor speed exceeds its setting
0402 Drive unit alarm 02: Primary circuit supply voltage is too high.
0403 Drive unit alarm 03: Primary circuit supply voltage is too low.
Drive unit alarm 04: The value of position deviation counter exceeds the
0404
setting.
0405 Drive unit alarm 05: motor overheating
0406 Drive unit alarm 06: Speed controller is saturated for long.
0407 Drive unit alarm 07: Both CCW and CW drive inputs are off.
Drive unit alarm 08: The absolute value of position deviation counter reading
0408
exceeds 230.
0409 Drive unit alarm 09: Encoder signal error
0410 Drive unit alarm 10: Control supply ± 15V is low
Appendix
0411 Drive unit alarm 11: IPM intelligent module fault
0412 Drive unit alarm 12: Motor current is too large.
Drive unit alarm 13: servo drive unit and motor overload (instantaneous
0413
overheating)
0414 Drive unit alarm 14: braking circuit fault
0415 Drive unit alarm 15: encoder counting exception
0420 Drive unit alarm 20: EEPROM error
0430 Drive unit alarm 30: encoder Z pulse error
0431 Drive unit alarm 31: encoder UVW signal error or mismatching the encoder
0432 Drive unit alarm 32: UVW signal includes fully high level or fully low level
0433 Drive unit alarm 33: communication interrupted
0434 Drive unit alarm 34: encoder speed exception
0435 Drive unit alarm 35: encoder state exception
0436 Drive unit alarm 36: encoder counting exception
0437 Drive unit alarm 37: encoder one-loop counting effluence
0438 Drive unit alarm 38: encoder counting effluence
0439 Drive unit alarm 39: encoder battery alarm
0440 Drive unit alarm 40: power shortage of encoder battery
323
Alarm
No.
0441 Drive unit alarm 41: motor model mismatching
0442 Drive unit alarm 42: absolute position data exception
0443 Drive unit alarm 43: encoder EPPROM checking
0449 Ethernet initialization fails. Please check hardware.
0450 Drive unit interrupted. Please check whether hardware connection is proper.
0451 Drive unit alarm of the 1st axis
0452 Drive unit alarm of the 2nd axis
0453 Drive unit alarm of the 3rd axis
0454 Drive unit alarm of the 4th axis
0455 Drive unit alarm of the 5th axis
0456 Drive unit alarm of spindle
Beyond the machining cycles that G71, G72, G73, G76, G90, G92, or G94
0460
can process
0466 Path non-monotonous: X direction
0467 Path non-monotonous: Z direction
Software limit negative over-travel of the 1st axis: (negative movement
0500
release in manual or manual pulse mode).
Software limit negative over-travel of the 1st axis: (negative movement
0501
Software limit negative over-travel of the 2nd axis: (positive movement
0502
Software limit negative over-travel of the 2nd axis: (negative movement
0503
Software limit negative over-travel of the 3rd axis: (positive movement
Appendix
0504
Software limit negative over-travel of the 3rd axis: (negative movement
0505
Software limit negative over-travel of the 4th axis: (positive movement
0506
Software limit negative over-travel of the 4th axis: (negative movement
0507
Software limit negative over-travel of the 5th axis: (positive movement
0508
Software limit negative over-travel of the 5th axis: (negative movement
0509
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 1st axis: (over-travel release;
0510
positive movement release in manual or manual pulse mode).
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 1st axis: (over-travel release;
0511
negative movement release in manual or manual pulse mode).
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 2nd axis: (over-travel release;
0512
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 2nd axis: (over-travel release;
0513
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 3rd axis: (over-travel release;
0514
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 3rd axis: (over-travel release;
0515
Hardware limit negative over-travel of the 4th axis: (over-travel release;
0516
324
Alarm
No.
0517
0518
0519
Operation keyboard is disconnected. Please check the connecting cable of
0600
operation keyboard.
1001 The address of relay or coil is not set.
1002 Code input function: The code does not exist.
Function command: COM is not used properly. The correspondence of COM
1003 to COME is wrong, or a function command is used between COM and
COME.
The user ladder graph exceeds the maximum number of lines or steps
1004
allowed. (solution) Reduce the number of NETs edited.
Function command: Neither END1 nor END2 exist; or either END1 or END2
1005
is wrong; or the sequence of END1 and END2 is incorrect.
1006 Illegal output exists in the network. Please check the output format.
Hardware fault or system interruption fault causes PLC cannot
1007
communicate. Please contact the system equipment manufacturer.
1008 The function code is not connected properly.
1009 The network horizontal line is not connected.
1010 Power failure causes the loss of network in editing of ladder graph.
The address or the datum is mismatched with the function command format.
1011
Please input again.
1012 The address or the data is inputted improperly. Please input again.
Appendix
1013 The specified character is illegal or the datum is out of range.
CTR address already exists. Please select another CTR address that is not
1014
occupied.
Function command: JMP is inputted improperly; the correspondence of JMP
1015 to LBL is wrong; or the JMP function command is used again between JMP
and LBL.
1016 The network structure is incomplete. Modify the ladder graph.
1017 An unsupported network structure occurs. Modify the ladder graph.
1019 TMR address has been used. Re-select another TMR address unused.
1020 Function command is short of parameters. Input legal parameters.
PLC execution overtime. The system stops PLC automatically. Please check
1021 the ladder graph logic and remove the dead cycle or too many calling
repetitions.
Function command name missing. Please input the function command name
1022
properly.
1023 The address or constant of function command parameter is out of range.
1024 An unnecessary relay or coil exists. Delete unnecessary connections.
1025 The function command is outputted improperly.
The number of network connecting lines is out of the supported range.
1026
Modify the ladder graph.
The same output address is used somewhere else. Re-select an output
1027
address unused.
325
Alarm
No.
1028 Ladder graph file format error
1029 The ladder graph in use is gone.
1030 Incorrect vertical lines exist in the network. Delete these vertical lines.
1031 User data zone is full. Please reduce the COD code datatable capacity.
The first level of ladder graph is too large and cannot be executed in time.
1032
Reduce the first level ladder graphs.
Function command SFT exceeds the maximum amount of use allowed.
1033
Please reduce the amount of use.
Function command DIFU/DIFD address repeated. Please re-select the
1034
address.
1039 The command or network is out of the range of execution. Please remove it.
Function command CALL or SP is inputted improperly; correspondence
between CALL and SP or between SP and SPE is wrong; or SP function
1040
command is used again between SP and SPE; or SP is set before the use of
END2.
1041 The horizontal conducting line is connected to node network in parallel.
1042 PLC system parameter file is not loaded.

Appendix
326

GSK 980TDHi Program & Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GSK 980TDHi Program & Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GSK 980TDHi Program & Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This manual is used for PLC of GSK980TDHi series bus lathe

CNC system and its installation and connection.

In this user manual we have tried to describe the matters

Copyright is reserved to GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. It is

We are honored by your purchase of this GSK 988TD Turning CNC

This manual is used for PLC of GSK980TDHi bus-based lathe CNC

Accident may occur by improper connection and operation！This

system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel.

CNC system made by GSK.

It can‘t be applied to other purposes, or else it may cause serious

This manual is kept by the end user.

Thank you for supporting us in the use of GSK‘s products!

PART I PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION.......................................... 1

4.3.1 Automatic return to machine zero (G28) ......................................................................... 68

5.2.4 Call of subprogram code instruction (M98) ....................................................................144

PART II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .............................................. 158

3.3.2.1 Parameter display ...................................................................................................................... 180

4.3.4 Tailstock control ................................................................................................................221

10.1.1.4 Cursor positioning method ..................................................................................................... 247

Part One Programming

1.1 Product Introduction

GSK980TDHi series bus-based machine tool CNC system (hereinafter referred to as

Part One Programming

1.2 Technical Specifications

Acceleration/deceleration mode: Front acceleration/deceleration (linear and S types); rear

Part One Programming

1.3 Model Definition

S/N Code Description

① Main attribute part of product model:GSK980TDHi series

Functional (processing object) configuration: Signify with capital English letters

◆ GSK980TDHi-U1 means 980TDHi series, united structure, 8.4‘‘ LCD.

Chapter 2 Basic Knowledge of Programming

2.1 Control Axis

2.2 Axis Name

Part One Programming

Fig. 2-2-1 Axis Diagram of Machine tool

2.3 Axis Display

2.4 Machine zero and Coordinate System

2.5 Workpiece Coordinate System

Part One Programming

Fig. 2-5-1 Reference Point on Chuck End Face

Fig. 2-5-2 Reference Point on Workpiece End Face

2.6 Absolute Value Programming and Increment Value Programming

Cod of Absolute Code of Relative

X U X-axis movement code

Z W Z-axis movement code

Fig. 2-6-1 Programming Method

2. 7 Diameter and Radius Type Programming

Part One Programming

2. 8 Modal, Amodal and Initial State

G0 X100 Z100; (rapid positioning to X100 Z100 part)

is G00, G18, G21, G40, G54, G97 and G98.

Chapter 3 Part Program Composition

3.1 Program Composition

Part One Programming

3.1.1 Program name

Fig. 3-1-1-1 Program Name Composition

3.1.2 Sequence number and program segment

3.1.3 Code word

Fig. 3-1-3-1 Code Word Composition

Format: G32 X(U) Z(W) F(I) JKQ;

Format: G34 X(U) Z(W) F(I) J KR_Q__;